Early WritingsThis web site consists of an incredible amount of information for Christians and those seeking Bible truth.http://www.crcbermuda.com/reference/ellen-white-books-a-f/early-writings2010-09-10T12:50:45ZJoomla! 1.5 - Open Source Content ManagementPreface2008-08-10T23:38:04Z2008-08-10T23:38:04Zhttp://www.crcbermuda.com/reference/ellen-white-books-a-f/early-writings/1704-prefaceBrother Michaelmichael@nisbett.com<p><span>Rare indeed it is in these changing times that a book lives on through a century in
ever-increasing demand and takes its place in current reading by the side of books dealing
with present issues. Yet such is the enviable record of Early Writings of Ellen G. White.
Through the years there have been many printings of the several editions. It now appears
in a fifth American Edition.</span></p>
<p><span>This popular little volume is rightly named, being a republication of the first three
Ellen G. White books -- Christian Experience and Views of Mrs. E. G. White, first printed
in 1851; a supplement to Experience and Views, issued in 1854; and Spiritual Gifts, Volume
I, which appeared in 1858.</span></p>
<p><span>The wide and lasting popularity of Early Writings may be attributed to the unwaning
desire to possess and study the messages of information and encouragement which came early
to the church through the prophetic gift.</span></p>
<p><span>The second printing of this matter was made in 1882 in two small volumes-- Experience
and Views and the Supplement comprising the first, and Spiritual Gifts the second. As to
certain additions to the first of these original works and some slight editorial changes
made at that time, the publisher's preface states:</span></p>
<p><span>"Footnotes giving dates and explanations, and an appendix giving two very
interesting dreams, which were mentioned but not related in the original work, will add to
the value of this edition. Aside from these, no changes from the original work have been
made in the present edition, except the occasional employment of a new word, or a change
in the construction of a sentence, to better express the idea, and no portion of the work
has been omitted. No shadow of change has been made in any idea or sentiment of the
original work, and the verbal changes have been made under The author's own eye, and with
her full approval."</span></p>
<p><span>The two companion books were also reissued as a single volume in 1882 under the title
Early Writings. In 1906 the type was reset to make the third American Edition, which has
had wide distribution, meeting the ever-increasing demand. The paging of this edition
became the standard for all reference work and the subsequently published indexes to the
writings of Mrs. White.</span></p>
<p><span>The fourth edition of Early Writings was published in 1945. Forty years of printing and
reprinting made necessary new printing plates. As the type was reset the content was held
page for page with the edition it succeeded. Modern spelling and current forms of
punctuation were employed and a new preface reviewed briefly the history of the book. </span></p>
<p><span>This fifth edition is characterised by a historical prologue, added to furnish the
reader with a knowledge of the times and circumstances of the various portions of the book
and by several appendix notes provided to explain expressions and situations not so well
understood now as at the time of writing. There has been no change of the E. G. White text
nor change in the paging from the fourth edition which this succeeds, consequently it
harmonises with the comprehensive Index to the writings of Ellen G. White.</span></p>
<p><span>In Experience and Views is presented Mrs. White's first biographical sketch, briefly
tracing her experience through the advent movement of 1840-44. Then follow a number of the
earlier visions, many of which had first appeared in print in broadside or periodical
article form.</span></p>
<p><span>The Supplement explains certain expressions of the earlier work which had been
misunderstood or misconstrued, and gives additional counsel to the church. Its publication
preceded by one year the first pamphlet bearing the title of Testimony for the Church.</span></p>
<p><span>Spiritual Gifts, Volume I, being the first published account of the long-extended
conflict between Christ and his angels and Satan and his angels, is cherished for its
vivid descriptions and its compactness, touching as it does only the more salient points.
In succeeding years this brief story of the conflict was greatly amplified in the four
volumes of The Spirit of Prophecy, published 1870-84. After wide distribution, this
four-book set was replaced by the well-known and widely read conflict of the ages series,
presenting the account in still more detailed form, as it had been presented to Mrs. White
in many revelations. Even though the fuller volumes-- Patriarchs and Prophets, Prophets
and Kings, the Desire of Ages, the Acts of the Apostles, and the Great Controversy--
present the conflict story in its more complete form, the initial writing of the account
as here presented in its brief, clear-cut, simple form, will, with Experience and Views,
always be in large demand.</span></p>
<p><span>The Trustees of the Ellen G. White Publications.<br />
Washington, D.C.<br />
March, 1963</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Preface to First Edition of "Experience and Views"</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>We are well aware that many honest seekers after truth and bible holiness are
prejudiced against visions. Two great causes have created this prejudice. First
fanaticism, accompanied by false visions and exercises, has existed more or less almost
everywhere. This has led many of the sincere to doubt anything of the kind. Secondly, the
exhibition of mesmerism, and what is commonly called the "mysterious rapping,"
are perfectly calculated to deceive, and create unbelief relative to the gifts and
operations of the Spirit of God.</span></p>
<p><span>But God is unchangeable. His work through Moses in the presence of pharaoh was perfect,
notwithstanding Jannes and Jambres were permitted to perform miracles by the power of
Satan, that resembled the miracles wrought by Moses. The counterfeit also appeared in the
days of the apostles, yet the gifts of the spirit were manifested in the followers of
christ. And It is not the purpose of God to leave his people in this age of almost
unbounded deception without the gifts and manifestations of his spirit.</span></p>
<p><span>The design of a counterfeit is to imitate an existing reality. Therefore the present
manifestation of the spirit of error is proof that God manifests himself to his children
by the power of the holy spirit, and that he is about to fulfil his word gloriously.</span></p>
<p><span>"And it shall come to pass in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of my
spirit upon all flesh: and your sons and daughters shall prophesy, and your young men
shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams." acts 2:17. (Cf. Joel 2:28.)</span></p>
<p><span>As for mesmerism, we have ever considered it dangerous, therefore have had nothing to
do with it. We never even saw a person in a mesmeric sleep and know nothing of the art by
experience.</span></p>
<p><span>We send out this little work with the hope that it will comfort the saints.</span></p>
<p><span>James White.<br />
Saratoga Springs, N.Y., August, 1851</span></p>
<p><span> </span></p><p><span>Rare indeed it is in these changing times that a book lives on through a century in
ever-increasing demand and takes its place in current reading by the side of books dealing
with present issues. Yet such is the enviable record of Early Writings of Ellen G. White.
Through the years there have been many printings of the several editions. It now appears
in a fifth American Edition.</span></p>
<p><span>This popular little volume is rightly named, being a republication of the first three
Ellen G. White books -- Christian Experience and Views of Mrs. E. G. White, first printed
in 1851; a supplement to Experience and Views, issued in 1854; and Spiritual Gifts, Volume
I, which appeared in 1858.</span></p>
<p><span>The wide and lasting popularity of Early Writings may be attributed to the unwaning
desire to possess and study the messages of information and encouragement which came early
to the church through the prophetic gift.</span></p>
<p><span>The second printing of this matter was made in 1882 in two small volumes-- Experience
and Views and the Supplement comprising the first, and Spiritual Gifts the second. As to
certain additions to the first of these original works and some slight editorial changes
made at that time, the publisher's preface states:</span></p>
<p><span>"Footnotes giving dates and explanations, and an appendix giving two very
interesting dreams, which were mentioned but not related in the original work, will add to
the value of this edition. Aside from these, no changes from the original work have been
made in the present edition, except the occasional employment of a new word, or a change
in the construction of a sentence, to better express the idea, and no portion of the work
has been omitted. No shadow of change has been made in any idea or sentiment of the
original work, and the verbal changes have been made under The author's own eye, and with
her full approval."</span></p>
<p><span>The two companion books were also reissued as a single volume in 1882 under the title
Early Writings. In 1906 the type was reset to make the third American Edition, which has
had wide distribution, meeting the ever-increasing demand. The paging of this edition
became the standard for all reference work and the subsequently published indexes to the
writings of Mrs. White.</span></p>
<p><span>The fourth edition of Early Writings was published in 1945. Forty years of printing and
reprinting made necessary new printing plates. As the type was reset the content was held
page for page with the edition it succeeded. Modern spelling and current forms of
punctuation were employed and a new preface reviewed briefly the history of the book. </span></p>
<p><span>This fifth edition is characterised by a historical prologue, added to furnish the
reader with a knowledge of the times and circumstances of the various portions of the book
and by several appendix notes provided to explain expressions and situations not so well
understood now as at the time of writing. There has been no change of the E. G. White text
nor change in the paging from the fourth edition which this succeeds, consequently it
harmonises with the comprehensive Index to the writings of Ellen G. White.</span></p>
<p><span>In Experience and Views is presented Mrs. White's first biographical sketch, briefly
tracing her experience through the advent movement of 1840-44. Then follow a number of the
earlier visions, many of which had first appeared in print in broadside or periodical
article form.</span></p>
<p><span>The Supplement explains certain expressions of the earlier work which had been
misunderstood or misconstrued, and gives additional counsel to the church. Its publication
preceded by one year the first pamphlet bearing the title of Testimony for the Church.</span></p>
<p><span>Spiritual Gifts, Volume I, being the first published account of the long-extended
conflict between Christ and his angels and Satan and his angels, is cherished for its
vivid descriptions and its compactness, touching as it does only the more salient points.
In succeeding years this brief story of the conflict was greatly amplified in the four
volumes of The Spirit of Prophecy, published 1870-84. After wide distribution, this
four-book set was replaced by the well-known and widely read conflict of the ages series,
presenting the account in still more detailed form, as it had been presented to Mrs. White
in many revelations. Even though the fuller volumes-- Patriarchs and Prophets, Prophets
and Kings, the Desire of Ages, the Acts of the Apostles, and the Great Controversy--
present the conflict story in its more complete form, the initial writing of the account
as here presented in its brief, clear-cut, simple form, will, with Experience and Views,
always be in large demand.</span></p>
<p><span>The Trustees of the Ellen G. White Publications.<br />
Washington, D.C.<br />
March, 1963</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Preface to First Edition of "Experience and Views"</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>We are well aware that many honest seekers after truth and bible holiness are
prejudiced against visions. Two great causes have created this prejudice. First
fanaticism, accompanied by false visions and exercises, has existed more or less almost
everywhere. This has led many of the sincere to doubt anything of the kind. Secondly, the
exhibition of mesmerism, and what is commonly called the "mysterious rapping,"
are perfectly calculated to deceive, and create unbelief relative to the gifts and
operations of the Spirit of God.</span></p>
<p><span>But God is unchangeable. His work through Moses in the presence of pharaoh was perfect,
notwithstanding Jannes and Jambres were permitted to perform miracles by the power of
Satan, that resembled the miracles wrought by Moses. The counterfeit also appeared in the
days of the apostles, yet the gifts of the spirit were manifested in the followers of
christ. And It is not the purpose of God to leave his people in this age of almost
unbounded deception without the gifts and manifestations of his spirit.</span></p>
<p><span>The design of a counterfeit is to imitate an existing reality. Therefore the present
manifestation of the spirit of error is proof that God manifests himself to his children
by the power of the holy spirit, and that he is about to fulfil his word gloriously.</span></p>
<p><span>"And it shall come to pass in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of my
spirit upon all flesh: and your sons and daughters shall prophesy, and your young men
shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams." acts 2:17. (Cf. Joel 2:28.)</span></p>
<p><span>As for mesmerism, we have ever considered it dangerous, therefore have had nothing to
do with it. We never even saw a person in a mesmeric sleep and know nothing of the art by
experience.</span></p>
<p><span>We send out this little work with the hope that it will comfort the saints.</span></p>
<p><span>James White.<br />
Saratoga Springs, N.Y., August, 1851</span></p>
<p><span> </span></p>Historical Prologue2008-08-10T23:39:07Z2008-08-10T23:39:07Zhttp://www.crcbermuda.com/reference/ellen-white-books-a-f/early-writings/1705-historical-prologueBrother Michaelmichael@nisbett.com<span>Early Writings is a work of lasting and special interest to Seventh-day Adventists, for
it embodies the earliest Ellen G. White books. These were written and first published in
the 1850's for the edification and instruction of those who with the author had passed
through the experiences of the Sabbathkeeping Adventists in the 1840's and the early
1850's. This being so, the author assumed on the part of the reader a familiarity with the
history of the Advent Awakening and the development of the Seventh-day Adventist movement
that emerged in 1844. Consequently experiences well understood at the time are in some
instances merely alluded to, and expressions are employed which to be correctly
understood, must be thought of in the framework of the history of the Sabbathkeeping
Adventists in those early years.</span>
<p><span>In 1858, in writing of the sounding of the messages of the three angels of Revelation
14, Ellen White deals with the experiences of those who participated in the work and draws
lessons from these experiences, rather than giving as one might expect, a clear-cut
presentation of the character of these messages. See pages 232-240; 254-258. She at times
employs such now unfamiliar terms as "nominal Adventist," "shut door,"
"open door," et cetera.</span></p>
<p><span>Today we are removed by more than a century from those heroic times. The reader must
keep this clearly in mind. The history which was so well known to the contemporaries of
Ellen White we shall now review, touching some of the high points of the experiences of
the Sabbathkeeping Adventists during the decade or two preceding the first publication of
the materials that appear here.</span></p>
<p><span>In the opening paragraphs Mrs. White makes brief reference to her conversion and her
early Christian experience. She tells also of hearing lectures on the Bible doctrine of
the expected personal Advent of Christ, which was thought to be near at hand. The great
Advent Awakening to which such brief reference is here made was a movement world-wide in
its outreach. It emerged as the result of careful study of the prophetic Scriptures on the
part of many, and the acceptance of the good news of the coming of Jesus by large numbers
of people throughout the world. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Great Advent Awakening</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>But it was in the United States that the Advent message was most widely proclaimed and
received. As Bible prophecies relating to the return of Jesus were accepted by able men
and women of many religious faiths, a large following of earnest Adventist believers
resulted. It should be noted, however, that no separate and distinct religious
organisation was formed. The Advent hope led to deep religious revivals that benefited all
the protestant churches and led many sceptics and infidels to publicly confess their faith
in the Bible and in God.</span></p>
<p><span>As the movement neared its high point in the early 1840's, several hundred ministers
united in proclaiming the message. In the lead was William Miller, who lived in the
eastern edge of New York state. He was a man of prominence in his community and engaged in
farming as a livelihood. In spite of a rich religious background, he had grown sceptical
in his youth. He lost faith in the Word of God and adopted deistic views. While reading a
sermon in the Baptist church one Sunday morning, the Holy Spirit touched his heart, and he
was led to accept Jesus Christ as his saviour. Miller set about to study the Word of God,
determined to find in the Bible a satisfactory answer to all his questions, and to learn
for himself the truths set forth in its pages.</span></p>
<p><span>For two years he devoted much of his time to a verse-by-verse study of the Scriptures.
He determined not to take up the next verse until he felt he had found a satisfactory
explanation of the one he was studying. He had before him only his Bible and a
concordance. In time he came in his study to the prophecies of the literal, personal,
second coming of Christ. He grappled also with the great time prophecies, particularly the
2300-day prophecy of Daniel 8 and 9, which he linked with the prophecy of Revelation 14
and the message of the angel proclaiming the hour of God's judgement (rev. 14:6, 7). In
this volume, on page 229, Mrs. White states that "God sent his angel to move upon the
heart" of William Miller, "to lead him to search the prophecies."</span></p>
<p><span>In her girlhood Mrs. White heard Miller deliver two series of lectures in the city of
Portland, Maine. A deep and lasting impression was made on her heart. We will let her set
before us the reckoning of the prophecies, as Elder Miller presented them to his
audiences. For this we turn to Mrs. White's later book, the Great Controversy: <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Reckoning of the Prophetic Periods</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>"The prophecy which seemed most clearly to reveal the time of the second Advent
was that of Dan. 8:14: 'unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary
be cleansed.' following his rule of making Scripture its own interpreter, Miller learned
that a day in symbolic prophecy represents a year [Num. 14:34; Eze. 4:6.]; he saw that the
period of 2300 prophetic days, or literal years, would extend far beyond the close of the
Jewish dispensation, hence it could not refer to the sanctuary of that dispensation.
Miller accepted the generally received view, that in the Christian age the earth is the
sanctuary, and he therefore understood that the cleansing of the sanctuary foretold in
Dan. 8:14 represented the purification of the earth by fire at the second coming of
Christ. If, then, the correct starting-point could be found for the 2300 days, he
concluded that the time of the second Advent could be readily ascertained. Thus would be
revealed the time of that great consummation, the time when the present state, with 'all
its pride and power, pomp and vanity, wickedness and oppression, would come to an end;'
when the curse would be 'removed from off the earth, death be destroyed, reward be given
to the servants of God, the prophets and saints, and them who fear his name, and those be
destroyed that destroy the earth.' [footnote: Bliss, Memoirs of Wm. Miller, p. 76.]</span></p>
<p><span>"With a new and deeper earnestness, Miller continued the examination of the
prophecies, whole nights as well as days being devoted to the study of what now appeared
of such stupendous importance and all-absorbing interest. In the eighth chapter of Daniel
he could find no clue to the starting-point of the 2300 days; the angel Gabriel, though
commanded to make Daniel understand the vision, gave him only a partial explanation. As
the terrible persecution to befall the church was unfolded to the prophet's vision,
physical strength gave way. He could endure no more, and the angel left him for a time.
Daniel 'fainted, and was sick certain days.' 'And I was astonished at the vision,' he
says, 'but none understood it.'</span></p>
<p><span>"Yet God had bidden his messenger, 'make this man to understand the vision.' That
commission must be fulfilled. In obedience to it, the angel, some time afterward, returned
to Daniel, saying, 'I am now come forth to give thee skill and understanding;' 'Therefore
understand the matter, and consider the vision.' [Dan. 9:22, 23, 25-27.] There was one
important point in the vision of chapter eight which had been left unexplained, namely,
that relating to time,--the period of the 2300 days; therefore the angel, in resuming his
explanation, dwells chiefly upon the subject of time: </span></p>
<p><span>"'Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people and upon thy holy city.... know
therefore and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to restore and to
build Jerusalem unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and threescore and two
weeks: the street shall be built again, and the wall, even in troublous times. And after
threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not for himself. ... and he shall
confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in the midst of the week he shall cause
the sacrifice and the oblation to cease.'</span></p>
<p><span>"The angel had been sent to Daniel for the express purpose of explaining to him
the point which he had failed to understand in the vision of the eighth chapter, the
statement relative to time,--'unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the
sanctuary be cleansed.' After bidding Daniel 'understand the matter, and consider the
vision,' the very first words of the angel are, 'seventy weeks are determined upon thy
people and upon thy holy city.' The word here translated 'determined,' literally signifies
'cut off.' Seventy weeks, representing 490 years, are declared by the angel to be cut off,
as specially pertaining to the Jews. But from what were they cut off? As the 2300 days was
the only period of time mentioned in chapter eight, it must be the period from which the
seventy weeks were cut off; the seventy weeks must therefore be a part of the 2300 days,
and the two periods must begin together. The seventy weeks were declared by the angel to
date from the going forth of the commandment to restore and build Jerusalem. If the date
of this commandment could be found, then the starting-point for the great period of the
2300 days would be ascertained.</span></p>
<p><span>"In the seventh chapter of Ezra the decree is found. [Ezra 7:12-26.] In its
completest form it was issued by Artaxerxes, king of Persia, b.c. 457. But in Ezra 6:14
the house of the Lord at Jerusalem is said to have been built 'according to the
commandment [margin, decree] of Cyrus, and Darius, and Artaxerxes king of Persia.' These
three kings, in originating, re-affirming, and completing the decree, brought it to the
perfection required by the prophecy to mark the beginning of the 2300 years. Taking b.c.
457, the time when the decree was completed, as the date of the commandment, every
specification of the prophecy concerning the seventy weeks was seen to have been
fulfilled.</span></p>
<p><span>"'From the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem unto
the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and threescore and two weeks.'--namely,
sixty-nine weeks, or 483 years. The decree of Artaxerxes went into effect in the autumn of
b.c. 457. From this date, 483 years extend to the autumn of a.d. 27. At that time this
prophecy was fulfilled. The word 'Messiah' signifies 'the anointed one.' In the autumn of
a.d. 27, Christ was baptised by John, and received the anointing of the Spirit. The
apostle peter testifies that 'God anointed Jesus of Nazareth with the holy ghost and with
power.' [Acts 10:38.] and the Saviour himself declared, 'the Spirit of the Lord is upon
me, because he hath anointed me to preach the gospel to the poor.' [Luke 4:18.] After his
baptism he went into Galilee, 'preaching the gospel of the kingdom of God, and saying, the
time is fulfilled.' [Mark 1:14, 15.] </span></p>
<p><span>"'And he shall confirm the covenant with many for one week.' The 'week' here
brought to view is the last one of the seventy; it is the last seven years of the period
allotted especially to the Jews. During this time, extending from a.d. 27 to a.d. 34,
Christ, at first in person and afterward by his disciples, extended the gospel invitation
especially to the Jews. As the apostles went forth with the good tidings of the kingdom,
the Saviour's direction was, 'go not into the way of the Gentiles, and into any city of
the Samaritans enter ye not: but go rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel.'
[Matt. 10:5, 6.]</span></p>
<p><span>"'In the midst of the week he shall cause the sacrifice and the oblation to
cease.' In a.d. 31, three and a half years after His baptism, our Lord was crucified. With
the great sacrifice offered upon Calvary, ended that system of offerings which for four
thousand years had pointed forward to the Lamb of God. Type had met antitype, and all the
sacrifices and oblations of the ceremonial system were there to cease.</span></p>
<p><span>"The seventy weeks, or 490 years, especially allotted to the Jews, ended, as we
have seen, in a.d. 34. At that time, through the action of the Jewish Sanhedrim, the
nation sealed its rejection of the gospel by the martyrdom of Stephen and the persecution
of the followers of Christ. Then the message of salvation, no longer restricted to the
chosen people, was given to the world. The disciples, forced by persecution to flee from
Jerusalem, 'went everywhere preaching the word.' 'Philip went down to the city of Samaria,
and preached Christ unto them.' Peter, divinely guided, opened the gospel to the centurion
of Caesarea, the God-fearing Cornelius; and the ardent Paul, won to the faith of Christ,
was commissioned to carry the glad tidings 'far hence unto the Gentiles.' [Acts 8:4, 5;
22:21.]</span></p>
<p><span>"Thus far every specification of the prophecies is strikingly fulfilled, and the
beginning of the seventy weeks is fixed beyond question at b.c. 457, and their expiration
in a.d. 34. From this data there is no difficulty in finding the termination of the 2300
days. The seventy weeks--490 days--having been cut off from the 2300, there were 1810 days
remaining. After the end of 490 days, the 1810 days were still to be fulfilled. From a.d.
34, 1810 years extend to 1844. Consequently the 2300 days of Dan. 8:14 terminate in 1844.
At the expiration of this great prophetic period, upon the testimony of the angel of God,
'the sanctuary shall be cleansed.' Thus the time of the cleansing of the sanctuary--which
was almost universally believed to take place at the second Advent--was definitely pointed
out.</span></p>
<p><span>"Miller and his associates at first believed that the 2300 days would terminate in
the spring of 1844, whereas the prophecy points to the autumn of that year. The
misapprehension of this point brought disappointment and perplexity to those who had fixed
upon the earlier date as the time of the Lord's coming. But this did not in the least
affect the strength of the argument showing that the 2300 days terminated in the year
1844, and that the great event represented by the cleansing of the sanctuary must then
take place.</span></p>
<p><span>"Entering upon the study of the Scriptures as he had done, in order to prove that
they were a revelation from God, Miller had not, at the outset, the slightest expectation
of reaching the conclusion at which he had now arrived. He himself could hardly credit the
results of his investigation. But the Scripture evidence was too clear and forcible to be
set aside.</span></p>
<p><span>"He had devoted two years to the study of the Bible, when, in 1818, he reached the
solemn conviction that in about twenty-five years Christ would appear for the redemption
of his people."--the Great Controversy, pp. 324-329. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Disappointment and its Aftermath</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>It was with keen anticipation that the Advent believers neared the day of the expected
return of their Lord. They saw the fall of 1844 as the time to which the prophecy of
Daniel pointed. But these dedicated believers were to suffer severe disappointment. As the
disciples of old failing to understand the exact character of events to take place in
fulfilment of prophecy relating to the first Advent of Jesus suffered disappointment, so
the Adventists in 1844 were disappointed concerning the development of prophecy relating
to the expected second coming of Christ. Of this, Ellen White wrote in this volume: </span></p>
<p><span>"Jesus did not come to the earth as the waiting, joyful company expected, to
cleanse the sanctuary by purifying the earth by fire. I saw that they were correct in
their reckoning of the prophetic periods; prophetic time closed in 1844, and Jesus entered
the most holy place to cleanse the sanctuary at the ending of the days. Their mistake
consisted in not understanding what the sanctuary was and the nature of its
cleansing."-- page 243.</span></p>
<p><span>Almost immediately following the disappointment of October 22, many believers and
ministers who had associated themselves with the Advent message dropped away. Some of
these joined the movement largely from fear, and when the time of expectation passed, they
abandoned their hope and disappeared. Others were swept into fanaticism. About half of the
Adventist group clung to their confidence that Christ would soon appear in the clouds of
heaven. In the experience of the derision and ridicule heaped upon them by the world, they
thought they saw evidences that the day of grace for the world had passed. These people
believed firmly that the return of the Lord was very near. But as the days moved into
weeks and the Lord did not appear, a division of opinion developed, and this group
divided. One part, numerically large, took the position that prophecy was not fulfilled in
1844, and that there must have been a mistake in reckoning the prophetic periods. They
began to fix their attention on some specific future date for the event. There were
others, a smaller group, the forefathers of the Seventh-day Adventist church, who were so
certain of the evidences of the work of the Spirit of God in the great Advent Awakening
that to deny that the movement was the work of the Lord would, they believed, do despite
to the Spirit of grace. This they felt they could not do. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>A Vision is Given to Ellen Harmon</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The experience of this company of believers, and the work they were to do, they found
portrayed in the last verses of Revelation 10. The Advent expectation was to be revived.
God had led them. He was still leading them. In their midst was a young woman, Ellen
Harmon by name, who in December, 1844, barely two months after the disappointment,
received a prophetic revelation from God. In this vision the Lord portrayed to her the
travels of the Advent people to the new Jerusalem. While this vision did not explain the
reason for the disappointment, which explanation could and did come from Bible study, it
gave them assurance that God was leading them and would continue to lead them as they
journeyed toward the heavenly city.</span></p>
<p><span>At the beginning of the symbolic pathway revealed to youthful Ellen was a bright light,
identified by the angel as the midnight cry, an expression linked with the climactic
preaching in the summer and autumn of 1844 of the imminent second Advent. In this vision
she saw Christ as leading the people to the city of God. Their conversation indicated that
the journey would be longer than they had anticipated. Some lost sight of Jesus and fell
off the pathway, but those who kept their eyes on Jesus and the city reached their
destination in safety. It is this that we find presented in "my first vision" on
pages 13-17. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Two Groups of Adventists</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At first only a few were identified with this group who were moving forward in
advancing light. By the year 1846 they reckoned their numbers as about fifty. </span></p>
<p><span>The larger group who turned from confidence in the fulfilment of prophecy in 1844
numbered approximately thirty thousand. Their leaders came together in 1845 in a
conference in Albany, New York, April 29 to May 1, at which time they restudied their
positions. By formal action they went on record as warning against those who claim
"special illumination," those who teach "Jewish fables," and those who
establish "new tests" (Advent Herald, May 14, 1845). Thus they closed the door
to light on the Sabbath and the Spirit of Prophecy. They were confident that prophecy had
not been fulfilled in 1844, and some set time for the termination of the 2300-day period
in the future. Various times were set, but one after another they passed by. These people,
held together by the cohesive element of the Advent hope, at first aligned themselves in
several rather loosely knit groups with considerable variation in certain doctrinal
positions. Some of these groups soon faded out. The group that survived became the Advent
Christian church. Such are identified in this book as the "first day Adventists"
or "nominal Adventists." <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Dawn of the Light on the Sanctuary</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>But we must now turn back to those who tenaciously clung to their confidence that
prophecy had been fulfilled on October 22, 1844, and who with open minds and hearts
stepped forward into the Sabbath and the sanctuary truths as the light of heaven
illuminated their pathway. These people were not localised in any one place but were
individuals or very small groups here and there throughout the north central and
north-eastern part of the United States.</span></p>
<p><span>Hiram Edson, one of this group, lived in central New York State at Port Gibson. He was
the leader of the Adventists in that area. The believers met in his home on October 22,
1844, to await the coming of the Lord. Calmly and patiently they awaited the great event.
But as the hour of midnight came and they realised the day of expectation had passed, it
became clear that Jesus would not come as soon as they had thought. It was a time of
bitter disappointment. In the early morning hours Hiram Edson and a few others went out to
his barn to pray, and as they prayed, he felt assured that light would come.</span></p>
<p><span>A little later, as Edson and a friend were crossing a cornfield to visit fellow
Adventists, it seemed as if a hand touched his shoulder. He looked up to see--as if in a
vision--the heavens opened, and Christ in the heavenly sanctuary entering into the most
holy place, there to begin a work of ministry in behalf of his people, instead of coming
forth from the most holy place to cleanse the world with fire, as they had taught. Careful
Bible study by Hiram Edson; F. B. Hahn, a physician; and O. R. L. Crozier, a
schoolteacher, soon revealed that the sanctuary to be cleansed at the end of the 2300
years was not the earth but the tabernacle in heaven, with Christ ministering in our
behalf in the most holy place. This mediatorial work of Christ answered to the "hour
of God's judgement" call sounded in the message of the first angel (Rev. 14:6, 7).
Mr. Crozier, the schoolteacher, wrote out the findings of the study group. These were
printed locally, and then in fuller form in an Adventist journal known as the Day-Star,
published in Cincinnati, Ohio. A special number dated February 7, 1846, was devoted
entirely to this Bible study on the question of the sanctuary. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Truths Confirmed by Vision</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>While this study was in progress, and before their work was made known, far to the east
in the state of Maine, a vision was given to Ellen Harmon in which she was shown the
transfer of the ministry of Christ from the holy place to the most holy place at the end
of the 2300 days. The record of this vision is found in Early Writings, pages 54-56.</span></p>
<p><span>Of another vision shortly after this, as referred to by Mrs. White in a statement
written in April, 1847, she records that "the Lord showed me in vision, more than one
year ago, that brother Crozier had the true light on the cleansing of the sanctuary, etc.;
and that it was His will that Brother Crozier should write out the view which he gave us
in the Day-Star Extra, February 7, 1846. I feel fully authorised by the Lord to recommend
that Extra to every saint."--A Word to the Little Flock, p. 12. Thus the finding of
Bible scholars was confirmed by the visions of God's messenger.</span></p>
<p><span>In subsequent years Ellen White wrote a great deal concerning the sanctuary truth and
its significance to us, and there are many references to this in Early Writings. Note
especially the chapter beginning on page 250 entitled "The Sanctuary." The
understanding of the ministry of Christ in the heavenly sanctuary proved to be the key
that unlocked the mystery of the great Disappointment. Our pioneers saw clearly that the
prophecy announcing the hour of God's judgement at hand had its fulfilment in the events
that took place in 1844, but that there was a work of ministry to be accomplished in the
most holy place in the heavenly sanctuary before Jesus should come to this earth.</span></p>
<p><span>The message of the first angel and the message of the second angel had been sounded in
the proclamation of the Advent message, and now the message of the third angel began to
sound. Under this message the significance of the seventh-day Sabbath began to dawn. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Beginnings of Sabbath Observance</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As we trace the story of the beginning of Sabbathkeeping among the early Adventists, we
go to a little church in the township of Washington in the heart of New Hampshire, the
state that adjoins Maine on the east and whose western boundary is within sixty miles of
the New York State line. Here the members of an independent Christian church in 1843 heard
and accepted the preaching of the Advent message. It was an earnest group. Into their
midst came a Seventh Day Baptist, Rachel Oakes, who distributed tracts setting forth the
binding claims of the fourth commandment. Some in 1844 saw and accepted this Bible truth.
One of their number, William Farnsworth, in a Sunday morning service, stood to his feet
and declared that he intended to keep God's Sabbath of the fourth commandment. A dozen
others joined him, taking their stand firmly on all of God's commandments. They were the
first Seventh-day Adventists.</span></p>
<p><span>The minister who cared for this church group, Frederick Wheeler, soon accepted the
seventh-day Sabbath and was the first Adventist minister to do so. Another of the Advent
preachers, T. M. Preble, who lived in the same state, accepted the Sabbath truth and in
February, 1845, published an article in the Hope of Israel, one of the Adventist journals,
setting forth the binding claims of the fourth commandment. Joseph Bates, a prominent
Adventist minister residing in Fairhaven, Massachusetts, read the Preble article and
accepted the seventh-day Sabbath. Shortly thereafter, Elder Bates journeyed to Washington,
New Hampshire, to study this new-found truth with the Sabbathkeeping Adventists residing
there. When he returned to his home, he was fully convinced of the Sabbath truth. Bates in
time determined to publish a tract setting forth the binding claims of the fourth
commandment. His 48-page Sabbath pamphlet was published in August, 1846. A copy of it came
to the hands of James and Ellen White at about the time of their marriage in late August.
From the scriptural evidence therein presented, they accepted, and began to keep the
seventh-day Sabbath. Of this Ellen White later wrote: "in the autumn of 1846 we began
to observe the Bible Sabbath, and to teach and defend it."--Testimonies, vol. 1, p.
75. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Significance of the Sabbath Revealed</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>James and Ellen White took their stand purely from the scriptural evidence to which
their minds had been directed in the Bates tract. Then on the first Sabbath in April,
1847, seven months after they began to keep and teach the seventh-day Sabbath, the Lord
gave a vision to Mrs. White at Topsham, Maine, in which the importance of the Sabbath was
stressed. She saw the tables of the law in the ark in the heavenly sanctuary, and a halo
of light about the fourth commandment. See pages 32-35 for the account of this vision. The
position previously taken from the study of the Word of God was confirmed. The vision also
helped to broaden the believer's concept of Sabbath observance. In this revelation, Mrs.
White was carried down to the close of time and saw the Sabbath as the great testing truth
on which men decide whether to serve God or to serve an apostate power. Looking back in
1874 to this experience, she wrote:</span></p>
<p><span>"I believe the truth upon the Sabbath question before I had seen anything in
vision in reference to the Sabbath. It was months after I had commenced keeping the
Sabbath before I was shown its importance and its place in the third angel's
message."--E. G. White letter 2, 1874. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Important Sabbath Conferences</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In the providence of God the several Sabbathkeeping ministers who led out in teaching
these new-found truths in company with a number of their followers, came together in 1848
in five Sabbath conferences. Through periods of fasting and prayer they studied the Word
of God. Elder Bates, the apostle of the Sabbath truth, took the lead in advocating the
binding claims of the Sabbath. Hiram Edson and his associates, who attended some of the
conferences, were strong in their presentation of the sanctuary light. James White, a
careful student of prophecy, focused his attention on events that must take place before
Jesus comes again. At these meetings the leading doctrines held today by Seventh-day
Adventists were brought together. </span></p>
<p><span>Looking back to this experience, Ellen White wrote:</span></p>
<p><span>"Many of our people do not realise how firmly the foundation of our faith has been
laid. My husband, Elder Joseph Bates, Father Pierce, [* older brethren among the pioneers
are here thus reminiscently referred to. "Father Pierce" was Stephen Pierce, who
served in ministerial and administrative work in the early days.] Elder [Hiram] Edson, and
others who were keen, noble, and true, were among those who, after the passing of the time
in 1844, searched for the truth as for hidden treasure. I met with them, and we studied
and prayed earnestly. Often we remained together until late at night, and sometimes
through the entire night, praying for light and studying the Word. Again and again these
brethren came together to study the Bible, in order that they might know its meaning, and
be prepared to teach it with power. When they came to the point in their study where they
said, "we can do nothing more,' the Spirit of the Lord would come upon me, I would be
taken off in vision, and a clear explanation of the passages we had been studying would be
given me, with instruction as to how we were to labour and teach effectively. Thus light
was given that helped us to understand the Scriptures in regard to Christ, His mission,
and His priesthood. A line of truth extending from that time to the time when we shall
enter the city of God, was made plain to me, and I gave to others the instruction that the
Lord had given me.</span></p>
<p><span>"During this whole time I could not understand the reasoning of the brethren. My
mind was locked, as it were, and I could not comprehend the meaning of the Scriptures we
were studying. This was one of the greatest sorrows of my life. I was in this condition of
mind until all the principal points of our faith were made clear to our minds, in harmony
with the Word of God. The brethren knew that when not in vision, I could not understand
these matters, and they accepted as light direct from heaven the revelations
given."-- Selected Messages, book 1, pp. 206, 207.</span></p>
<p><span>Thus the doctrinal foundation of the Seventh-day Adventist Church was laid in the
faithful study of the Word of God, and when the pioneers could not make headway, Ellen
White was given light that helped to explain their difficulty and opened the way for the
study to continue. The visions also placed the stamp of God's approval upon correct
conclusions. Thus the prophetic gift acted as a corrector of error and a confirmer of
truth. (See Gospel Workers, p. 302.) <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Pioneers Begin to Publish</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>It was shortly after the fifth of these Sabbath conferences held in 1848 that another
meeting was called at the home of Otis Nichols in Dorchester (near Boston), Massachusetts.
The brethren were studying and praying concerning their responsibility to herald the light
that the Lord had caused to shine upon their pathway. As they studied, Ellen White was
taken off in vision, and in this revelation she was shown the duty of the brethren to
publish this light. She recounts the incident in Life Sketches.</span></p>
<p><span>"After coming out of vision, I said to my husband: 'I have a message for you. You
must begin to print a little paper and send it out to the people. Let it be small at
first; but as the people read, they will send you means with which to print, and it will
be a success from the first. From this small beginning it was shown to me to be like
streams of light that went clear round the world.'"--page 125.</span></p>
<p><span>Here was a call to action. What could James White do? He had little of this world's
goods. But the vision was a divine directive, and he felt the compulsion to move forward
by faith. So with his seventy-five cent Bible and concordance with both covers torn off,
James White began to prepare the articles on the Sabbath truth and other kindred topics to
be printed in a little paper. All this took time, but eventually he presented the copy to
a printer in Middletown, Connecticut, who was willing to trust him for the printing order.
The type was set, the proofs were read, and one thousand copies of the paper were printed.
James White transported them from the Middletown printing office to the Belden home where
he and Ellen had found a temporary refuge. The little sheet was six by nine inches in size
and contained eight pages. It bore the title the Present Truth. The date was July, 1849.
The little pile of papers was laid upon the floor. Then the brethren and sisters gathered
about them and with tears in their eyes pleaded with God to bless the little sheet as it
should be sent out. Then the papers were folded, wrapped and addressed, and James White
carried them eight miles to the Middletown post office. Thus the publishing work of the
Seventh-day Adventist Church began.</span></p>
<p><span>Four issues were sent out in this manner, and each was prayed over before the papers
were taken to the post office. Soon letters were received telling of people who had begun
to keep the Sabbath from reading the papers. Some of the letters contained money, and
James White, in September, was able to pay the Middletown printer the $64.50 due for the
four issues. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Starting the Review and Herald</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As James and Ellen White travelled from place to place, staying a few months here and a
few months there, they arranged for the publishing of a few issues of the paper. Finally
the eleventh and last issue was published at Paris, Maine, in November, 1850. Mrs. White
contributed several articles to the Present Truth. Most of these are to be found in the
first part of Early Writings. See pages 36-54.</span></p>
<p><span>Also in November, a conference was held in Paris, and the brethren gave study to the
growing publishing work. They decided to enlarge the paper and they changed its name to
the Second Advent Review and Sabbath Herald. It was published for a few months at Paris,
Maine, then at Saratoga Springs, New York. It has been published from that day to this as
the church paper of the Seventh-day Adventists. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Publishing Work Grows</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>While living at Saratoga Springs, James White arranged in August, 1851, for the
printing of Mrs. White's first book titled a Sketch of the Christian Experience and Views
of Ellen G. White, now pages 11-83 of this work. With its 64 pages, it was only a
pamphlet. </span></p>
<p><span>In the spring of 1852, the Whites moved to Rochester, New York, and there established
an office in which they could do their own printing. The brethren rallied to the appeal
for money with which to purchase a printing press and six hundred dollars was raised to
secure the equipment. How happy the early believers were when our papers could be issued
on a Sabbathkeeping press! For a little more than three years, they lived in Rochester and
published the message there. In addition to the Review and Herald and the Youth's
Instructor begun by James White in 1852, they also, from time to time, published tracts.
Mrs. White's second pamphlet, supplement to the Christian Experience and Views of Ellen G.
White, was published in Rochester in January, 1854. This is now in Early Writings, pages
85-127. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Battle Creek Becomes the Publishing Centre</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In November, 1855, James and Ellen White and their helpers moved to Battle Creek,
Michigan. The press and other pieces of printing equipment were placed in a building
erected by several of the Sabbathkeeping Adventists who had furnished the money with which
to establish their own printing office. As their work developed in that little city,
Battle Creek became the natural headquarters of the Seventh-day Adventist Church. But it
was with difficulty that James White maintained the publishing work.</span></p>
<p><span>As we study the background of Early Writings, it should be noted that the early
Sabbathkeeping Adventists at first had a burden to reach with the Sabbath truth only their
former brethren in the great Advent Awakening; that is, those who had been with them in
the first and the second angels' messages. Consequently for about seven years after 1844,
their labours were very largely for Adventists who had not yet taken their stand on the
third angel's message. To one familiar with the circumstances, this is understandable. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The "Shut Door" and the "Open Door"</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In the special efforts which were made to proclaim the Advent message in the summer of
1844, the leaders in the movement had seen their own experience in the parable of the ten
virgins recorded in Matthew 25. There had been a "tarrying time" followed by the
cry, "behold the bridegroom cometh; go ye out to meet him." This was commonly
referred to as "the midnight cry." In her first vision, this was shown to Mrs.
White as a bright light set up behind the Adventists at the beginning of the path. In the
parable, they read that those who were ready went in with the bridegroom to the marriage,
"and the door was shut." (See Matthew 25:10.) they therefore concluded that on
October 22, 1844, the door of mercy was closed to those who failed to accept the message
which had been so widely proclaimed. Some years later Ellen White wrote of this:</span></p>
<p><span>"After the passing of the time when the Saviour was expected, they [the Advent
believers] still believed His coming to be near; they held that they had reached an
important crisis, and that the work of Christ as man's intercessor before God, had ceased.
It appeared to them to be taught in the Bible, that man's probation would close a short
time before the actual coming of the Lord in the clouds of heaven. This seemed evident
from those Scriptures which point to a time when men will seek, knock, and cry at the door
of mercy, and it will not be opened. And it was a question with them whether the date to
which they had looked for the coming of Christ might not rather mark the beginning of this
period which was immediately to precede His coming. Having given the warning of the
judgement near, they felt that their work for the world was done, and they lost their
burden of soul for the salvation of sinners, while the bold and blasphemous scoffing of
the ungodly seemed to them another evidence that the Spirit of God had been withdrawn from
the rejecters of his mercy. All this confirmed them in the belief that probation had
ended, or, as they then expressed it, 'the door of mercy was shut.'"--the Great
Controversy, page 429.</span></p>
<p><span>Then Mrs. White continues to show how light began to dawn on this question:</span></p>
<p><span>"But clearer light came with the investigation of the sanctuary question. They now
saw that they were correct in believing that the end of the 2300 days in 1844 marked an
important crisis. But while it was true that that door of hope and mercy by which men had
for eighteen hundred years found access to God, was closed, another door was opened, and
forgiveness of sins was offered to men through the intercession of Christ in the most
holy. One part of his ministration had closed, only to give place to another. There was
still an 'open door' to the heavenly sanctuary, where Christ was ministering in the
sinner's behalf.</span></p>
<p><span>"Now was seen the application of those words of Christ in the revelation,
addressed to the church at this very time: 'these things saith He that is holy, He that is
true, He that hath the key of David, He that openeth, and no man shutteth; and shutteth,
and no man openeth; I know thy works: behold, I have set before thee an open door, and no
man can shut it.' (Rev. 3:7, 8.)</span></p>
<p><span>"It is those who by faith follow Jesus in the great work of the atonement, who
receive the benefits of His mediation in their behalf; while those who reject the light
which brings to view this work of ministration, are not benefited thereby."--ibid.,
pp. 429, 430. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Two Ways Out of the Perplexity</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Mrs. White then speaks of how the two groups of Advent believers related themselves to
the experience of the disappointment of October 22, 1844:</span></p>
<p><span>"The passing of the time in 1844 was followed by a period of great trial to those
who still held the Advent faith. Their only relief, so far as ascertaining their true
position was concerned, was the light which directed their minds to the sanctuary above.
Some renounced their faith in their former reckoning of the prophetic periods, and
ascribed to human or satanic agencies the powerful influence of the Holy Spirit which had
attended the Advent movement. Another class firmly held that the Lord had led them in
their past experience; and as they waited and watched and prayed to know the will of God,
they saw that their great high priest had entered upon another work of ministration, and
following Him by faith, they were led to see also the closing work of the church. They had
a clearer understanding of the first and second angels' messages, and were prepared to
receive and give to the world the solemn warning of the third angel of Revelation
14."--ibid., pp. 431, 432.</span></p>
<p><span>Certain references occur in this work, on pages 42-45, to the "open door" and
the "shut door." This is correctly understood only in the light of the
background of the experience of our early believers. Not too long after the disappointment
the pioneers saw that while there were those who through the definite rejection of light
had closed the door to their salvation, there were many who had not heard the message and
had not rejected it, and these might benefit from the provisions made for man's salvation.
By the early 1850's these points stood out clearly. Then too, avenues for the presentation
of the three angel's messages were beginning to open up. Prejudice was dying away. Ellen
White, looking back to their experience following the disappointment wrote:</span></p>
<p><span>"'It was then next to impossible to obtain access to unbelievers. The
disappointment in 1844 had confused the minds of many, and they would not listen to any
explanation of the matter.'"--Review and Herald, Nov. 20, 1883.</span></p>
<p><span>But in 1851 Elder White was able to report: "'Now the door is open almost
everywhere to present the truth, and many are prepared to read the publications who have
formerly had no interest to investigate.'"-- Review and Herald, Aug. 19, 1851. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Call For Church Organisation</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>But with these new opportunities, and with a larger number of people accepting the
message, a few discordant elements came into their midst. If these had not been checked,
the work would have been greatly injured. But here again we see the providence of God in
guiding His people, for on December 24, 1850, in a vision given to Ellen White, she tells
us:</span></p>
<p><span>"'I saw how great and holy God was. Said the angel, "walk carefully before
him, for He is high and lifted up, and the train of His glory fills the temple." I
saw that everything in heaven was in perfect order. Said the angel, "Look ye, Christ
is the head, move in order, move in order. Have a meaning to everything." said the
angel, "Behold ye and know how perfect, how beautiful, the order in heaven; follow
it."'"--Ellen G. White manuscript 11, 1850. </span></p>
<p><span>It took time to lead the believers generally to appreciate the needs and value of
gospel order. Their past experiences in the protestant churches from which they had
separated led them to be cautious. Except in those places where the practical need was
very evident, fear of inviting formality held the believers back from church organisation.
It was not until a decade after the vision of 1850 that more mature plans for organisation
were finally effected. Undoubtedly a factor of primary importance in bringing the efforts
to fruition was a comprehensive chapter entitled "Gospel Order," published in
the supplement to the Christian Experience and Views of Ellen G. White. This appears in
this work as pages 97-104.</span></p>
<p><span>In 1860, in connection with the organising of the publishing work, a name was chosen.
Some thought that "Church of God" would be appropriate, but the sentiment
prevailed that the name should reflect the distinctive teachings of the church. They
adopted "Seventh-day Adventist" as their name. The following year some companies
of believers organised themselves into churches, and the churches in Michigan formed a
state conference. Soon there were several state conferences. Then in May, 1863, the
General Conference of Seventh-day Adventists was organised. This takes us five years
beyond the time of Early Writings. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Great Controversy Vision</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Reference has been made to the moving of the publishing work from Rochester, New York,
to Battle Breek, Michigan, in November, 1855. Elder and Mrs. White made their home in
Battle Creek and after the work was well established there, they were able to continue
their travels in the field. It was in connection with a visit to the state of Ohio in
February and March, 1858, that the important great controversy vision was given to Mrs.
White in the public school-house at Lovett's Grove. The account of this vision which
lasted two hours is found in Life Sketches, pages 161, 162. In September, 1858, Spiritual
Gifts, Volume I: The Great Controversy Between Christ and His Angels and Satan and His
Angels, was published. This little book of 219 pages constitutes the third and last
division of Early Writings.</span></p>
<p><span>The small publications of the first fifteen years of Mrs. White's work were to be
followed by many larger books dealing with many subjects vital to those who keep the
commandments of God and have the faith of Jesus Christ. Nevertheless the earliest writings
will always be especially dear to the hearts of all Seventh-day Adventists.</span></p>
<p><span>Trustees of the Ellen G. White Estate.<br />
Washington, D.C.<br />
March, 1963. <br />
</span></p><span>Early Writings is a work of lasting and special interest to Seventh-day Adventists, for
it embodies the earliest Ellen G. White books. These were written and first published in
the 1850's for the edification and instruction of those who with the author had passed
through the experiences of the Sabbathkeeping Adventists in the 1840's and the early
1850's. This being so, the author assumed on the part of the reader a familiarity with the
history of the Advent Awakening and the development of the Seventh-day Adventist movement
that emerged in 1844. Consequently experiences well understood at the time are in some
instances merely alluded to, and expressions are employed which to be correctly
understood, must be thought of in the framework of the history of the Sabbathkeeping
Adventists in those early years.</span>
<p><span>In 1858, in writing of the sounding of the messages of the three angels of Revelation
14, Ellen White deals with the experiences of those who participated in the work and draws
lessons from these experiences, rather than giving as one might expect, a clear-cut
presentation of the character of these messages. See pages 232-240; 254-258. She at times
employs such now unfamiliar terms as "nominal Adventist," "shut door,"
"open door," et cetera.</span></p>
<p><span>Today we are removed by more than a century from those heroic times. The reader must
keep this clearly in mind. The history which was so well known to the contemporaries of
Ellen White we shall now review, touching some of the high points of the experiences of
the Sabbathkeeping Adventists during the decade or two preceding the first publication of
the materials that appear here.</span></p>
<p><span>In the opening paragraphs Mrs. White makes brief reference to her conversion and her
early Christian experience. She tells also of hearing lectures on the Bible doctrine of
the expected personal Advent of Christ, which was thought to be near at hand. The great
Advent Awakening to which such brief reference is here made was a movement world-wide in
its outreach. It emerged as the result of careful study of the prophetic Scriptures on the
part of many, and the acceptance of the good news of the coming of Jesus by large numbers
of people throughout the world. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Great Advent Awakening</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>But it was in the United States that the Advent message was most widely proclaimed and
received. As Bible prophecies relating to the return of Jesus were accepted by able men
and women of many religious faiths, a large following of earnest Adventist believers
resulted. It should be noted, however, that no separate and distinct religious
organisation was formed. The Advent hope led to deep religious revivals that benefited all
the protestant churches and led many sceptics and infidels to publicly confess their faith
in the Bible and in God.</span></p>
<p><span>As the movement neared its high point in the early 1840's, several hundred ministers
united in proclaiming the message. In the lead was William Miller, who lived in the
eastern edge of New York state. He was a man of prominence in his community and engaged in
farming as a livelihood. In spite of a rich religious background, he had grown sceptical
in his youth. He lost faith in the Word of God and adopted deistic views. While reading a
sermon in the Baptist church one Sunday morning, the Holy Spirit touched his heart, and he
was led to accept Jesus Christ as his saviour. Miller set about to study the Word of God,
determined to find in the Bible a satisfactory answer to all his questions, and to learn
for himself the truths set forth in its pages.</span></p>
<p><span>For two years he devoted much of his time to a verse-by-verse study of the Scriptures.
He determined not to take up the next verse until he felt he had found a satisfactory
explanation of the one he was studying. He had before him only his Bible and a
concordance. In time he came in his study to the prophecies of the literal, personal,
second coming of Christ. He grappled also with the great time prophecies, particularly the
2300-day prophecy of Daniel 8 and 9, which he linked with the prophecy of Revelation 14
and the message of the angel proclaiming the hour of God's judgement (rev. 14:6, 7). In
this volume, on page 229, Mrs. White states that "God sent his angel to move upon the
heart" of William Miller, "to lead him to search the prophecies."</span></p>
<p><span>In her girlhood Mrs. White heard Miller deliver two series of lectures in the city of
Portland, Maine. A deep and lasting impression was made on her heart. We will let her set
before us the reckoning of the prophecies, as Elder Miller presented them to his
audiences. For this we turn to Mrs. White's later book, the Great Controversy: <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Reckoning of the Prophetic Periods</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>"The prophecy which seemed most clearly to reveal the time of the second Advent
was that of Dan. 8:14: 'unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary
be cleansed.' following his rule of making Scripture its own interpreter, Miller learned
that a day in symbolic prophecy represents a year [Num. 14:34; Eze. 4:6.]; he saw that the
period of 2300 prophetic days, or literal years, would extend far beyond the close of the
Jewish dispensation, hence it could not refer to the sanctuary of that dispensation.
Miller accepted the generally received view, that in the Christian age the earth is the
sanctuary, and he therefore understood that the cleansing of the sanctuary foretold in
Dan. 8:14 represented the purification of the earth by fire at the second coming of
Christ. If, then, the correct starting-point could be found for the 2300 days, he
concluded that the time of the second Advent could be readily ascertained. Thus would be
revealed the time of that great consummation, the time when the present state, with 'all
its pride and power, pomp and vanity, wickedness and oppression, would come to an end;'
when the curse would be 'removed from off the earth, death be destroyed, reward be given
to the servants of God, the prophets and saints, and them who fear his name, and those be
destroyed that destroy the earth.' [footnote: Bliss, Memoirs of Wm. Miller, p. 76.]</span></p>
<p><span>"With a new and deeper earnestness, Miller continued the examination of the
prophecies, whole nights as well as days being devoted to the study of what now appeared
of such stupendous importance and all-absorbing interest. In the eighth chapter of Daniel
he could find no clue to the starting-point of the 2300 days; the angel Gabriel, though
commanded to make Daniel understand the vision, gave him only a partial explanation. As
the terrible persecution to befall the church was unfolded to the prophet's vision,
physical strength gave way. He could endure no more, and the angel left him for a time.
Daniel 'fainted, and was sick certain days.' 'And I was astonished at the vision,' he
says, 'but none understood it.'</span></p>
<p><span>"Yet God had bidden his messenger, 'make this man to understand the vision.' That
commission must be fulfilled. In obedience to it, the angel, some time afterward, returned
to Daniel, saying, 'I am now come forth to give thee skill and understanding;' 'Therefore
understand the matter, and consider the vision.' [Dan. 9:22, 23, 25-27.] There was one
important point in the vision of chapter eight which had been left unexplained, namely,
that relating to time,--the period of the 2300 days; therefore the angel, in resuming his
explanation, dwells chiefly upon the subject of time: </span></p>
<p><span>"'Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people and upon thy holy city.... know
therefore and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to restore and to
build Jerusalem unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and threescore and two
weeks: the street shall be built again, and the wall, even in troublous times. And after
threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not for himself. ... and he shall
confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in the midst of the week he shall cause
the sacrifice and the oblation to cease.'</span></p>
<p><span>"The angel had been sent to Daniel for the express purpose of explaining to him
the point which he had failed to understand in the vision of the eighth chapter, the
statement relative to time,--'unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the
sanctuary be cleansed.' After bidding Daniel 'understand the matter, and consider the
vision,' the very first words of the angel are, 'seventy weeks are determined upon thy
people and upon thy holy city.' The word here translated 'determined,' literally signifies
'cut off.' Seventy weeks, representing 490 years, are declared by the angel to be cut off,
as specially pertaining to the Jews. But from what were they cut off? As the 2300 days was
the only period of time mentioned in chapter eight, it must be the period from which the
seventy weeks were cut off; the seventy weeks must therefore be a part of the 2300 days,
and the two periods must begin together. The seventy weeks were declared by the angel to
date from the going forth of the commandment to restore and build Jerusalem. If the date
of this commandment could be found, then the starting-point for the great period of the
2300 days would be ascertained.</span></p>
<p><span>"In the seventh chapter of Ezra the decree is found. [Ezra 7:12-26.] In its
completest form it was issued by Artaxerxes, king of Persia, b.c. 457. But in Ezra 6:14
the house of the Lord at Jerusalem is said to have been built 'according to the
commandment [margin, decree] of Cyrus, and Darius, and Artaxerxes king of Persia.' These
three kings, in originating, re-affirming, and completing the decree, brought it to the
perfection required by the prophecy to mark the beginning of the 2300 years. Taking b.c.
457, the time when the decree was completed, as the date of the commandment, every
specification of the prophecy concerning the seventy weeks was seen to have been
fulfilled.</span></p>
<p><span>"'From the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem unto
the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and threescore and two weeks.'--namely,
sixty-nine weeks, or 483 years. The decree of Artaxerxes went into effect in the autumn of
b.c. 457. From this date, 483 years extend to the autumn of a.d. 27. At that time this
prophecy was fulfilled. The word 'Messiah' signifies 'the anointed one.' In the autumn of
a.d. 27, Christ was baptised by John, and received the anointing of the Spirit. The
apostle peter testifies that 'God anointed Jesus of Nazareth with the holy ghost and with
power.' [Acts 10:38.] and the Saviour himself declared, 'the Spirit of the Lord is upon
me, because he hath anointed me to preach the gospel to the poor.' [Luke 4:18.] After his
baptism he went into Galilee, 'preaching the gospel of the kingdom of God, and saying, the
time is fulfilled.' [Mark 1:14, 15.] </span></p>
<p><span>"'And he shall confirm the covenant with many for one week.' The 'week' here
brought to view is the last one of the seventy; it is the last seven years of the period
allotted especially to the Jews. During this time, extending from a.d. 27 to a.d. 34,
Christ, at first in person and afterward by his disciples, extended the gospel invitation
especially to the Jews. As the apostles went forth with the good tidings of the kingdom,
the Saviour's direction was, 'go not into the way of the Gentiles, and into any city of
the Samaritans enter ye not: but go rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel.'
[Matt. 10:5, 6.]</span></p>
<p><span>"'In the midst of the week he shall cause the sacrifice and the oblation to
cease.' In a.d. 31, three and a half years after His baptism, our Lord was crucified. With
the great sacrifice offered upon Calvary, ended that system of offerings which for four
thousand years had pointed forward to the Lamb of God. Type had met antitype, and all the
sacrifices and oblations of the ceremonial system were there to cease.</span></p>
<p><span>"The seventy weeks, or 490 years, especially allotted to the Jews, ended, as we
have seen, in a.d. 34. At that time, through the action of the Jewish Sanhedrim, the
nation sealed its rejection of the gospel by the martyrdom of Stephen and the persecution
of the followers of Christ. Then the message of salvation, no longer restricted to the
chosen people, was given to the world. The disciples, forced by persecution to flee from
Jerusalem, 'went everywhere preaching the word.' 'Philip went down to the city of Samaria,
and preached Christ unto them.' Peter, divinely guided, opened the gospel to the centurion
of Caesarea, the God-fearing Cornelius; and the ardent Paul, won to the faith of Christ,
was commissioned to carry the glad tidings 'far hence unto the Gentiles.' [Acts 8:4, 5;
22:21.]</span></p>
<p><span>"Thus far every specification of the prophecies is strikingly fulfilled, and the
beginning of the seventy weeks is fixed beyond question at b.c. 457, and their expiration
in a.d. 34. From this data there is no difficulty in finding the termination of the 2300
days. The seventy weeks--490 days--having been cut off from the 2300, there were 1810 days
remaining. After the end of 490 days, the 1810 days were still to be fulfilled. From a.d.
34, 1810 years extend to 1844. Consequently the 2300 days of Dan. 8:14 terminate in 1844.
At the expiration of this great prophetic period, upon the testimony of the angel of God,
'the sanctuary shall be cleansed.' Thus the time of the cleansing of the sanctuary--which
was almost universally believed to take place at the second Advent--was definitely pointed
out.</span></p>
<p><span>"Miller and his associates at first believed that the 2300 days would terminate in
the spring of 1844, whereas the prophecy points to the autumn of that year. The
misapprehension of this point brought disappointment and perplexity to those who had fixed
upon the earlier date as the time of the Lord's coming. But this did not in the least
affect the strength of the argument showing that the 2300 days terminated in the year
1844, and that the great event represented by the cleansing of the sanctuary must then
take place.</span></p>
<p><span>"Entering upon the study of the Scriptures as he had done, in order to prove that
they were a revelation from God, Miller had not, at the outset, the slightest expectation
of reaching the conclusion at which he had now arrived. He himself could hardly credit the
results of his investigation. But the Scripture evidence was too clear and forcible to be
set aside.</span></p>
<p><span>"He had devoted two years to the study of the Bible, when, in 1818, he reached the
solemn conviction that in about twenty-five years Christ would appear for the redemption
of his people."--the Great Controversy, pp. 324-329. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Disappointment and its Aftermath</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>It was with keen anticipation that the Advent believers neared the day of the expected
return of their Lord. They saw the fall of 1844 as the time to which the prophecy of
Daniel pointed. But these dedicated believers were to suffer severe disappointment. As the
disciples of old failing to understand the exact character of events to take place in
fulfilment of prophecy relating to the first Advent of Jesus suffered disappointment, so
the Adventists in 1844 were disappointed concerning the development of prophecy relating
to the expected second coming of Christ. Of this, Ellen White wrote in this volume: </span></p>
<p><span>"Jesus did not come to the earth as the waiting, joyful company expected, to
cleanse the sanctuary by purifying the earth by fire. I saw that they were correct in
their reckoning of the prophetic periods; prophetic time closed in 1844, and Jesus entered
the most holy place to cleanse the sanctuary at the ending of the days. Their mistake
consisted in not understanding what the sanctuary was and the nature of its
cleansing."-- page 243.</span></p>
<p><span>Almost immediately following the disappointment of October 22, many believers and
ministers who had associated themselves with the Advent message dropped away. Some of
these joined the movement largely from fear, and when the time of expectation passed, they
abandoned their hope and disappeared. Others were swept into fanaticism. About half of the
Adventist group clung to their confidence that Christ would soon appear in the clouds of
heaven. In the experience of the derision and ridicule heaped upon them by the world, they
thought they saw evidences that the day of grace for the world had passed. These people
believed firmly that the return of the Lord was very near. But as the days moved into
weeks and the Lord did not appear, a division of opinion developed, and this group
divided. One part, numerically large, took the position that prophecy was not fulfilled in
1844, and that there must have been a mistake in reckoning the prophetic periods. They
began to fix their attention on some specific future date for the event. There were
others, a smaller group, the forefathers of the Seventh-day Adventist church, who were so
certain of the evidences of the work of the Spirit of God in the great Advent Awakening
that to deny that the movement was the work of the Lord would, they believed, do despite
to the Spirit of grace. This they felt they could not do. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>A Vision is Given to Ellen Harmon</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The experience of this company of believers, and the work they were to do, they found
portrayed in the last verses of Revelation 10. The Advent expectation was to be revived.
God had led them. He was still leading them. In their midst was a young woman, Ellen
Harmon by name, who in December, 1844, barely two months after the disappointment,
received a prophetic revelation from God. In this vision the Lord portrayed to her the
travels of the Advent people to the new Jerusalem. While this vision did not explain the
reason for the disappointment, which explanation could and did come from Bible study, it
gave them assurance that God was leading them and would continue to lead them as they
journeyed toward the heavenly city.</span></p>
<p><span>At the beginning of the symbolic pathway revealed to youthful Ellen was a bright light,
identified by the angel as the midnight cry, an expression linked with the climactic
preaching in the summer and autumn of 1844 of the imminent second Advent. In this vision
she saw Christ as leading the people to the city of God. Their conversation indicated that
the journey would be longer than they had anticipated. Some lost sight of Jesus and fell
off the pathway, but those who kept their eyes on Jesus and the city reached their
destination in safety. It is this that we find presented in "my first vision" on
pages 13-17. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Two Groups of Adventists</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At first only a few were identified with this group who were moving forward in
advancing light. By the year 1846 they reckoned their numbers as about fifty. </span></p>
<p><span>The larger group who turned from confidence in the fulfilment of prophecy in 1844
numbered approximately thirty thousand. Their leaders came together in 1845 in a
conference in Albany, New York, April 29 to May 1, at which time they restudied their
positions. By formal action they went on record as warning against those who claim
"special illumination," those who teach "Jewish fables," and those who
establish "new tests" (Advent Herald, May 14, 1845). Thus they closed the door
to light on the Sabbath and the Spirit of Prophecy. They were confident that prophecy had
not been fulfilled in 1844, and some set time for the termination of the 2300-day period
in the future. Various times were set, but one after another they passed by. These people,
held together by the cohesive element of the Advent hope, at first aligned themselves in
several rather loosely knit groups with considerable variation in certain doctrinal
positions. Some of these groups soon faded out. The group that survived became the Advent
Christian church. Such are identified in this book as the "first day Adventists"
or "nominal Adventists." <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Dawn of the Light on the Sanctuary</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>But we must now turn back to those who tenaciously clung to their confidence that
prophecy had been fulfilled on October 22, 1844, and who with open minds and hearts
stepped forward into the Sabbath and the sanctuary truths as the light of heaven
illuminated their pathway. These people were not localised in any one place but were
individuals or very small groups here and there throughout the north central and
north-eastern part of the United States.</span></p>
<p><span>Hiram Edson, one of this group, lived in central New York State at Port Gibson. He was
the leader of the Adventists in that area. The believers met in his home on October 22,
1844, to await the coming of the Lord. Calmly and patiently they awaited the great event.
But as the hour of midnight came and they realised the day of expectation had passed, it
became clear that Jesus would not come as soon as they had thought. It was a time of
bitter disappointment. In the early morning hours Hiram Edson and a few others went out to
his barn to pray, and as they prayed, he felt assured that light would come.</span></p>
<p><span>A little later, as Edson and a friend were crossing a cornfield to visit fellow
Adventists, it seemed as if a hand touched his shoulder. He looked up to see--as if in a
vision--the heavens opened, and Christ in the heavenly sanctuary entering into the most
holy place, there to begin a work of ministry in behalf of his people, instead of coming
forth from the most holy place to cleanse the world with fire, as they had taught. Careful
Bible study by Hiram Edson; F. B. Hahn, a physician; and O. R. L. Crozier, a
schoolteacher, soon revealed that the sanctuary to be cleansed at the end of the 2300
years was not the earth but the tabernacle in heaven, with Christ ministering in our
behalf in the most holy place. This mediatorial work of Christ answered to the "hour
of God's judgement" call sounded in the message of the first angel (Rev. 14:6, 7).
Mr. Crozier, the schoolteacher, wrote out the findings of the study group. These were
printed locally, and then in fuller form in an Adventist journal known as the Day-Star,
published in Cincinnati, Ohio. A special number dated February 7, 1846, was devoted
entirely to this Bible study on the question of the sanctuary. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Truths Confirmed by Vision</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>While this study was in progress, and before their work was made known, far to the east
in the state of Maine, a vision was given to Ellen Harmon in which she was shown the
transfer of the ministry of Christ from the holy place to the most holy place at the end
of the 2300 days. The record of this vision is found in Early Writings, pages 54-56.</span></p>
<p><span>Of another vision shortly after this, as referred to by Mrs. White in a statement
written in April, 1847, she records that "the Lord showed me in vision, more than one
year ago, that brother Crozier had the true light on the cleansing of the sanctuary, etc.;
and that it was His will that Brother Crozier should write out the view which he gave us
in the Day-Star Extra, February 7, 1846. I feel fully authorised by the Lord to recommend
that Extra to every saint."--A Word to the Little Flock, p. 12. Thus the finding of
Bible scholars was confirmed by the visions of God's messenger.</span></p>
<p><span>In subsequent years Ellen White wrote a great deal concerning the sanctuary truth and
its significance to us, and there are many references to this in Early Writings. Note
especially the chapter beginning on page 250 entitled "The Sanctuary." The
understanding of the ministry of Christ in the heavenly sanctuary proved to be the key
that unlocked the mystery of the great Disappointment. Our pioneers saw clearly that the
prophecy announcing the hour of God's judgement at hand had its fulfilment in the events
that took place in 1844, but that there was a work of ministry to be accomplished in the
most holy place in the heavenly sanctuary before Jesus should come to this earth.</span></p>
<p><span>The message of the first angel and the message of the second angel had been sounded in
the proclamation of the Advent message, and now the message of the third angel began to
sound. Under this message the significance of the seventh-day Sabbath began to dawn. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Beginnings of Sabbath Observance</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As we trace the story of the beginning of Sabbathkeeping among the early Adventists, we
go to a little church in the township of Washington in the heart of New Hampshire, the
state that adjoins Maine on the east and whose western boundary is within sixty miles of
the New York State line. Here the members of an independent Christian church in 1843 heard
and accepted the preaching of the Advent message. It was an earnest group. Into their
midst came a Seventh Day Baptist, Rachel Oakes, who distributed tracts setting forth the
binding claims of the fourth commandment. Some in 1844 saw and accepted this Bible truth.
One of their number, William Farnsworth, in a Sunday morning service, stood to his feet
and declared that he intended to keep God's Sabbath of the fourth commandment. A dozen
others joined him, taking their stand firmly on all of God's commandments. They were the
first Seventh-day Adventists.</span></p>
<p><span>The minister who cared for this church group, Frederick Wheeler, soon accepted the
seventh-day Sabbath and was the first Adventist minister to do so. Another of the Advent
preachers, T. M. Preble, who lived in the same state, accepted the Sabbath truth and in
February, 1845, published an article in the Hope of Israel, one of the Adventist journals,
setting forth the binding claims of the fourth commandment. Joseph Bates, a prominent
Adventist minister residing in Fairhaven, Massachusetts, read the Preble article and
accepted the seventh-day Sabbath. Shortly thereafter, Elder Bates journeyed to Washington,
New Hampshire, to study this new-found truth with the Sabbathkeeping Adventists residing
there. When he returned to his home, he was fully convinced of the Sabbath truth. Bates in
time determined to publish a tract setting forth the binding claims of the fourth
commandment. His 48-page Sabbath pamphlet was published in August, 1846. A copy of it came
to the hands of James and Ellen White at about the time of their marriage in late August.
From the scriptural evidence therein presented, they accepted, and began to keep the
seventh-day Sabbath. Of this Ellen White later wrote: "in the autumn of 1846 we began
to observe the Bible Sabbath, and to teach and defend it."--Testimonies, vol. 1, p.
75. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Significance of the Sabbath Revealed</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>James and Ellen White took their stand purely from the scriptural evidence to which
their minds had been directed in the Bates tract. Then on the first Sabbath in April,
1847, seven months after they began to keep and teach the seventh-day Sabbath, the Lord
gave a vision to Mrs. White at Topsham, Maine, in which the importance of the Sabbath was
stressed. She saw the tables of the law in the ark in the heavenly sanctuary, and a halo
of light about the fourth commandment. See pages 32-35 for the account of this vision. The
position previously taken from the study of the Word of God was confirmed. The vision also
helped to broaden the believer's concept of Sabbath observance. In this revelation, Mrs.
White was carried down to the close of time and saw the Sabbath as the great testing truth
on which men decide whether to serve God or to serve an apostate power. Looking back in
1874 to this experience, she wrote:</span></p>
<p><span>"I believe the truth upon the Sabbath question before I had seen anything in
vision in reference to the Sabbath. It was months after I had commenced keeping the
Sabbath before I was shown its importance and its place in the third angel's
message."--E. G. White letter 2, 1874. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Important Sabbath Conferences</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In the providence of God the several Sabbathkeeping ministers who led out in teaching
these new-found truths in company with a number of their followers, came together in 1848
in five Sabbath conferences. Through periods of fasting and prayer they studied the Word
of God. Elder Bates, the apostle of the Sabbath truth, took the lead in advocating the
binding claims of the Sabbath. Hiram Edson and his associates, who attended some of the
conferences, were strong in their presentation of the sanctuary light. James White, a
careful student of prophecy, focused his attention on events that must take place before
Jesus comes again. At these meetings the leading doctrines held today by Seventh-day
Adventists were brought together. </span></p>
<p><span>Looking back to this experience, Ellen White wrote:</span></p>
<p><span>"Many of our people do not realise how firmly the foundation of our faith has been
laid. My husband, Elder Joseph Bates, Father Pierce, [* older brethren among the pioneers
are here thus reminiscently referred to. "Father Pierce" was Stephen Pierce, who
served in ministerial and administrative work in the early days.] Elder [Hiram] Edson, and
others who were keen, noble, and true, were among those who, after the passing of the time
in 1844, searched for the truth as for hidden treasure. I met with them, and we studied
and prayed earnestly. Often we remained together until late at night, and sometimes
through the entire night, praying for light and studying the Word. Again and again these
brethren came together to study the Bible, in order that they might know its meaning, and
be prepared to teach it with power. When they came to the point in their study where they
said, "we can do nothing more,' the Spirit of the Lord would come upon me, I would be
taken off in vision, and a clear explanation of the passages we had been studying would be
given me, with instruction as to how we were to labour and teach effectively. Thus light
was given that helped us to understand the Scriptures in regard to Christ, His mission,
and His priesthood. A line of truth extending from that time to the time when we shall
enter the city of God, was made plain to me, and I gave to others the instruction that the
Lord had given me.</span></p>
<p><span>"During this whole time I could not understand the reasoning of the brethren. My
mind was locked, as it were, and I could not comprehend the meaning of the Scriptures we
were studying. This was one of the greatest sorrows of my life. I was in this condition of
mind until all the principal points of our faith were made clear to our minds, in harmony
with the Word of God. The brethren knew that when not in vision, I could not understand
these matters, and they accepted as light direct from heaven the revelations
given."-- Selected Messages, book 1, pp. 206, 207.</span></p>
<p><span>Thus the doctrinal foundation of the Seventh-day Adventist Church was laid in the
faithful study of the Word of God, and when the pioneers could not make headway, Ellen
White was given light that helped to explain their difficulty and opened the way for the
study to continue. The visions also placed the stamp of God's approval upon correct
conclusions. Thus the prophetic gift acted as a corrector of error and a confirmer of
truth. (See Gospel Workers, p. 302.) <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Pioneers Begin to Publish</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>It was shortly after the fifth of these Sabbath conferences held in 1848 that another
meeting was called at the home of Otis Nichols in Dorchester (near Boston), Massachusetts.
The brethren were studying and praying concerning their responsibility to herald the light
that the Lord had caused to shine upon their pathway. As they studied, Ellen White was
taken off in vision, and in this revelation she was shown the duty of the brethren to
publish this light. She recounts the incident in Life Sketches.</span></p>
<p><span>"After coming out of vision, I said to my husband: 'I have a message for you. You
must begin to print a little paper and send it out to the people. Let it be small at
first; but as the people read, they will send you means with which to print, and it will
be a success from the first. From this small beginning it was shown to me to be like
streams of light that went clear round the world.'"--page 125.</span></p>
<p><span>Here was a call to action. What could James White do? He had little of this world's
goods. But the vision was a divine directive, and he felt the compulsion to move forward
by faith. So with his seventy-five cent Bible and concordance with both covers torn off,
James White began to prepare the articles on the Sabbath truth and other kindred topics to
be printed in a little paper. All this took time, but eventually he presented the copy to
a printer in Middletown, Connecticut, who was willing to trust him for the printing order.
The type was set, the proofs were read, and one thousand copies of the paper were printed.
James White transported them from the Middletown printing office to the Belden home where
he and Ellen had found a temporary refuge. The little sheet was six by nine inches in size
and contained eight pages. It bore the title the Present Truth. The date was July, 1849.
The little pile of papers was laid upon the floor. Then the brethren and sisters gathered
about them and with tears in their eyes pleaded with God to bless the little sheet as it
should be sent out. Then the papers were folded, wrapped and addressed, and James White
carried them eight miles to the Middletown post office. Thus the publishing work of the
Seventh-day Adventist Church began.</span></p>
<p><span>Four issues were sent out in this manner, and each was prayed over before the papers
were taken to the post office. Soon letters were received telling of people who had begun
to keep the Sabbath from reading the papers. Some of the letters contained money, and
James White, in September, was able to pay the Middletown printer the $64.50 due for the
four issues. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Starting the Review and Herald</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As James and Ellen White travelled from place to place, staying a few months here and a
few months there, they arranged for the publishing of a few issues of the paper. Finally
the eleventh and last issue was published at Paris, Maine, in November, 1850. Mrs. White
contributed several articles to the Present Truth. Most of these are to be found in the
first part of Early Writings. See pages 36-54.</span></p>
<p><span>Also in November, a conference was held in Paris, and the brethren gave study to the
growing publishing work. They decided to enlarge the paper and they changed its name to
the Second Advent Review and Sabbath Herald. It was published for a few months at Paris,
Maine, then at Saratoga Springs, New York. It has been published from that day to this as
the church paper of the Seventh-day Adventists. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Publishing Work Grows</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>While living at Saratoga Springs, James White arranged in August, 1851, for the
printing of Mrs. White's first book titled a Sketch of the Christian Experience and Views
of Ellen G. White, now pages 11-83 of this work. With its 64 pages, it was only a
pamphlet. </span></p>
<p><span>In the spring of 1852, the Whites moved to Rochester, New York, and there established
an office in which they could do their own printing. The brethren rallied to the appeal
for money with which to purchase a printing press and six hundred dollars was raised to
secure the equipment. How happy the early believers were when our papers could be issued
on a Sabbathkeeping press! For a little more than three years, they lived in Rochester and
published the message there. In addition to the Review and Herald and the Youth's
Instructor begun by James White in 1852, they also, from time to time, published tracts.
Mrs. White's second pamphlet, supplement to the Christian Experience and Views of Ellen G.
White, was published in Rochester in January, 1854. This is now in Early Writings, pages
85-127. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Battle Creek Becomes the Publishing Centre</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In November, 1855, James and Ellen White and their helpers moved to Battle Creek,
Michigan. The press and other pieces of printing equipment were placed in a building
erected by several of the Sabbathkeeping Adventists who had furnished the money with which
to establish their own printing office. As their work developed in that little city,
Battle Creek became the natural headquarters of the Seventh-day Adventist Church. But it
was with difficulty that James White maintained the publishing work.</span></p>
<p><span>As we study the background of Early Writings, it should be noted that the early
Sabbathkeeping Adventists at first had a burden to reach with the Sabbath truth only their
former brethren in the great Advent Awakening; that is, those who had been with them in
the first and the second angels' messages. Consequently for about seven years after 1844,
their labours were very largely for Adventists who had not yet taken their stand on the
third angel's message. To one familiar with the circumstances, this is understandable. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The "Shut Door" and the "Open Door"</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In the special efforts which were made to proclaim the Advent message in the summer of
1844, the leaders in the movement had seen their own experience in the parable of the ten
virgins recorded in Matthew 25. There had been a "tarrying time" followed by the
cry, "behold the bridegroom cometh; go ye out to meet him." This was commonly
referred to as "the midnight cry." In her first vision, this was shown to Mrs.
White as a bright light set up behind the Adventists at the beginning of the path. In the
parable, they read that those who were ready went in with the bridegroom to the marriage,
"and the door was shut." (See Matthew 25:10.) they therefore concluded that on
October 22, 1844, the door of mercy was closed to those who failed to accept the message
which had been so widely proclaimed. Some years later Ellen White wrote of this:</span></p>
<p><span>"After the passing of the time when the Saviour was expected, they [the Advent
believers] still believed His coming to be near; they held that they had reached an
important crisis, and that the work of Christ as man's intercessor before God, had ceased.
It appeared to them to be taught in the Bible, that man's probation would close a short
time before the actual coming of the Lord in the clouds of heaven. This seemed evident
from those Scriptures which point to a time when men will seek, knock, and cry at the door
of mercy, and it will not be opened. And it was a question with them whether the date to
which they had looked for the coming of Christ might not rather mark the beginning of this
period which was immediately to precede His coming. Having given the warning of the
judgement near, they felt that their work for the world was done, and they lost their
burden of soul for the salvation of sinners, while the bold and blasphemous scoffing of
the ungodly seemed to them another evidence that the Spirit of God had been withdrawn from
the rejecters of his mercy. All this confirmed them in the belief that probation had
ended, or, as they then expressed it, 'the door of mercy was shut.'"--the Great
Controversy, page 429.</span></p>
<p><span>Then Mrs. White continues to show how light began to dawn on this question:</span></p>
<p><span>"But clearer light came with the investigation of the sanctuary question. They now
saw that they were correct in believing that the end of the 2300 days in 1844 marked an
important crisis. But while it was true that that door of hope and mercy by which men had
for eighteen hundred years found access to God, was closed, another door was opened, and
forgiveness of sins was offered to men through the intercession of Christ in the most
holy. One part of his ministration had closed, only to give place to another. There was
still an 'open door' to the heavenly sanctuary, where Christ was ministering in the
sinner's behalf.</span></p>
<p><span>"Now was seen the application of those words of Christ in the revelation,
addressed to the church at this very time: 'these things saith He that is holy, He that is
true, He that hath the key of David, He that openeth, and no man shutteth; and shutteth,
and no man openeth; I know thy works: behold, I have set before thee an open door, and no
man can shut it.' (Rev. 3:7, 8.)</span></p>
<p><span>"It is those who by faith follow Jesus in the great work of the atonement, who
receive the benefits of His mediation in their behalf; while those who reject the light
which brings to view this work of ministration, are not benefited thereby."--ibid.,
pp. 429, 430. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Two Ways Out of the Perplexity</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Mrs. White then speaks of how the two groups of Advent believers related themselves to
the experience of the disappointment of October 22, 1844:</span></p>
<p><span>"The passing of the time in 1844 was followed by a period of great trial to those
who still held the Advent faith. Their only relief, so far as ascertaining their true
position was concerned, was the light which directed their minds to the sanctuary above.
Some renounced their faith in their former reckoning of the prophetic periods, and
ascribed to human or satanic agencies the powerful influence of the Holy Spirit which had
attended the Advent movement. Another class firmly held that the Lord had led them in
their past experience; and as they waited and watched and prayed to know the will of God,
they saw that their great high priest had entered upon another work of ministration, and
following Him by faith, they were led to see also the closing work of the church. They had
a clearer understanding of the first and second angels' messages, and were prepared to
receive and give to the world the solemn warning of the third angel of Revelation
14."--ibid., pp. 431, 432.</span></p>
<p><span>Certain references occur in this work, on pages 42-45, to the "open door" and
the "shut door." This is correctly understood only in the light of the
background of the experience of our early believers. Not too long after the disappointment
the pioneers saw that while there were those who through the definite rejection of light
had closed the door to their salvation, there were many who had not heard the message and
had not rejected it, and these might benefit from the provisions made for man's salvation.
By the early 1850's these points stood out clearly. Then too, avenues for the presentation
of the three angel's messages were beginning to open up. Prejudice was dying away. Ellen
White, looking back to their experience following the disappointment wrote:</span></p>
<p><span>"'It was then next to impossible to obtain access to unbelievers. The
disappointment in 1844 had confused the minds of many, and they would not listen to any
explanation of the matter.'"--Review and Herald, Nov. 20, 1883.</span></p>
<p><span>But in 1851 Elder White was able to report: "'Now the door is open almost
everywhere to present the truth, and many are prepared to read the publications who have
formerly had no interest to investigate.'"-- Review and Herald, Aug. 19, 1851. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Call For Church Organisation</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>But with these new opportunities, and with a larger number of people accepting the
message, a few discordant elements came into their midst. If these had not been checked,
the work would have been greatly injured. But here again we see the providence of God in
guiding His people, for on December 24, 1850, in a vision given to Ellen White, she tells
us:</span></p>
<p><span>"'I saw how great and holy God was. Said the angel, "walk carefully before
him, for He is high and lifted up, and the train of His glory fills the temple." I
saw that everything in heaven was in perfect order. Said the angel, "Look ye, Christ
is the head, move in order, move in order. Have a meaning to everything." said the
angel, "Behold ye and know how perfect, how beautiful, the order in heaven; follow
it."'"--Ellen G. White manuscript 11, 1850. </span></p>
<p><span>It took time to lead the believers generally to appreciate the needs and value of
gospel order. Their past experiences in the protestant churches from which they had
separated led them to be cautious. Except in those places where the practical need was
very evident, fear of inviting formality held the believers back from church organisation.
It was not until a decade after the vision of 1850 that more mature plans for organisation
were finally effected. Undoubtedly a factor of primary importance in bringing the efforts
to fruition was a comprehensive chapter entitled "Gospel Order," published in
the supplement to the Christian Experience and Views of Ellen G. White. This appears in
this work as pages 97-104.</span></p>
<p><span>In 1860, in connection with the organising of the publishing work, a name was chosen.
Some thought that "Church of God" would be appropriate, but the sentiment
prevailed that the name should reflect the distinctive teachings of the church. They
adopted "Seventh-day Adventist" as their name. The following year some companies
of believers organised themselves into churches, and the churches in Michigan formed a
state conference. Soon there were several state conferences. Then in May, 1863, the
General Conference of Seventh-day Adventists was organised. This takes us five years
beyond the time of Early Writings. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Great Controversy Vision</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Reference has been made to the moving of the publishing work from Rochester, New York,
to Battle Breek, Michigan, in November, 1855. Elder and Mrs. White made their home in
Battle Creek and after the work was well established there, they were able to continue
their travels in the field. It was in connection with a visit to the state of Ohio in
February and March, 1858, that the important great controversy vision was given to Mrs.
White in the public school-house at Lovett's Grove. The account of this vision which
lasted two hours is found in Life Sketches, pages 161, 162. In September, 1858, Spiritual
Gifts, Volume I: The Great Controversy Between Christ and His Angels and Satan and His
Angels, was published. This little book of 219 pages constitutes the third and last
division of Early Writings.</span></p>
<p><span>The small publications of the first fifteen years of Mrs. White's work were to be
followed by many larger books dealing with many subjects vital to those who keep the
commandments of God and have the faith of Jesus Christ. Nevertheless the earliest writings
will always be especially dear to the hearts of all Seventh-day Adventists.</span></p>
<p><span>Trustees of the Ellen G. White Estate.<br />
Washington, D.C.<br />
March, 1963. <br />
</span></p>Experience and Views2008-08-10T23:41:57Z2008-08-10T23:41:57Zhttp://www.crcbermuda.com/reference/ellen-white-books-a-f/early-writings/1706-experience-and-viewsBrother Michaelmichael@nisbett.com<span>By the request of dear friends I have consented to give a brief sketch of my experience
and views, with the hope that it will cheer and strengthen the humble, trusting children
of the Lord. </span>
<p><span>At the age of eleven years I was converted, and when twelve years old was baptised, and
joined the Methodist Church. At the age of thirteen I heard William Miller deliver his
second course of lectures in Portland, Maine. I then felt that I was not holy, not ready
to see Jesus. And when the invitation was given for church members and sinners to come
forward for prayers, I embraced the first opportunity, for I knew that I must have a great
work done for me to fit me for heaven. My soul was thirsting for full and free salvation,
but knew not how to obtain it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In 1842, I constantly attended the second advent meetings in Portland, Maine, and fully
believed that the Lord was coming. I was hungering and thirsting for full salvation, an
entire conformity to the will of God. Day and night I was struggling to obtain this
priceless treasure, that all the riches of earth could not purchase. As I was bowed before
God praying for this blessing, the duty to go and pray in a public prayer meeting was
presented before me. I had never prayed vocally in meeting, and drew back from the duty,
fearing that if I should attempt to pray I would be confounded. Every time I went before
the Lord in secret prayer this unfulfilled duty presented itself, until I ceased to pray,
and settled down in a melancholy state, and finally in deep despair.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In this state of mind I remained for three weeks, with not one ray of light to pierce
the thick clouds of darkness around me. I then had two dreams which gave me a faint ray of
light and hope. After that I opened my mind to my devoted mother. She told me that I was
not lost and advised me to go and see Brother Stockman, who then preached to the Advent
people in Portland. I had great confidence in him, for he was a devoted and beloved
servant of Christ. His words affected me and led me to hope. I returned home and again
went before the Lord, and promised that I would do and suffer anything if I could have the
smiles of Jesus. The same duty was presented. There was to be a prayer meeting that
evening, which I attended, and when others knelt to pray, I bowed with them trembling, and
after two or three had prayed, I opened my mouth in prayer before I was aware of it, and
the promises of God looked to me like so many precious pearls that were to be received by
only asking for them. As I prayed, the burden and agony of soul that I had so long felt
left me, and the blessing of God came upon me like the gentle dew. I gave glory to God for
what I felt, but I longed for more. I could not be satisfied till I was filled with the
fullness of God. Inexpressible love for Jesus filled my soul. Wave after wave of glory
rolled over me, until my body grew stiff. Everything was shut out from me but Jesus and
glory, and I knew nothing of what was passing around me. </span></p>
<p><span>I remained in this state of body and mind a long time, and when I realised what was
around me, everything seemed changed. Everything looked glorious and new, as if smiling
and praising God. I was then willing to confess Jesus everywhere. For six months not a
cloud of darkness passed over my mind. My soul was daily drinking rich draughts of
salvation. I thought that those who loved Jesus would love His coming, so went to the
class meeting and told them what Jesus had done for me and what a fullness I enjoyed
through believing that the Lord was coming. The class leader interrupted me, saying,
"Through Methodism"; but I could not give the glory to Methodism when it was
Christ and the hope of His soon coming that had made me free. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Most of my father's family were full believers in the advent, and for bearing testimony
to this glorious doctrine seven of us were at one time cast out of the Methodist Church.
At this time the words of the prophet were exceedingly precious to us: "Your brethren
that hated you, that cast you out for My name's sake, said, Let the Lord be glorified: but
He shall appear to your joy, and they shall be ashamed." Isa. 66:5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>From this time, up to December, 1844, my joys, trials, and disappointments were like
those of my dear Advent friends around me. At this time I visited one of our Advent
sisters, and in the morning we bowed around the family altar. It was not an exciting
occasion, and there were but five of us present, all women. While I was praying, the power
of God came upon me as I had never felt it before. I was wrapped in a vision of God's
glory, and seemed to be rising higher and higher from the earth, and was shown something
of the travels of the Advent people to the Holy City, as narrated below. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>My First Vision </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As God has shown me the travels of the Advent people to the Holy City and the rich
reward to be given those who wait the return of their Lord from the wedding, it may be my
duty to give you a short sketch of what God has revealed to me. The dear saints have many
trials to pass through. But our light afflictions, which are but for a moment, will work
for us a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory--while we look not at the things
which are seen, for the things which are seen are temporal, but the things which are not
seen are eternal. I have tried to bring back a good report and a few grapes from the
heavenly Canaan, for which many would stone me, as the congregation bade stone Caleb and
Joshua for their report. (Num. 14:10.) But I declare to you, my brethren and sisters in
the Lord, it is a goodly land, and we are well able to go up and possess it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>While I was praying at the family altar, the Holy Ghost fell upon me, and I seemed to
be rising higher and higher, far above the dark world. I turned to look for the Advent
people in the world, but could not find them, when a voice said to me, "Look again,
and look a little higher." At this I raised my eyes, and saw a straight and narrow
path, cast up high above the world. On this path the Advent people were travelling to the
city, which was at the farther end of the path. They had a bright light set up behind them
at the beginning of the path, which an angel told me was the midnight cry. This light
shone all along the path and gave light for their feet so that they might not stumble. If
they kept their eyes fixed on Jesus, who was just before them, leading them to the city,
they were safe. But soon some grew weary, and said the city was a great way off, and they
expected to have entered it before. Then Jesus would encourage them by raising His
glorious right arm, and from His arm came a light which waved over the Advent band, and
they shouted, "Alleluia!" Others rashly denied the light behind them and said
that it was not God that had led them out so far. The light behind them went out, leaving
their feet in perfect darkness, and they stumbled and lost sight of the mark and of Jesus,
and fell off the path down into the dark and wicked world below. Soon we heard the voice
of God like many waters, which gave us the day and hour of Jesus' coming. The living
saints, 144,000 in number, knew and understood the voice, while the wicked thought it was
thunder and an earthquake. When God spoke the time, He poured upon us the Holy Ghost, and
our faces began to light up and shine with the glory of God, as Moses' did when he came
down from Mount Sinai. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The 144,000 were all sealed and perfectly united. On their foreheads was written, God,
New Jerusalem, and a glorious star containing Jesus' new name. At our happy, holy state
the wicked were enraged, and would rush violently up to lay hands on us to thrust us into
prison, when we would stretch forth the hand in the name of the Lord, and they would fall
helpless to the ground. Then it was that the synagogue of Satan knew that God had loved us
who could wash one another's feet and salute the brethren with a holy kiss, and they
worshiped at our feet. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Soon our eyes were drawn to the east, for a small black cloud had appeared, about half
as large as a man's hand, which we all knew was the sign of the Son of man. We all in
solemn silence gazed on the cloud as it drew nearer and became lighter, glorious, and
still more glorious, till it was a great white cloud. The bottom appeared like fire; a
rainbow was over the cloud, while around it were ten thousand angels, singing a most
lovely song; and upon it sat the Son of man. His hair was white and curly and lay on His
shoulders; and upon His head were many crowns. His feet had the appearance of fire; in His
right hand was a sharp sickle; in His left, a silver trumpet. His eyes were as a flame of
fire, which searched His children through and through. Then all faces gathered paleness,
and those that God had rejected gathered blackness. Then we all cried out, "Who shall
be able to stand? Is my robe spotless?" Then the angels ceased to sing, and there was
some time of awful silence, when Jesus spoke: "Those who have clean hands and pure
hearts shall be able to stand; My grace is sufficient for you." At this our faces
lighted up, and joy filled every heart. And the angels struck a note higher and sang
again, while the cloud drew still nearer the earth. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then Jesus' silver trumpet sounded, as He descended on the cloud, wrapped in flames of
fire. He gazed on the graves of the sleeping saints, then raised His eyes and hands to
heaven, and cried, "Awake! awake! awake! ye that sleep in the dust, and arise."
Then there was a mighty earthquake. The graves opened, and the dead came up clothed with
immortality. The 144,000 shouted, "Alleluia!" as they recognised their friends
who had been torn from them by death, and in the same moment we were changed and caught up
together with them to meet the Lord in the air. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We all entered the cloud together, and were seven days ascending to the sea of glass,
when Jesus brought the crowns, and with His own right hand placed them on our heads. He
gave us harps of gold and palms of victory. Here on the sea of glass the 144,000 stood in
a perfect square. Some of them had very bright crowns, others not so bright. Some crowns
appeared heavy with stars, while others had but f </span></p>
<p><span>perfectly satisfied with their crowns. And they were all clothed with a glorious white
mantle from their shoulders to their feet. Angels were all about us as we marched over the
sea of glass to the gate of the city. Jesus raised His mighty, glorious arm, laid hold of
the pearly gate, swung it back on its glittering hinges, and said to us, "You have
washed your robes in My blood, stood stiffly for My truth, enter in." We all marched
in and felt that we had a perfect right in the city. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Here we saw the tree of life and the throne of God. Out of the throne came a pure river
of water, and on either side of the river was the tree of life. On one side of the river
was a trunk of a tree, and a trunk on the other side of the river, both of pure,
transparent gold. At first I thought I saw two trees. I looked again, and saw that they
were united at the top in one tree. So it was the tree of life on either side of the river
of life. Its branches bowed to the place where we stood, and the fruit was glorious; it
looked like gold mixed with silver. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We all went under the tree and sat down to look at the glory of the place, when
Brethren Fitch and Stockman, who had preached the gospel of the kingdom, and whom God had
laid in the grave to save them, came up to us and asked us what we had passed through
while they were sleeping. We tried to call up our greatest trials, but they looked so
small compared with the far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory that surrounded us
that we could not speak them out, and we all cried out, "Alleluia, heaven is cheap
enough!" and we touched our glorious harps and made heaven's arches ring. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>With Jesus at our head we all descended from the city down to this earth, on a great
and mighty mountain, which could not bear Jesus up, and it parted asunder, and there was a
mighty plain. Then we looked up and saw the great city, with twelve foundations, and
twelve gates, three on each side, and an angel at each gate. We all cried out, "The
city, the great city, it's coming, it's coming down from God out of heaven," and it
came and settled on the place where we stood. Then we began to look at the glorious things
outside of the city. There I saw most glorious houses, that had the appearance of silver,
supported by four pillars set with pearls most glorious to behold. These were to be
inhabited by the saints. In each was a golden shelf. I saw many of the saints go into the
houses, take off their glittering crowns and lay them on the shelf, then go out into the
field by the houses to do something with the earth; not as we have to do with the earth
here; no, no. A glorious light shone all about their heads, and they were continually
shouting and offering praises to God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw another field full of all kinds of flowers, and as I plucked them, I cried out,
"They will never fade." Next I saw a field of tall grass, most glorious to
behold; it was living green and had a reflection of silver and gold, as it waved proudly
to the glory of King Jesus. Then we entered a field full of all kinds of beasts--the lion,
the lamb, the leopard, and the wolf, all together in perfect union. We passed through the
midst of them, and they followed on peaceably after. Then we entered a wood, not like the
dark woods we have here; no, no; but light, and all over glorious; the branches of the
trees moved to and fro, and we all cried out, "We will dwell safely in the wilderness
and sleep in the woods." We passed through the woods, for we were on our way to Mount
Zion. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As we were travelling along, we met a company who also were gazing at the glories of
the place. I noticed red as a border on their garments; their crowns were brilliant; their
robes were pure white. As we greeted them, I asked Jesus who they were. He said they were
martyrs that had been slain for Him. With them was an innumerable company of little ones;
they also had a hem of red on their garments. Mount Zion was just before us, and on the
mount was a glorious temple, and about it were seven other mountains, on which grew roses
and lilies. And I saw the little ones climb, or, if they chose, use their little wings and
fly, to the top of the mountains and pluck the never-fading flowers. There were all kinds
of trees around the temple to beautify the place: the box, the pine, the fir, the oil, the
myrtle, the pomegranate, and the fig tree bowed down with the weight of its timely
figs--these made the place all over glorious. And as we were about to enter the holy
temple, Jesus raised His lovely voice and said, "Only the 144,000 enter this
place," and we shouted, "Alleluia." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>This temple was supported by seven pillars, all of transparent gold, set with pearls
most glorious. The wonderful things I there saw I cannot describe. Oh, that I could talk
in the language of Canaan, then could I tell a little of the glory of the better world. I
saw there tables of stone in which the names of the 144,000 were engraved in letters of
gold. After we beheld the glory of the temple, we went out, and Jesus left us and went to
the city. Soon we heard His lovely voice again, saying, "Come, My people, you have
come out of great tribulation, and done My will; suffered for Me; come in to supper, for I
will gird Myself, and serve you." We shouted, "Alleluia! glory!" and
entered into the city. And I saw a table of pure silver; it was many miles in length, yet
our eyes could extend over it. I saw the fruit of the tree of life, the manna, almonds,
figs, pomegranates, grapes, and many other kinds of fruit. I asked Jesus to let me eat of
the fruit. He said, "Not now. Those who eat of the fruit of this land go back to
earth no more. But in a little while, if faithful, you shall both eat of the fruit of the
tree of life and drink of the water of the fountain." And He said, "You must go
back to the earth again and relate to others what I have revealed to you." Then an
angel bore me gently down to this dark world. Sometimes I think I can stay here no longer;
all things of earth look so dreary. I feel very lonely here, for I have seen a better
land. Oh, that I had wings like a dove, then would I fly away and be at rest! - <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>After I came out of vision, everything looked changed; a gloom was spread over all that
I beheld. Oh, how dark this world looked to me. I wept when I found myself here, and felt
homesick. I had seen a better world, and it had spoiled this for me. I told the view to
our little band in Portland, who then fully believed it to be of God. That was a powerful
time. The solemnity of eternity rested upon us. About one week after this the Lord gave me
another view and showed me the trials I must pass through, and that I must go and relate
to others what He had revealed to me, and that I should meet with great opposition and
suffer anguish of spirit by going. But said the angel, "The grace of God is
sufficient for you; He will hold you up." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>After I came out of this vision, I was exceedingly troubled. My health was very poor,
and I was but seventeen years old. I knew that many had fallen through exaltation, and I
knew that if I in any way became exalted, God would leave me, and I should surely be lost.
I went to the Lord in prayer and begged Him to lay the burden on someone else. It seemed
to me that I could not bear it. I lay upon my face a long time, and all the light I could
get was, "Make known to others what I have revealed to you." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In my next vision I earnestly begged of the Lord that, if I must go and relate what He
had shown to me, He would keep me from exaltation. Then He showed me that my prayer was
answered, and if I should be in danger of exaltation His hand would be laid upon me, and I
would be afflicted with sickness. Said the angel, "If you deliver the messages
faithfully, and endure unto the end, you shall eat of the fruit of the tree of life and
drink of the water of the river of life." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Soon it was reported all around that the visions were the result of mesmerism, and many
Adventists were ready to believe and circulate the report. A physician who was a
celebrated mesmeriser told me that my views were mesmerism, that I was a very easy
subject, and that he could mesmerise me and give me a vision. I told him that the Lord had
shown me in vision that mesmerism was from the devil, from the bottomless pit, and that it
would soon go there, with those who continued to use it. I then gave him liberty to
mesmerise me if he could. He tried for more than half an hour, resorting to different
operations, and then gave it up. By faith in God I was able to resist his influence, so
that it did not affect me in the least. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If I had a vision in meeting, many would say that it was excitement and that someone
mesmerised me. Then I would go away alone in the woods, where no eye or ear but God's
could see or hear, and pray to Him, and He would sometimes give me a vision there. I then
rejoiced, and told them what God had revealed to me alone, where no mortal could influence
me. But I was told by some that I mesmerised myself. Oh, thought I, has it come to this
that those who honestly go to God alone to plead His promises and to claim His salvation,
are to be charged with being under the foul and soul-damning influence of mesmerism? Do we
ask our kind Father in heaven for "bread," only to receive a "stone"
or a "scorpion"? These things wounded my spirit, and wrung my soul in keen
anguish, well-nigh to despair, while many would have me believe that there was no Holy
Ghost and that all the exercises that holy men of God have experienced were only mesmerism
or the deceptions of Satan. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>At this time there was fanaticism in Maine. Some refrained wholly from labour and
disfellowshipped all those who would not receive their views on this point, and some other
things which they held to be religious duties. God revealed these errors to me in vision
and sent me to His erring children to declare them; but many of them wholly rejected the
message, and charged me with conforming to the world. On the other hand, the nominal
Adventists charged me with fanaticism, and I was falsely, and by some wickedly,
represented as being the leader of the fanaticism that I was actually labouring to
correct. Different times were repeatedly set for the Lord to come and were urged upon the
brethren; but the Lord showed me that they would all pass by, for the time of trouble must
come before the coming of Christ, and that every time that was set and passed by would
only weaken the faith of God's people. For this I was charged with being with the evil
servant that said in his heart, "My Lord delayeth His coming." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>All these things weighed heavily upon my spirits, and in the confusion I was sometimes
tempted to doubt my own experience. While at family prayers one morning, the power of God
began to rest upon me, and the thought rushed into my mind that it was mesmerism, and I
resisted it. Immediately I was struck dumb and for a few moments was lost to everything
around me. I then saw my sin in doubting the power of God, and that for so doing I was
struck dumb, and that my tongue would be loosed in less than twenty-four hours. A card was
held up before me, on which were written in letters of gold the chapter and verse of fifty
texts of Scripture. After I came out of vision, I beckoned for the slate, and wrote upon
it that I was dumb, also what I had seen, and that I wished the large Bible. I took the
Bible and readily turned to all the texts that I had seen upon the card. I was unable to
speak all day. Early the next morning my soul was filled with joy, and my tongue was
loosed to shout the high praises of God. After that I dared not doubt or for a moment
resist the power of God, however others might think of me. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In 1846, while at Fairhaven, Massachusetts, my sister (who usually accompanied me at
that time), Sister A., Brother G., and myself started in a sailboat to visit a family on
West's Island. It was almost night when we started. We had gone but a short distance when
a storm suddenly arose. It thundered and lightened, and the rain came in torrents upon us.
It seemed plain that we must be lost, unless God should deliver. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I knelt down in the boat and began to cry to God to deliver us. And there upon the
tossing billows, while the water washed over the top of the boat upon us, I was taken off
in vision and saw that sooner would every drop of water in the ocean be dried up than we
perish, for my work had but just begun. After I came out of the vision all my fears were
gone, and we sang and praised God, and our little boat was to us a floating Bethel. The
editor of The Advent Herald has said that my visions were known to be "the result of
mesmeric operations." But, I ask, what opportunity was there for mesmeric operations
in such a time as that? Brother G. had more than he could well do to manage the boat. He
tried to anchor, but the anchor dragged. Our little boat was tossed upon the waves and
driven by the wind, while it was so dark that we could not see from one end of the boat to
the other. Soon the anchor held, and Brother G. called for help. There were but two houses
on the island, and it proved that we were near one of them, but not the one where we
wished to go. All the family had retired to rest except a little child, who providentially
heard the call for help upon the water. Her father soon came to our relief, and, in a
small boat, took us to the shore. We spent the most of that night in thanksgiving and
praise to God for His wonderful goodness unto us. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Texts Referred to on Preceding Page </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>And, behold, thou shalt be dumb, and not able to speak, until the day that these things
shall be performed, because thou believest not My words, which shall be fulfilled in their
season. Luke 1:20. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>All things that the Father hath are Mine: therefore said I, that He shall take of Mine,
and shall show it unto you. John 16:15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And they were all filled with the Holy Ghost, and began to speak with other tongues, as
the Spirit gave them utterance. Acts 2:4. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And now, Lord, behold their threatenings: and grant unto Thy servants, that with all
boldness they may speak Thy word, by stretching forth Thine hand to heal; and that signs
and wonders may be done by the name of Thy holy child Jesus. And when they had prayed, the
place was shaken where they were assembled together; and they were all filled with the
Holy Ghost, and they spake the word of God with boldness. Acts 4:29-31. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Give not that which is holy unto the dogs, neither cast ye your pearls before swine,
lest they trample them under their feet, and turn again and rend you. Ask, and it shall be
given you; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you: for everyone
that asketh receiveth; and he that seeketh findeth; and to him that knocketh it shall be
opened. Or what man is there of you, whom if his son ask bread, will he give him a stone?
Or if he ask a fish, will he give him a serpent? If ye then, being evil, know how to give
good gifts unto your children, how much more shall your Father which is in heaven give
good things to them that ask Him? Therefore all things whatsoever ye would that men should
do to you, do ye even so to them: for this is the law and the prophets. Beware of false
prophets, which come to you in sheep's clothing, but inwardly they are ravening wolves.
Matt. 7:6-12, 15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For there shall arise false Christs, and false prophets, and shall show great signs and
wonders; insomuch that, if it were possible, they shall deceive the very elect. Matt.
24:24. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As ye have therefore received Christ Jesus the Lord, so walk ye in Him: rooted and
built up in Him, and stablished in the faith, as ye have been taught, abounding therein
with thanksgiving. Beware lest any man spoil you through philosophy and vain deceit, after
the tradition of men, after the rudiments of the world, and not after Christ. Col. 2:6-8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Cast not away therefore your confidence, which hath great recompense of reward. For ye
have need of patience, that, after ye have done the will of God, ye might receive the
promise. For yet a little while, and He that shall come will come, and will not tarry. Now
the just shall live by faith: but if any man draw back, My soul shall have no pleasure in
him. But we are not of them who draw back unto perdition; but of them that believe to the
saving of the soul. Heb. 10:35-39. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For he that is entered into his rest, he also hath ceased from his own works, as God
did from His. Let us labour therefore to enter into that rest, lest any man fall after the
same example of unbelief. For the Word of God is quick, and powerful, and sharper than any
two-edged sword, piercing even to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the
joints and marrow, and is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart. Heb.
4:10-12. 26 <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Being confident of this very thing, that He which hath begun a good work in you will
perform it until the day of Jesus Christ. . . . Only let your conversation be as it
becometh the gospel of Christ: that whether I come and see you, or else be absent, I may
hear of your affairs, that ye stand fast in one spirit, with one mind striving together
for the faith of the gospel; and in nothing terrified by your adversaries: which is to
them an evident token of perdition, but to you of salvation, and that of God. For unto you
it is given in the behalf of Christ, not only to believe on Him, but also to suffer for
His sake. Phil. 1:6, 27-29. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For it is God which worketh in you both to will and to do of His good pleasure. Do all
things without murmurings and disputings: that ye may be blameless and harmless, the sons
of God, without rebuke, in the midst of a crooked and perverse nation, among whom ye shine
as lights in the world. Phil. 2:13-15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Finally, my brethren, be strong in the Lord, and in the power of His might. Put on the
whole armour of God, that ye may be able to stand against the wiles of the devil. For we
wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against
the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places.
Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to withstand in the
evil day, and having done all, to stand. Stand therefore, having your loins girt about
with truth, and having on the breastplate of righteousness; and your feet shod with the
preparation of the gospel of peace; above all, taking the shield of faith, wherewith ye
shall be able to quench all the fiery darts of the wicked. And take the helmet of
salvation, and the sword of the Spirit, which is the Word of God. Praying always with all
prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance and
supplication for all saints. Eph. 6:10-18. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And be ye kind one to another, tender-hearted, forgiving one another, even as God for
Christ's sake hath forgiven you. Eph. 4:32.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Seeing ye have purified your souls in obeying the truth through the Spirit unto
unfeigned love of the brethren, see that ye love one another with a pure heart fervently.
1 Peter 1:22. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>A new commandment I give unto you, That ye love one another; as I have loved you, that
ye also love one another. By this shall all men know that ye are My disciples, if ye have
love one to another. John 13:34, 35. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Examine yourselves, whether ye be in the faith; prove your own selves. Know ye not your
own selves, how that Jesus Christ is in you, except ye be reprobates? 2 Cor. 13:5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>According to the grace of God which is given unto me, as a wise master builder, I have
laid the foundation, and another buildeth thereon. But let every man take heed how he
buildeth thereupon. For other foundation can no man lay than that is laid, which is Jesus
Christ. Now if any man build upon this foundation gold, silver, precious stones, wood,
hay, stubble; every man's work shall be made manifest: for the day shall declare it,
because it shall be revealed by fire; and the fire shall try every man's work of what sort
it is. 1 Cor. 3:10-13. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Take heed therefore unto yourselves, and to all the flock, over the which the Holy
Ghost hath made you overseers, to feed the church of God, which He hath purchased with His
own blood. For I know this, that after my departing shall grievous wolves enter in among
you, not sparing the flock. Also of your own selves shall men arise, speaking perverse
things, to draw away disciples after them. Acts 20:28-30. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I marvel that ye are so soon removed from Him that called you into the grace of Christ
unto another gospel: which is not another; but there be some that trouble you, and would
pervert the gospel of Christ. But though we, or an angel from heaven, preach any other
gospel unto you than that which we have preached unto you, let him be accursed. As we said
before, so say I now again, If any man preach any other gospel unto you than that ye have
received, let him be accursed. Gal. 1:6-9.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that
which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. And I
say unto you My friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no
more that they can do. But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear Him, which after
He hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear Him. Are not five
sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? But even the
very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than
many sparrows. Luke 12:3-7. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For it is written, He shall give His angels charge over thee, to keep thee: and in
their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone.
Luke 4:10, 11. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For God, who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, hath shined in our hearts,
to give the light of the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ. But we
have this treasure in earthen vessels, that the excellency of the power may be of God, and
not of us. We are troubled on every side, yet not distressed; we are perplexed, but not in
despair; persecuted, but not forsaken; cast down, but not destroyed. 2 Cor. 4:6-9. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For our light affliction, which is but for a moment, worketh for us a far more
exceeding and eternal weight of glory; while we look not at the things which are seen, but
at the things which are not seen: for the things which are seen are temporal; but the
things which are not seen are eternal. 2 Cor. 4:17, 18. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Who are kept by the power of God through faith unto salvation ready to be revealed in
the last time. Wherein ye greatly rejoice, though now for a season, if need be, ye are in
heaviness through manifold temptations: that the trial of your faith, being much more
precious than of gold that perisheth, though it be tried with fire, might be found unto
praise and honour and glory at the appearing of Jesus Christ. 1 Peter 1:5-7. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For now we live, if ye stand fast in the Lord. 1 Thess. 3:8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And these things shall follow them that believe: In My name shall they cast out devils;
they shall speak with new tongues; they shall take up serpents; and if they drink any
deadly thing, it shall not hurt them; they shall lay hands on the sick, and they shall
recover. Mark 16:17, 18. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>His parents answered them and said, We know that this is our son, and that he was born
blind: but by what means he now seeth, we know not; or who hath opened his eyes we know
not: he is of age; ask him: he shall speak for himself. These words spake his parents,
because they feared the Jews: for the Jews had agreed already, that if any man did confess
that He was Christ, he should be put out of the synagogue. Therefore said his parents, He
is of age; ask him. Then again called they the man that was blind, and said unto him, Give
God the praise: we know that this Man is a sinner. He answered and said, Whether He be a
sinner or no, I know not: one thing I know, that, whereas I was blind, now I see. Then
said they to him again, What did He to thee? how opened He thine eyes? He answered them, I
have told you already, and ye did not hear: wherefore would ye hear it again? Would ye
also be His disciples? John 9:20-27. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And whatsoever ye shall ask in My name, that will I do, that the Father may be
glorified in the Son. If ye shall ask anything in My name, I will do it. If ye love Me,
keep My commandments. John 14:13-15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If ye abide in Me, and My words abide in you, ye shall ask what ye will, and it shall
be done unto you. Herein is My Father glorified, that ye bear much fruit; so shall ye be
My disciples. John 15:7, 8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And there was in their synagogue a man with an unclean spirit; and he cried out,
saying, Let us alone; what have we to do with Thee, Thou Jesus of Nazareth? art Thou come
to destroy us? I know Thee who Thou art, the Holy One of God. And Jesus rebuked him,
saying, Hold thy peace, and come out of him. Mark 1:23-25.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For I am persuaded, that neither death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor
powers, nor things present, nor things to come, nor height, nor depth, nor any other
creature, shall be able to separate us from the love of God, which is in Christ Jesus our
Lord. Rom. 8:38, 39. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And to the angel of the church in Philadelphia write: These things saith He that is
holy, He that is true, He that hath the key of David, He that openeth, and no man
shutteth; and shutteth, and no man openeth; I know thy works: behold, I have set before
thee an open door, and no man can shut it; for thou hast a little strength, and hast kept
My word, and hast not denied My name. Behold, I will make them of the synagogue of Satan,
which say they are Jews, and are not, but do lie; behold, I will make them to come and
worship before thy feet, and to know that I have loved thee. Because thou hast kept the
word of My patience, I also will keep thee from the hour of temptation, which shall come
upon all the world, to try them that dwell upon the earth. Behold, I come quickly: hold
that fast which thou hast, that no man take thy crown. Him that overcometh will I make a
pillar in the temple of My God, and he shall go no more out: and I will write upon him the
name of My God, and the name of the city of My God, which is New Jerusalem, which cometh
down out of heaven from My God: and I will write upon him My new name. He that hath an
ear, let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the churches. Rev. 3:7-13. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>These are they which were not defiled with women; for they are virgins. These are they
which follow the Lamb whithersoever He goeth. These were redeemed from among men, being
the first fruits unto God and to the Lamb. And in their mouth was found no guile: for they
are without fault before the throne of God. Rev. 14:4, 5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For our conversation is in heaven; from whence also we look for the Saviour, the Lord
Jesus Christ. Phil. 3:20. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Be patient therefore, brethren, unto the coming of the Lord. Behold, the husbandman
waiteth for the precious fruit of the earth, and hath long patience for it, until he
receive the early and latter rain. Be ye also patient; stablish your hearts: for the
coming of the Lord draweth nigh. James 5:7, 8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Who shall change our vile body, that it may be fashioned like unto His glorious body,
according to the working whereby He is able even to subdue all things unto Himself. Phil.
3:21. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I looked, and behold a white cloud, and upon the cloud one sat like unto the Son of
man, having on His head a golden crown, and in His hand a sharp sickle. And another angel
came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to Him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in
Thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for Thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth
is ripe. And He that sat on the cloud thrust in His sickle on the earth; and the earth was
reaped. And another angel came out of the temple which is in heaven, he also having a
sharp sickle. Rev. 14:14-17. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>There remaineth therefore a rest to the people of God. Heb. 4:9. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I John saw the holy city, New Jerusalem, coming down from God out of heaven,
prepared as a bride adorned for her husband. Rev. 21:2. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I looked, and lo, a Lamb stood on the Mount Sion, and with Him an hundred forty and
four thousand, having His Father's name written in their foreheads. Rev. 14:1. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And he showed me a pure river of water of life, clear as crystal, proceeding out of the
throne of God and of the Lamb. In the midst of the street of life, and on either side of
the river, was there the tree of life, which bare twelve manner of fruits, and yielded her
fruit every month: and the leaves of the tree were for the healing of the nations. And
there shall be no more curse: but the throne of God and of the Lamb shall be in it; and
His servants shall serve Him. And they shall see His face; and His name shall be in their
foreheads. And there shall be no night there; and they need no candle, neither light of
the sun; for the Lord giveth them light: and they shall reign forever and ever. Rev.
22:1-5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Subsequent Visions </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord gave me the following view in 1847, while the brethren were assembled on the
Sabbath, at Topsham, Maine. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We felt an unusual spirit of prayer. And as we prayed the Holy Ghost fell upon us. We
were very happy. Soon I was lost to earthly things and was wrapped in a vision of God's
glory. I saw an angel flying swiftly to me. He quickly carried me from the earth to the
Holy City. In the city I saw a temple, which I entered. I passed through a door before I
came to the first veil. This veil was raised, and I passed into the holy place. Here I saw
the altar of incense, the candlestick with seven lamps, and the table on which was the
shewbread. After viewing the glory of the holy, Jesus raised the second veil and I passed
into the holy of holies. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In the holiest I saw an ark; on the top and sides of it was purest gold. On each end of
the ark was a lovely cherub, with its wings spread out over it. Their faces were turned
toward each other, and they looked downward. Between the angels was a golden censer. Above
the ark, where the angels stood, was an exceeding bright glory, that appeared like a
throne where God dwelt. Jesus stood by the ark, and as the saints' prayers came up to Him,
the incense in the censer would smoke, and He would offer up their prayers with the smoke
of the incense to His Father. In the ark was the golden pot of manna, Aaron's rod that
budded, and the tables of stone which folded together like a book. Jesus opened them, and
I saw the ten commandments written on them with the finger of God. On one table were four,
and on the other six. The four on the first table shone brighter than the other six. But
the fourth, the Sabbath commandment, shone above them all; for the Sabbath was set apart
to be kept in honour of God's holy name. The holy Sabbath looked glorious--a halo of glory
was all around it. I saw that the Sabbath commandment was not nailed to the cross. If it
was, the other nine commandments were; and we are at liberty to break them all, as well as
to break the fourth. I saw that God had not changed the Sabbath, for He never changes. But
the pope had changed it from the seventh to the first day of the week; for he was to
change times and laws. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I saw that if God had changed the Sabbath from the seventh to the first day, He
would have changed the writing of the Sabbath commandment, written on the tables of stone,
which are now in the ark in the most holy place of the temple in heaven; and it would read
thus: The first day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God. But I saw that it read the same as
when written on the tables of stone by the finger of God, and delivered to Moses on Sinai.
"But the seventh day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God." I saw that the holy
Sabbath is, and will be, the separating wall between the true Israel of God and
unbelievers; and that the Sabbath is the great question to unite the hearts of God's dear,
waiting saints. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that God had children who do not see and keep the Sabbath. They have not rejected
the light upon it. And at the commencement of the time of trouble, we were filled with the
Holy Ghost as we went forth and proclaimed the Sabbath more fully. This enraged the
churches and nominal Adventists, as they could not refute the Sabbath truth. And at this
time God's chosen all saw clearly that we had the truth, and they came out and endured the
persecution with us. I saw the sword, famine, pestilence, and great confusion in the land.
The wicked thought that we had brought the judgements upon them, and they rose up and took
counsel to rid the earth of us, thinking that then the evil would be stayed. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In the time of trouble we all fled from the cities and villages, but were pursued by
the wicked, who entered the houses of the saints with a sword. They raised the sword to
kill us, but it broke, and fell as powerless as a straw. Then we all cried day and night
for deliverance, and the cry came up before God. The sun came up, and the moon stood
still. The streams ceased to flow. Dark, heavy clouds came up and clashed against each
other. But there was one clear place of settled glory, whence came the voice of God like
many waters, which shook the heavens and the earth. The sky opened and shut and was in
commotion. The mountains shook like a reed in the wind, and cast out ragged rocks all
around. The sea boiled like a pot and cast out stones upon the land. And as God spoke the
day and the hour of Jesus' coming and delivered the everlasting covenant to His people, He
spoke one sentence, and then paused, while the words were rolling through the earth. The
Israel of God stood with their eyes fixed upward, listening to the words as they came from
the mouth of Jehovah, and rolled through the earth like peals of loudest thunder. It was
awfully solemn. And at the end of every sentence the saints shouted, "Glory!
Alleluia!" Their countenances were lighted up with the glory of God; and they shone
with the glory, as did the face of Moses when he came down from Sinai. The wicked could
not look on them for the glory. And when the never-ending blessing was pronounced on those
who had honoured God in keeping His Sabbath holy, there was a mighty shout of victory over
the beast and over his image. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then commenced the jubilee, when the land should rest. I saw the pious slave rise in
triumph and victory and shake off the chains that bound him, while his wicked master was
in confusion and knew not what to do; for the wicked could not understand the words of the
voice of God. Soon appeared the great white cloud. It looked more lovely than ever before.
On it sat the Son of man. At first we did not see Jesus on the cloud, but as it drew near
the earth we could behold His lovely person. This cloud, when it first appeared, was the
sign of the Son of man in heaven. The voice of the Son of God called forth the sleeping
saints, clothed with glorious immortality. The living saints were changed in a moment and
were caught up with them into the cloudy chariot. It looked all over glorious as it rolled
upward. On either side of the chariot were wings, and beneath it wheels. And as the
chariot rolled upward, the wheels cried, "Holy," and the wings, as they moved,
cried, "Holy," and the retinue of holy angels around the cloud cried,
"Holy, holy, holy, Lord God Almighty!" And the saints in the cloud cried,
"Glory! Alleluia!" And the chariot rolled upward to the Holy City. Jesus threw
open the gates of the golden city and led us in. Here we were made welcome, for we had
kept the "commandments of God," and had a "right to the tree of life."<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Sealing </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At the commencement of the holy Sabbath, January 5, 1849, we engaged in prayer with
Brother Belden's family at Rocky Hill, Connecticut, and the Holy Ghost fell upon us. I was
taken off in vision to the most holy place, where I saw Jesus still interceding for
Israel. On the bottom of His garment was a bell and a pomegranate. Then I saw that Jesus
would not leave the most holy place until every case was decided either for salvation or
destruction, and that the wrath of God could not come until Jesus had finished His work in
the most holy place, laid off His priestly attire, and clothed Himself with the garments
of vengeance. Then Jesus will step out from between the Father and man, and God will keep
silence no longer, but pour out His wrath on those who have rejected His truth. I saw that
the anger of the nations, the wrath of God, and the time to judge the dead were separate
and distinct, one following the other, also that Michael had not stood up, and that the
time of trouble, such as never was, had not yet commenced. The nations are now getting
angry, but when our High Priest has finished His work in the sanctuary, He will stand up,
put on the garments of vengeance, and then the seven last plagues will be poured out. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the four angels would hold the four winds until Jesus' work was done in the
sanctuary, and then will come the seven last plagues. These plagues enraged the wicked
against the righteous; they thought that we had brought the judgements of God upon them,
and that if they could rid the earth of us, the plagues would then be stayed. A decree
went forth to slay the saints, which caused them to cry day and night for deliverance.
This was the time of Jacob's trouble. Then all the saints cried out with anguish of
spirit, and were delivered by the voice of God. The 144,000 triumphed. Their faces were
lighted up with the glory of God. Then I was shown a company who were howling in agony. On
their garments was written in large characters, "Thou art weighed in the balance, and
found wanting." I asked who this company were. The angel said, "These are they
who have once kept the Sabbath and have given it up." I heard them cry with a loud
voice, "We have believed in Thy coming, and taught it with energy." And while
they were speaking, their eyes would fall upon their garments and see the writing, and
then they would wail aloud. I saw that they had drunk of the deep waters, and fouled the
residue with their feet--trodden the Sabbath underfoot-- and that was why they were
weighed in the balance and found wanting. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then my attending angel directed me to the city again, where I saw four angels winging
their way to the gate of the city. They were just presenting the golden card to the angel
at the gate when I saw another angel flying swiftly from the direction of the most
excellent glory, and crying with a loud voice to the other angels, and waving something up
and down in his hand. I asked my attending angel for an explanation of what I saw. He told
me that I could see no more then, but he would shortly show me what those things that I
then saw meant. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Sabbath afternoon one of our number was sick, and requested prayers that he might be
healed. We all united in applying to the Physician who never lost a case, and while
healing power came down, and the sick was healed, the Spirit fell upon me, and I was taken
off in vision. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw four angels who had a work to do on the earth, and were on their way to
accomplish it. Jesus was clothed with priestly garments. He gazed in pity on the remnant,
then raised His hands, and with a voice of deep pity cried, "My blood, Father, My
blood, My blood, My blood!" Then I saw an exceeding bright light come from God, who
sat upon the great white throne, and was shed all about Jesus. Then I saw an angel with a
commission from Jesus, swiftly flying to the four angels who had a work to do on the
earth, and waving something up and down in his hand, and crying with a loud voice,
"Hold! Hold! Hold! Hold! until the servants of God are sealed in their
foreheads." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I asked my accompanying angel the meaning of what I heard, and what the four angels
were about to do. He said to me that it was God that restrained the powers, and that He
gave His angels charge over things on the earth; that the four angels had power from God
to hold the four winds, and that they were about to let them go; but while their hands
were loosening, and the four winds were about to blow, the merciful eye of Jesus gazed on
the remnant that were not sealed, and He raised His hands to the Father and pleaded with
Him that He had spilled His blood for them. Then another angel was commissioned to fly
swiftly to the four angels and bid them hold, until the servants of God were sealed with
the seal of the living God in their foreheads.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>God's Love for His People </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have seen the tender love that God has for His people, and it is very great. I saw
angels over the saints with their wings spread about them. Each saint had an attending
angel. If the saints wept through discouragement, or were in danger, the angels that ever
attended them would fly quickly upward to carry the tidings, and the angels in the city
would cease to sing. Then Jesus would commission another angel to descend to encourage,
watch over, and try to keep them from going out of the narrow path; but if they did not
take heed to the watchful care of these angels, and would not be comforted by them, but
continued to go astray, the angels would look sad and weep. They would bear the tidings
upward, and all the angels in the city would weep, and then with a loud voice say,
"Amen." But if the saints fixed their eyes upon the prize before them and
glorified God by praising Him, then the angels would bear the glad tidings to the city,
and the angels in the city would touch their golden harps and sing with a loud voice,
"Alleluia!" and the heavenly arches would ring with their lovely songs. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>There is perfect order and harmony in the Holy City. All the angels that are
commissioned to visit the earth hold a golden card, which they present to the angels at
the gates of the city as they pass in and out. Heaven is a good place. I long to be there
and behold my lovely Jesus, who gave His life for me, and be changed into His glorious
image. Oh, for language to express the glory of the bright world to come! I thirst for the
living streams that make glad the city of our God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has given me a view of other worlds. Wings were given me, and an angel
attended me from the city to a place that was bright and glorious. The grass of the place
was living green, and the birds there warbled a sweet song. The inhabitants of the place
were of all sizes; they were noble, majestic, and lovely. They bore the express image of
Jesus, and their countenances beamed with holy joy, expressive of the freedom and
happiness of the place. I asked one of them why they were so much more lovely than those
on the earth. The reply was, "We have lived in strict obedience to the commandments
of God, and have not fallen by disobedience, like those on the earth." Then I saw two
trees, one looked much like the tree of life in the city. The fruit of both looked
beautiful, but of one they could not eat. They had power to eat of both, but were
forbidden to eat of one. Then my attending angel said to me, "None in this place have
tasted of the forbidden tree; but if they should eat, they would fall." Then I was
taken to a world which had seven moons. There I saw good old Enoch, who had been
translated. On his right arm he bore a glorious palm, and on each leaf was written
"Victory." Around his head was a dazzling white wreath, and leaves on the
wreath, and in the middle of each leaf was written "Purity," and around the
wreath were stones of various colours, that shone brighter than the stars, and cast a
reflection upon the letters and magnified them. On the back part of his head was a bow
that confined the wreath, and upon the bow was written "Holiness." Above the
wreath was a lovely crown that shone brighter than the sun. I asked him if this was the
place he was taken to from the earth. He said, "It is not; the city is my home, and I
have come to visit this place." He moved about the place as if perfectly at home. I
begged of my attending angel to let me remain in that place. I could not bear the thought
of coming back to this dark world again. Then the angel said, "You must go back, and
if you are faithful, you, with the 144,000, shall have the privilege of visiting all the
worlds and viewing the handiwork of God." <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Shaking of the Powers of Heaven </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>December 16, 1848, the Lord gave me a view of the shaking of the powers of the heavens.
I saw that when the Lord said "heaven," in giving the signs recorded by Matthew,
Mark, and Luke, He meant heaven, and when He said "earth" He meant earth. The
powers of heaven are the sun, moon, and stars. They rule in the heavens. The powers of
earth are those that rule on the earth. The powers of heaven will be shaken at the voice
of God. Then the sun, moon, and stars will be moved out of their places. They will not
pass away, but be shaken by the voice of God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Dark, heavy clouds came up and clashed against each other. The atmosphere parted and
rolled back; then we could look up through the open space in Orion, whence came the voice
of God. The Holy City will come down through that open space. I saw that the powers of
earth are now being shaken and that events come in order. War, and rumours of war, sword,
famine, and pestilence are first to shake the powers of earth, then the voice of God will
shake the sun, moon, and stars, and this earth also. I saw that the shaking of the powers
in Europe is not, as some teach, the shaking of the powers of heaven, but it is the
shaking of the angry nations. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Open and the Shut Door </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Sabbath, March 24, 1849, we had a sweet and very interesting meeting with the brethren
at Topsham, Maine. The Holy Ghost was poured out upon us, and I was taken off in the
Spirit to the city of the living God. Then I was shown that the commandments of God and
the testimony of Jesus Christ relating to the shut door could not be separated, and that
the time for the commandments of God to shine out with all their importance, and for God's
people to be tried on the Sabbath truth, was when the door was opened in the most holy
place in the heavenly sanctuary, where the ark is, in which are contained the ten
commandments. This door was not opened until the mediation of Jesus was finished in the
holy place of the sanctuary in 1844. Then Jesus rose up and shut the door of the holy
place, and opened the door into the most holy, and passed within the second veil, where He
now stands by the ark, and where the faith of Israel now reaches. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that Jesus had shut the door of the holy place, and no man can open it; and that
He had opened the door into the most holy, and no man can shut it (Rev. 3:7,8); and that
since Jesus has opened the door into the most holy place, which contains the ark, the
commandments have been shining out to God's people, and they are being tested on the
Sabbath question. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the present test on the Sabbath could not come until the mediation of Jesus
in the holy place was finished and He had passed within the second veil; therefore
Christians who fell asleep before the door was opened into the most holy, when the
midnight cry was finished, at the seventh month, 1844, and who had not kept the true
Sabbath, now rest in hope; for they had not the light and the test on the Sabbath which we
now have since that door was opened. I saw that Satan was tempting some of God's people on
this point. Because so many good Christians have fallen asleep in the triumphs of faith
and have not kept the true Sabbath, they were doubting about its being a test for us now. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The enemies of the present truth have been trying to open the door of the holy place,
that Jesus has shut, and to close the door of the most holy place, which He opened in
1844, where the ark is, containing the two tables of stone on which are written the ten
commandments by the finger of Jehovah. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan is now using every device in this sealing time to keep the minds of God's people
from the present truth and to cause them to waver. I saw a covering that God was drawing
over His people to protect them in the time of trouble; and every soul that was decided on
the truth and was pure in heart was to be covered with the covering of the Almighty. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan knew this, and he was at work in mighty power to keep the minds of as many people
as he possibly could wavering and unsettled on the truth. I saw that the mysterious
knocking in New York and other places was the power of Satan, and that such things would
be more and more common, clothed in a religious garb so as to lull the deceived to greater
security and to draw the minds of God's people, if possible, to those things and cause
them to doubt the teachings and power of the Holy Ghost.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that Satan was working through agents in a number of ways. He was at work through
ministers who have rejected the truth and are given over to strong delusions to believe a
lie that they might be damned. While they were preaching or praying, some would fall
prostrate and helpless, not by the power of the Holy Ghost, but by the power of Satan
breathed upon these agents, and through them to the people. While preaching, praying, or
conversing, some professed Adventists who had rejected present truth used mesmerism to
gain adherents, and the people would rejoice in this influence, for they thought it was
the Holy Ghost. Some even that used it were so far in the darkness and deception of the
devil that they thought it was the power of God, given them to exercise. They had made God
altogether such a one as themselves and had valued His power as a thing of nought. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Some of these agents of Satan were affecting the bodies of some of the saints--those
whom they could not deceive and draw away from the truth by a Satanic influence. Oh, that
all could get a view of it as God revealed it to me, that they might know more of the
wiles of Satan and be on their guard! I saw that Satan was at work in these ways to
distract, deceive, and draw away God's people, just now in this sealing time. I saw some
who were not standing stiffly for present truth. Their knees were trembling, and their
feet sliding, because they were not firmly planted on the truth, and the covering of
Almighty God could not be drawn over them while they were thus trembling. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan was trying his every art to hold them where they were, until the sealing was
past, until the covering was drawn over God's people, and they left without a shelter from
the burning wrath of God, in the seven last plagues. God has begun to draw this covering
over His people, and it will soon be drawn over all who are to have a shelter in the day
of slaughter. God will work in power for His people; and Satan will be permitted to work
also. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the mysterious signs and wonders and false reformations would increase and
spread. The reformations that were shown me were not reformations from error to truth. My
accompanying angel bade me look for the travail of soul for sinners as used to be. I
looked, but could not see it; for the time for their salvation is past.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Trial of our Faith </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In this time of trial we need to be encouraged and comforted by one another. The
temptations of Satan are greater now than ever before, for he knows that his time is short
and that very soon every case will be decided, either for life or for death. It is no time
now to sink down beneath discouragement and trial; we must bear up under all our
afflictions and trust wholly in the Almighty God of Jacob. The Lord has shown me that His
grace is sufficient for all our trials; and although they are greater than ever before,
yet if we trust wholly in God, we can overcome every temptation and through His grace come
off victorious. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If we overcome our trials and get victory over the temptations of Satan, then we endure
the trial of our faith, which is more precious than gold, and are stronger and better
prepared to meet the next. But if we sink down and give way to the temptations of Satan,
we shall grow weaker and get no reward for the trial and shall not be so well prepared for
the next. In this way we shall grow weaker and weaker, until we are led captive by Satan
at his will. We must have on the whole armour of God and be ready at any moment for a
conflict with the powers of darkness. When temptations and trials rush in upon us, let us
go to God and agonise with Him in prayer. He will not turn us away empty, but will give us
grace and strength to overcome, and to break the power of the enemy. Oh, that all could
see these things in their true light and endure hardness as good soldiers of Jesus! Then
would Israel move forward, strong in God, and in the power of His might. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God has shown me that He gave His people a bitter cup to drink, to purify and cleanse
them. It is a bitter draught, and they can make it still more bitter by murmuring,
complaining, and repining. But those who receive it thus must have another draught, for
the first does not have its designed effect upon the heart. And if the second does not
effect the work, then they must have another, and another, until it does have its designed
effect, or they will be left filthy, impure in heart. I saw that this bitter cup can be
sweetened by patience, endurance, and prayer, and that it will have its designed effect
upon the hearts of those who thus receive it, and God will be honoured and glorified. It
is no small thing to be a Christian and to be owned and approved of God. The Lord has
shown me some who profess the present truth, whose lives do not correspond with their
profession. They have the standard of piety altogether too low, and they come far short of
Bible holiness. Some engage in vain and unbecoming conversation, and others give way to
the risings of self. We must not expect to please ourselves, live and act like the world,
have its pleasures, and enjoy the company of those who are of the world, and reign with
Christ in glory. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We must be partakers of Christ's sufferings here if we would share in His glory
hereafter. If we seek our own interest, how we can best please ourselves, instead of
seeking to please God and advance His precious, suffering cause, we shall dishonour God
and the holy cause we profess to love. We have but a little space of time left in which to
work for God. Nothing should be too dear to sacrifice for the salvation of the scattered
and torn flock of Jesus. Those who make a covenant with God by sacrifice now will soon be
gathered home to share a rich reward and possess the new kingdom forever and ever. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Oh, let us live wholly for the Lord and show by a well-ordered life and godly
conversation that we have been with Jesus and are His meek and lowly followers. We must
work while the day lasts, for when the dark night of trouble and anguish comes, it will be
too late to work for God. Jesus is in His holy temple and will now accept our sacrifices,
our prayers, and our confessions of faults and sins and will pardon all the transgressions
of Israel, that they may be blotted out before He leaves the sanctuary. When Jesus leaves
the sanctuary, then they who are holy and righteous will be holy and righteous still; for
all their sins will then be blotted out, and they will be sealed with the seal of the
living God. But those that are unjust and filthy will be unjust and filthy still; for then
there will be no Priest in the sanctuary to offer their sacrifices, their confessions, and
their prayers before the Father's throne. Therefore what is done to rescue souls from the
coming storm of wrath must be done before Jesus leaves the most holy place of the heavenly
sanctuary. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>To the Little Flock Dear Brethren</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord gave me a view, January 26, 1850, which I will relate. I saw that some of the
people of God are stupid and dormant and but half awake; they do not realise the time we
are now living in, and that the man with the "dirt brush" has entered, and that
some are in danger of being swept away. I begged of Jesus to save them, to spare them a
little longer, and let them see their awful danger, that they might get ready before it
should be forever too late. The angel said, "Destruction is coming like a mighty
whirlwind." I begged of the angel to pity and to save those who loved this world, who
were attached to their possessions and were not willing to cut loose from them and
sacrifice to speed the messengers on their way to feed the hungry sheep who were perishing
for want of spiritual food. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As I viewed poor souls dying for want of the present truth, and some who professed to
believe the truth were letting them die by withholding the necessary means to carry
forward the work of God, the sight was too painful, and I begged of the angel to remove it
from me. I saw that when the cause of God called for some of their property, like the
young man who came to Jesus (Matt. 19:16-22) they went away sorrowful, and that soon the
overflowing scourge would pass over and sweep their possessions all away, and then it
would be too late to sacrifice earthly goods, and lay up a treasure in heaven. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then saw the glorious Redeemer, beautiful and lovely; that He left the realms of
glory and came to this dark and lonely world to give His precious life and die, the just
for the unjust. He bore the cruel mocking and scourging, wore the plaited crown of thorns,
and sweat great drops of blood in the garden, while the burden of the sins of the whole
world was upon Him. The angel asked, "What for?" Oh, I saw and knew that it was
for us; for our sins He suffered all this, that by His precious blood He might redeem us
unto God! <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then again was held up before me those who were not willing to dispose of this world's
goods to save perishing souls by sending them the truth while Jesus stands before the
Father pleading His blood, His sufferings, and His death for them; and while God's
messengers are waiting, ready to carry them the saving truth that they might be sealed
with the seal of the living God. It is hard for some who profess to believe the present
truth to do even so little as to hand the messengers God's own money that He has lent them
to be stewards over. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The suffering Jesus, His love so deep as to lead Him to give His life for man, was
again held up before me; also the lives of those who professed to be His followers, who
had this world's goods, but considered it so great a thing to help the cause of salvation.
The angel said, "Can such enter heavens?" Another angel answered, "No,
never, never, never. Those who are not interested in the cause of God on earth can never
sing the song of redeeming love above." I saw that the quick work that God was doing
on the earth would soon be cut short in righteousness and that the messengers must speed
swiftly on their way to search out the scattered flock. An angel said, "Are all
messengers?" Another answered, "No, no; God's messengers have a message." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the cause of God had been hindered and dishonoured by some travelling who
had no message from God. Such will have to give an account to God for every dollar they
have used in travelling where it was not their duty to go, because that money might have
helped on the cause of God; and for the lack of the spiritual food that might have been
given them by God's called and chosen messengers, had they had the means, souls have
starved and died. I saw that those who have strength to labour with their hands and help
sustain the cause were as accountable for their strength as others were for their
property. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The mighty shaking has commenced and will go on, and all will be shaken out who are not
willing to take a bold and unyielding stand for the truth and to sacrifice for God and His
cause. The angel said, "Think ye that any will be compelled to sacrifice? No, no. It
must be a freewill offering. It will take all to buy the field." I cried to God to
spare His people, some of whom were fainting and dying. Then I saw that the judgements of
the Almighty were speedily coming, and I begged of the angel to speak in his language to
the people. Said he, "All the thunders and lightnings of Mount Sinai would not move
those who will not be moved by the plain truths of the Word of God, neither would an
angel's message awake them." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then beheld the beauty and loveliness of Jesus. His robe was whiter than the whitest
white. No language can describe His glory and exalted loveliness. All, all who keep the
commandments of God, will enter in through the gates into the city and have right to the
tree of life and ever be in the presence of the lovely Jesus, whose countenance shines
brighter than the sun at noonday. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I was pointed to Adam and Eve in Eden. They partook of the forbidden tree and were
driven from the garden, and then the flaming sword was placed around the tree of life,
lest they should partake of its fruit and be immortal sinners. The tree of life was to
perpetuate immortality. I heard an angel ask, "Who of the family of Adam have passed
the flaming sword and have partaken of the tree of life?" I heard another angel
answer, "Not one of Adam's family has passed that flaming sword and partaken of that
tree; therefore there is not an immortal sinner. The soul that sinneth it shall die an
everlasting death--a death that will last forever, from which there will be no hope of a
resurrection; and then the wrath of God will be appeased. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>"The saints will rest in the Holy City and reign as kings and priests one thousand
years; then Jesus will descend with the saints upon the Mount of Olives, and the mount
will part asunder and become a mighty plain for the Paradise of God to rest upon. The rest
of the earth will not be cleansed until the end of the one thousand years, when the wicked
dead are raised, and gather up around the city. The feet of the wicked will never
desecrate the earth made n </span></p>
<p><span>them--burn them up root and branch. Satan is the root, and his children are the
branches. The same fire that will devour the wicked will purify the earth." - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Last Plagues and the Judgement </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At the general conference of believers in the present truth, held at Sutton, Vermont,
September, 1850, I was shown that the seven last plagues will be poured out after Jesus
leaves the sanctuary. Said the angel, "It is the wrath of God and the Lamb that
causes the destruction or death of the wicked. At the voice of God the saints will be
mighty and terrible as an army with banners, but they will not then execute the judgement
written. The execution of the judgement will be at the close of the one thousand
years." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>After the saints are changed to immortality and caught up together with Jesus, after
they receive their harps, their robes, and their crowns, and enter the city, Jesus and the
saints sit in judgement. The books are opened--the book of life and the book of death. The
book of life contains the good deeds of the saints; and the book of death contains the
evil deeds of the wicked. These books are compared with the statute book, the Bible, and
according to that men are judged. The saints, in unison with Jesus, pass their judgement
upon the wicked dead. "Behold ye," said the angel, "the saints, in unison
with Jesus, sit in judgement, and mete out to the wicked according to the deeds done in
the body, and that which they must receive at the execution of the judgement is set off
against their names." This, I saw, was the work of the saints with Jesus through the
one thousand years in the Holy City before it descends to the earth. Then at the close of
the one thousand years, Jesus, with the angels and all the saints, leaves the Holy City,
and while He is descending to the earth with them, the wicked dead are raised, and then
the very men that "pierced Him," being raised, will see Him afar off in all His
glory, the angels and saints with Him, and will wail because of Him. They will see the
prints of the nails in His hands and in His feet, and where they thrust the spear into His
side. The prints of the nails and the spear will then be His glory. It is at the close of
the one thousand years that Jesus stands upon the Mount of Olives, and the mount parts
asunder and becomes a mighty plain. Those who flee at that time are the wicked, who have
just been raised. Then the Holy City comes down and settles on the plain. Satan then
imbues the wicked with his spirit. He flatters them that the army in the city is small,
and that his army is large, and that they can overcome the saints and take the city. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>While Satan was rallying his army, the saints were in the city, beholding the beauty
and glory of the Paradise of God. Jesus was at their head, leading them. All at once the
lovely Saviour was gone from our company; but soon we heard His lovely voice, saying,
"Come, ye blessed of My Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the
foundation of the world." We gathered about Jesus, and just as He closed the gates of
the city, the curse was pronounced upon the wicked. The gates were shut. Then the saints
used their wings and mounted to the top of the wall of the city. Jesus was also with them;
His crown looked brilliant and glorious. It was a crown within a crown, seven in number.
The crowns of the saints were of the most pure gold, decked with stars. Their faces shone
with glory, for they were in the express image of Jesus; and as they arose and moved all
together to the top of the city, I was enraptured with the sight. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then the wicked saw what they had lost; and fire was breathed from God upon them and
consumed them. This was the execution of the judgement. The wicked then received according
as the saints, in unison with Jesus, had meted out to them during the one thousand years.
The same fire from God that consumed the wicked purified the whole earth. The broken,
ragged mountains melted with fervent heat, the atmosphere also, and all the stubble was
consumed. Then our inheritance opened before us, glorious and beautiful, and we inherited
the whole earth made new. </span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>End of the 2300 Days </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I saw a throne, and on it sat the Father and the Son. I gazed on Jesus' countenance and
admired His lovely person. The Father's person I could not behold, for a cloud of glorious
light covered Him. I asked Jesus if His Father had a form like Himself. He said He had,
but I could not behold it, for said He, "If you should once behold the glory of His
person, you would cease to exist." Before the throne I saw the Advent people--the
church and the world. I saw two companies, one bowed down before the throne, deeply
interested, while the other stood uninterested and careless. Those who were bowed before
the throne would offer up their prayers and look to Jesus; then He would look to His
Father, and appear to be pleading with Him. A light would come from the Father to the Son
and from the Son to the praying company. Then I saw an exceeding bright light come from
the Father to the Son, and from the Son it waved over the people before the throne. But
few would receive this great light. Many came out from under it and immediately resisted
it; others were careless and did not cherish the light, and it moved off from them. Some
cherished it, and went and bowed down with the little praying company. This company all
received the light and rejoiced in it, and their countenances shone with its glory. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the Father rise from the throne, and in a flaming chariot go into the holy of
holies within the veil, and sit down. Then Jesus rose up from the throne, and the most of
those who were bowed down arose with Him. I did not see one ray of light pass from Jesus
to the careless multitude after He arose, and they were left in perfect darkness. Those
who arose when Jesus did, kept their eyes fixed on Him as He left the throne and led them
out a little way. Then He raised His right arm, and we heard His lovely voice saying,
"Wait here; I am going to My Father to receive the kingdom; keep your garments
spotless, and in a little while I will return from the wedding and receive you to
Myself." Then a cloudy chariot, with wheels like flaming fire, surrounded by angels,
came to where Jesus was. He stepped into the chariot and was borne to the holiest, where
the Father sat. There I beheld Jesus, a great High Priest, standing before the Father. On
the hem of His garment was a bell and a pomegranate, a bell and a pomegranate. Those who
rose up with Jesus would send up their faith to Him in the holiest, and pray, "My
Father, give us Thy Spirit." Then Jesus would breathe upon them the Holy Ghost. In
that breath was light, power, and much love, joy, and peace. 56 <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I turned to look at the company who were still bowed before the throne; they did not
know that Jesus had left it. Satan appeared to be by the throne, trying to carry on the
work of God. I saw them look up to the throne, and pray, "Father, give us Thy
Spirit." Satan would then breathe upon them an unholy influence; in it there was
light and much power, but no sweet love, joy, and peace. Satan's object was to keep them
deceived and to draw back and deceive God's children. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Duty in View of the Time of Trouble </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me repeatedly that it is contrary to the Bible to make any provision
for our temporal wants in the time of trouble. I saw that if the saints had food laid up
by them or in the field in the time of trouble, when sword, famine, and pestilence are in
the land, it would be taken from them by violent hands and strangers would reap their
fields. Then will be the time for us to trust wholly in God, and He will sustain us. I saw
that our bread and water will be sure at that time, and that we shall not lack or suffer
hunger; for God is able to spread a table for us in the wilderness. If necessary He would
send ravens to feed us, as He did to feed Elijah, or rain manna from heaven, as He did for
the Israelites. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Houses and lands will be of no use to the saints in the time of trouble, for they will
then have to flee before infuriated mobs, and at that time their possessions cannot be
disposed of to advance the cause of present truth. I was shown that it is the will of God
that the saints should cut loose from every encumbrance before the time of trouble comes,
and make a covenant with God through sacrifice. If they have their property on the altar
and earnestly inquire of God for duty, He will teach them when to dispose of these things.
Then they will be free in the time of trouble and have no clogs to weigh them down. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that if any held on to their property and did not inquire of the Lord as to their
duty, He would not make duty known, and they would be permitted to keep their property,
and in the time of trouble it would come up before them like a mountain to crush them, and
they would try to dispose of it, but would not be able. I heard some mourn like this:
"The cause was languishing, God's people were starving for the truth, and we made no
effort to supply the lack; now our property is useless. Oh, that we had let it go, and
laid up treasure in heaven!" I saw that a sacrifice did not increase, but it
decreased and was consumed. I also saw that God had not required all of His people to
dispose of their property at the same time; but if they desired to be taught, He would
teach them, in a time of need, when to sell and how much to sell. Some have been required
to dispose of their property in times past to sustain the Advent cause, while others have
been permitted to keep theirs until a time of need. Then, as the cause needs it, their
duty is to sell. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the message, "Sell that ye have, and give alms," has not been
given, by some, in its clear light, and the object of the words of our Saviour has not
been clearly presented. The object of selling is not to give to those who are able to
labour and support themselves, but to spread the truth. It is a sin to support and indulge
in idleness those who are able to labour. Some have been zealous to attend all the
meetings, not to glorify God, but for the "loaves and fishes." Such would much
better have been at home labouring with their hands, "the thing that is good,"
to supply the wants of their families and to have something to give to sustain the
precious cause of present truth. Now is the time to lay up treasure in heaven and to set
our hearts in order, ready for the time of trouble. Those only who have clean hands and
pure hearts will stand in that trying time. Now is the time for the law of God to be in
our minds, foreheads, and written in our hearts. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me the danger of letting our minds be filled with worldly thoughts
and cares. I saw that some minds are led away from present truth and a love of the Holy
Bible by reading other exciting books; others are filled with perplexity and care for what
they shall eat, drink, and wear. Some are looking too far off for the coming of the Lord.
Time has continued a few years longer than they expected; therefore they think it may
continue a few years more, and in this way their minds are being led from present truth,
out after the world. In these things I saw great danger; for if the mind is filled with
other things, present truth is shut out, and there is no place in our foreheads for the
seal of the living God. I saw that the time for Jesus to be in the most holy place was
nearly finished and that time can last but a very little longer. What leisure time we have
should be spent in searching the Bible, which is to judge us in the last day. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>My dear brethren and sisters, let the commandments of God and the testimony of Jesus
Christ be in your minds continually and let them crowd out worldly thoughts and cares.
When you lie down and when you rise up, let them be your meditation. Live and act wholly
in reference to the coming of the Son of man. The sealing time is very short, and will
soon be over. Now is the time, while the four angels are holding the four winds, to make
our calling and election sure. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>"Mysterious Rapping" </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>August 24, 1850, I saw that the "mysterious rapping" was the power of Satan;
some of it was directly from him, and some indirectly, through his agents, but it all
proceeded from Satan. It was his work that he accomplished in different ways; yet many in
the churches and the world were so enveloped in gross darkness that they thought and held
forth that it was the power of God. Said the angel, "Should not a people seek unto
their God? for the living to the dead?" Should the living go to the dead for
knowledge? The dead know not anything. For the living God do ye go to the dead? They have
departed from the living God to converse with the dead who know not anything. (See Isa.
8:19, 20.) <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that soon it would be considered blasphemy to speak against the rapping, and that
it would spread more and more, that Satan's power would increase and some of his devoted
followers would have power to work miracles and even to bring down fire from heaven in the
sight of men. I was shown that by the rapping and mesmerism these modern magicians would
yet account for all the miracles wrought by our Lord Jesus Christ, and that many would
believe that all the mighty works of the Son of God when on earth were accomplished by
this same power. I was pointed back to the time of Moses and saw the signs and wonders
which God wrought through him before Pharaoh, most of which were imitated by the magicians
of Egypt; and that just before the final deliverance of the saints, God would work
powerfully for His people, and these modern magicians would be permitted to imitate the
work of God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>That time will soon come, and we shall have to keep hold of the strong arm of Jehovah;
for all these great signs and mighty wonders of the devil are designed to deceive God's
people and overthrow them. Our minds must be stayed upon God, and we must not fear the
fear of the wicked, that is, fear what they fear, and reverence what they reverence, but
be bold and valiant for the truth. Could our eyes be opened, we should see forms of evil
angels around us, trying to invent some new way to annoy and destroy us. And we should
also see angels of God guarding us from their power; for God's watchful eye is ever over
Israel for good, and He will protect and save His people, if they put their trust in Him.
When the enemy shall come in like a flood, the Spirit of the Lord will lift up a standard
against him. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Said the angel, "Remember, thou art on the enchanted ground." I saw that we
must watch and have on the whole armour and take the shield of faith, and then we shall be
able to stand, and the fiery darts of the wicked cannot harm us.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Messengers </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has often given me a view of the situation and wants of the scattered jewels
who have not yet come to the light of the present truth, and has shown that the messengers
should speed their way to them as fast as possible, to give them the light. Many all
around us only need to have their prejudices removed and the evidences of our present
position spread out before them from the Word, and they will joyfully receive the present
truth. The messengers should watch for souls as they that must give account. Theirs must
be a life of toil and anguish of spirit, while the weight of the precious but
often-wounded cause of Christ rests upon them. They will have to lay aside worldly
interests and comforts and make it their first object to do all in their power to advance
the cause of present truth and save perishing souls. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>They will also have a rich reward. In their crowns of rejoicing those who are rescued
by them and finally saved will shine as stars forever and ever. And to all eternity they
will enjoy the satisfaction of having done what they could in presenting the truth in its
purity and beauty, so that souls fell in love with it, were sanctified through it, and
availed themselves of the inestimable privilege of being made rich, and being washed in
the blood of the Lamb and redeemed unto God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the shepherds should consult those in whom they have reason to have
confidence, those who have been in all the messages, and are firm in all the present
truth, before they advocate new points of importance, which they may think the Bible
sustains. Then the shepherds will be perfectly united and the union of the shepherds will
be felt by the church. Such a course I saw would prevent unhappy divisions, and then there
would be no danger of the precious flock being divided and the sheep scattered without a
shepherd. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I also saw that God had messengers that He would use in His cause, but they were not
ready. They were too light and trifling to exert a good influence over the flock and did
not feel the weight of the cause and the worth of souls as God's messengers must feel in
order to effect good. Said the angel, "Be ye clean that bear the vessels of the Lord.
Be ye clean that bear the vessels of the Lord." They can accomplish but little good
unless they are wholly given up to God and feel the importance and solemnity of the last
message of mercy that is now being given to the scattered flock. Some who are not called
of God are very willing to go with the message. But if they felt the weight of the cause
and the responsibilities of such a station, they would feel to shrink back and say with
the apostle, "Who is sufficient for these things?" One reason why they are so
willing to go is that God has not laid upon them the weight of the cause. Not all who
proclaimed the first and the second angel's message are to give the third, even after they
fully embrace it, for some have been in so many errors and delusions that they can but
just save their own souls, and if they undertake to guide others, they will be the means
of overthrowing them. But I saw that some who have formerly run deep into fanaticism would
be the first now to run before God sends them, before they are purified from their past
errors; having error mixed with the truth, they would feed the flock of God with it, and
if they were suffered to go on, the flock would become sickly, and distraction and death
would follow. I saw that they would have to be sifted and sifted, until they were freed
from all their errors, or they could never enter the kingdom. The messengers could not
have that confidence in the judgement and discernment of those who have been in errors and
fanaticism that they could have in those who have been in the truth and not in extravagant
errors. Many, also, are too apt to urge out into the field some who have but just
professed the present truth, who have much to learn and much to do before they can be
right in the sight of God themselves, much less point out the way to others. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the necessity of the messengers, especially, watching and checking all fanaticism
wherever they might see it rise. Satan is pressing in on every side, and unless we watch
for him, and have our eyes open to his devices and snares, and have on the whole armour of
God, the fiery darts of the wicked will hit us. There are many precious truths contained
in the Word of God, but it is "present truth" that the flock needs now. I have
seen the danger of the messengers running off from the important points of present truth,
to dwell upon subjects that are not calculated to unite the flock and sanctify the soul.
Satan will here take every possible advantage to injure the cause. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>But such subjects as the sanctuary, in connection with the 2300 days, the commandments
of God and the faith of Jesus, are perfectly calculated to explain the past Advent
movement and show what our present position is, establish the faith of the doubting, and
give certainty to the glorious future. These, I have frequently seen, were the principal
subjects on which the messengers should dwell. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If the chosen messengers of the Lord should wait for every obstacle to be moved out of
their way, many never would go to search for the scattered sheep. Satan will present many
objections in order to keep them from duty. But they will have to go out by faith,
trusting in Him who has called them to His work, and He will open the way before them, as
far as it will be for their good and His glory. Jesus, the great teacher and pattern, had
not where to lay His head. His life was one of toil, sorrow, and suffering; He then gave
Himself for us. Those who, in Christ's stead, beseech souls to be reconciled to God, and
who hope to reign with Christ in glory, must expect to be partakers of His sufferings
here. "They that sow in tears shall reap in joy. He that goeth forth and weepeth,
bearing precious seed, shall doubtless come again with rejoicing, bringing his sheaves
with him." Ps. 126:5, 6.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Mark of the Beast </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In a view given June 27, 1850, my accompanying angel said, "Time is almost
finished. Do you reflect the lovely image of Jesus as you should?" Then I was pointed
to the earth and saw that there would have to be a getting ready among those who have of
late embraced the third angel's message. Said the angel, "Get ready, get ready, get
ready. Ye will have to die a greater death to the world than ye have ever yet died."
I saw that there was a great work to do for them and but little time in which to do it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I saw that the seven last plagues were soon to be poured out upon those who have
no shelter; yet the world regarded them no more than they would so many drops of water
that were about to fall. I was then made capable of enduring the awful sight of the seven
last plagues, the wrath of God. I saw that His anger was dreadful and terrible, and if He
should stretch forth His hand, or lift it in anger, the inhabitants of the world would be
as though they had never been, or would suffer from incurable sores and withering plagues
that would come upon them, and they would find no deliverance, but be destroyed by them.
Terror seized me, and I fell upon my face before the angel and begged of him to cause the
sight to be removed, to hide it from me, for it was too dreadful. Then I realised, as
never before, the importance of searching the Word of God carefully, to know how to escape
the plagues which that Word declares shall come on all the ungodly who shall worship the
beast and his image and receive his mark in their foreheads or in their hands. It was a
great wonder for me that any could transgress the law of God and tread down His holy
Sabbath, when such awful threatenings and denunciations were against them. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The pope has changed the day of rest from the seventh to the first day. He has thought
to change the very commandment that was given to cause man to remember his Creator. He has
thought to change the greatest commandment in the decalogue and thus make himself equal
with God, or even exalt himself above God. The Lord is unchangeable, therefore His law is
immutable; but the pope has exalted himself above God, in seeking to change His immutable
precepts of holiness, justice, and goodness. He has trampled underfoot God's sanctified
day, and, on his own authority, put in its place one of the six labouring days. The whole
nation has followed after the beast, and every week they rob God of His holy time. The
pope has made a breach in the holy law of God, but I saw that the time had fully come for
this breach to be made up by the people of God and the waste places built up. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I pleaded before the angel for God to save His people who had gone astray, to save them
for His mercy's sake. When the plagues begin to fall, those who continue to break the holy
Sabbath will not open their mouths to plead those excuses that they now make to get rid of
keeping it. Their mouths will be closed while the plagues are falling, and the great
Lawgiver is requiring justice of those who have had His holy law in derision and have
called it "a curse to man," "miserable," and "rickety." When
such feel the iron grasp of this law taking hold of them, these expressions will appear
before them in living characters, and they will then realise the sin of having that law in
derision which the Word of God calls "holy, just, and good." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I was pointed to the glory of heaven, to the treasure laid up for the faithful.
Everything was lovely and glorious. The angels would sing a lovely song, then they would
cease singing and take their crowns from their heads and cast them glittering at the feet
of the lovely Jesus, and with melodious voices cry, "Glory, Alleluia!" I joined
with them in their songs of praise and honour to the Lamb, and every time I opened my
mouth to praise Him, I felt an unutterable sense of the glory that surrounded me. It was a
far more, an exceeding and eternal weight of glory. Said the angel, "The little
remnant who love God and keep His commandments and are faithful to the end will enjoy this
glory and ever be in the presence of Jesus and sing with the holy angels." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then my eyes were taken from the glory, and I was pointed to the remnant on the earth.
The angel said to them, "Will ye shun the seven last plagues? Will ye go to glory and
enjoy all that God has prepared for those who love Him and are willing to suffer for His
sake? If so, ye must die that ye may live. Get ready, get ready, get ready. Ye must have a
greater preparation than ye now have, for the day of the Lord cometh, cruel both with
wrath and fierce anger, to lay the land desolate and to destroy the sinners thereof out of
it. Sacrifice all to God. Lay all upon His altar--self, property, and all, a living
sacrifice. It will take all to enter glory. Lay up for yourselves treasure in heaven,
where no thief can approach or rust corrupt. Ye must be partakers of Christ's sufferings
here if ye would be partakers with Him of His glory hereafter." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Heaven will be cheap enough, if we obtain it through suffering. We must deny self all
along the way, die to self daily, let Jesus alone appear, and keep His glory continually
in vi </span></p>
<p><span>have embraced the truth would have to know what it is to suffer for Christ's sake, that
they would have trials to pass through that would be keen and cutting, in order that they
may be purified and fitted through suffering to receive the seal of the living God, pass
through the time of trouble, see the King in His beauty, and dwell in the presence of God
and of pure, holy angels. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As I saw what we must be in order to inherit glory, and then saw how much Jesus had
suffered to obtain for us so rich an inheritance, I prayed that we might be baptised into
Christ's sufferings, that we might not shrink at trials, but bear them with patience and
joy, knowing what Jesus had suffered that we through His poverty and sufferings might be
made rich. Said the angel, "Deny self; ye must step fast." Some of us have had
time to get the truth and to advance step by step, and every step we have taken has given
us strength to take the next. But now time is almost finished, and what we have been years
learning, they will have to learn in a few months. They will also have much to unlearn and
much to learn again. Those who would not receive the mark of the beast and his image when
the decree goes forth, must have decision now to say, Nay, we will not regard the
institution of the beast. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Blind Leading the Blind </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have seen how the blind guides were labouring to make souls as blind as themselves,
little realising what is coming upon them. They are exalting themselves against the truth,
and as it triumphs, many who have looked on these teachers as men of God and have looked
to them for light, are troubled. They inquire of these leaders relative to the Sabbath,
and they, with the object of getting rid of the fourth commandment, will answer them
thereto. I saw that real honesty was not regarded in taking the many positions that were
taken against the Sabbath. The main object is to get around the Sabbath of the Lord and
observe another day than that sanctified and hallowed by Jehovah. If they are driven from
one position, they take an opposite one, even a position that they had but just before
condemned as unsound. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God's people are coming into the unity of the faith. Those who observe the Sabbath of
the Bible are united in their views of Bible truth. But those who oppose the Sabbath among
the Advent people are disunited and strangely divided. One comes forward in opposition to
the Sabbath and declares it to be thus and so, and at the conclusion calls it settled. But
as his effort does not put the question to rest, and as the Sabbath cause progresses and
the children of the Lord still embrace it, another comes forward to overthrow it. But in
presenting his views to get around the Sabbath, he entirely tears down the arguments of
him who made the first effort against the truth, and presents a theory as opposite to his
as to ours. So with the third and the fourth; but none of them will have it as it stands
in the Word of God: "The seventh day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Such, I saw, have the carnal mind, therefore are not subject to the holy law of God.
They are not agreed among themselves, yet labour hard with their inferences to wrest the
Scriptures to make a breach in God's law, to change, abolish, or do anything with the
fourth commandment rather than to observe it. They wish to silence the flock upon this
question; therefore they get up something with the hope that it will quiet them and that
many of their followers will search their Bibles so little that their leaders can easily
make error appear like truth, and they receive it as such, not looking higher than their
leaders. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Preparation for the End </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At Oswego, New York, September 7, 1850, the Lord showed me that a great work must be
done for His people before they could stand in the battle in the day of the Lord. I was
pointed to those who claim to be Adventists, but who reject the present truth, and saw
that they were crumbling and that the hand of the Lord was in their midst to divide and
scatter them now in the gathering time, so that the precious jewels among them, who have
formerly been deceived, may have their eyes opened to see their true state. And now when
the truth is presented to them by the Lord's messengers, they are prepared to listen, and
see its beauty and harmony, and to leave their former associates and errors, embrace the
precious truth and stand where they can define their position. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that those who oppose the Sabbath of the Lord could not take the Bible and show
that our position is incorrect; therefore they would slander those who believe and teach
the truth and would attack their characters. Many who were once conscientious and loved
God and His Word have become so hardened by rejecting the light of truth that they do not
hesitate to wickedly misrepresent and falsely accuse those who love the holy Sabbath, if
by so doing they can injure the influence of those who fearlessly declare the truth. But
these things will not hinder the work of God. In fact, this course pursued by those who
hate the truth will be the very means of opening the eyes of some. Every jewel will be
brought out and gathered, for the hand of the Lord is set to recover the remnant of His
people, and He will accomplish the work gloriously. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We who believe the truth should be very careful to give no occasion for our good to be
evil spoken of. We should know that every step we take is in accordance with the Bible;
for those who hate the commandments of God will triumph over our missteps and faults, as
the wicked did in 1843. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>May 14, 1851, I saw the beauty and loveliness of Jesus. As I beheld His glory, the
thought did not occur to me that I should ever be separated from His presence. I saw a
light coming from the glory that encircled the Father, and as it approached near to me, my
body trembled and shook like a leaf. I thought that if it should come near me I would be
struck out of existence, but the light passed me. Then could I have some sense of the
great and terrible God with whom we have to do. I saw then what faint views some have of
the holiness of God, and how much they take His holy and reverend name in vain, without
realising that it is God, the great and terrible God, of whom they are speaking. While
praying, many use careless and irreverent expressions, which grieve the tender Spirit of
the Lord and cause their petitions to be shut out of heaven. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I also saw that many do not realise what they must be in order to live in the sight of
the Lord without a high priest in the sanctuary through the time of trouble. Those who
receive the seal of the living God and are protected in the time of trouble must reflect
the image of Jesus fully. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that many were neglecting the preparation so needful and were looking to the time
of "refreshing" and the "latter rain" to fit them to stand in the day
of the Lord and to live in His sight. Oh, how many I saw in the time of trouble without a
shelter! They had neglected the needful preparation; therefore they could not receive the
refreshing that all must have to fit them to live in the sight of a holy God. Those who
refuse to be hewed by the prophets and fail to purify their souls in obeying the whole
truth, and who are willing to believe that their condition is far better than it really
is, will come up to the time of the falling of the plagues, and then see that they needed
to be hewed and squared for the building. But there will be no time then to do it and no
Mediator to plead their cause before the Father. Before this time the awfully solemn
declaration has gone forth, "He that is unjust, let him be unjust still: and he which
is filthy, let him be filthy still: and he that is righteous, let him be righteous still:
and he that is holy, let him be holy still." I saw that none could share the
"refreshing" unless they obtain the victory over every besetment, over pride,
selfishness, love of the world, and over every wrong word and action. We should,
therefore, be drawing nearer and nearer to the Lord and be earnestly seeking that
preparation necessary to enable us to stand in the battle in the day of the Lord. Let all
remember that God is holy and that none but holy beings can ever dwell in His presence. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Prayer and Faith </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have frequently seen that the children of the Lord neglect prayer, especially secret
prayer, altogether too much; that many do not exercise that faith which it is their
privilege and duty to exercise, often waiting for that feeling which faith alone can
bring. Feeling is not faith; the two are distinct. Faith is ours to exercise, but joyful
feeling and the blessing are God's to give. The grace of God comes to the soul through the
channel of living faith, and that faith it is in our power to exercise. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>True faith lays hold of and claims the promised blessing before it is realised and
felt. We must send up our petitions in faith within the second veil and let our faith take
hold of the promised blessing and claim it as ours. We are then to believe that we receive
the blessing, because our faith has hold of it, and according to the Word it is ours.
"What things soever ye desire, when ye pray, believe that ye receive them, and ye
shall have them." Mark 11:24. Here is faith, naked faith, to believe that we receive
the blessing, even before we realise it. When the promised blessing is realised and
enjoyed, faith is swallowed up. But many suppose they have much faith when sharing largely
of the Holy Spirit and that they cannot have faith unless they feel the power of the
Spirit. Such confound faith with the blessing that comes through faith. The very time to
exercise faith is when we feel destitute of the Spirit. When thick clouds of darkness seem
to hover over the mind, then is the time to let living faith pierce the darkness and
scatter the clouds. True faith rests on the promises contained in the Word of God, and
those only who obey that Word can claim its glorious promises. "If ye abide in Me,
and My words abide in you, ye shall ask what ye will, and it shall be done unto you."
John 15:7. "Whatsoever we ask, we receive of Him, because we keep His commandments,
and do those things that are pleasing in His sight." 1 John 3:22. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We should be much in secret prayer. Christ is the vine, ye are the branches. And if we
would grow and flourish, we must continually draw sap and nourishment from the Living
Vine; for separated from the Vine we have no strength. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I asked the angel why there was no more faith and power in Israel. He said, "Ye
let go of the arm of the Lord too soon. Press your petitions to the throne, and hold on by
strong faith. The promises are sure. Believe ye receive the things ye ask for, and ye
shall have them." I was then pointed to Elijah. He was subject to like passions as we
are, and he prayed earnestly. His faith endured the trial. Seven times he prayed before
the Lord, and at last the cloud was seen. I saw that we had doubted the sure promises, and
wounded the Saviour by our lack of faith. Said the angel, "Gird the armour about
thee, and above all take the shield of faith; for that will guard the heart, the very
life, from the fiery darts of the wicked." If the enemy can lead the desponding to
take their eyes off from Jesus, and look to themselves, and dwell upon their own
unworthiness, instead of dwelling upon the worthiness of Jesus, His love, His merits, and
His great mercy, he will get away their shield of faith and gain his object; they will be
exposed to his fiery temptations. The weak should therefore look to Jesus, and believe in
Him; they then exercise faith.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Gathering Time </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>September 23, the Lord showed me that He had stretched out His hand the second time to
recover the remnant of His people, and that efforts must be redoubled in this gathering
time. In the scattering, Israel was smitten and torn, but now in the gathering time God
will heal and bind up His people. In the scattering, efforts made to spread the truth had
but little effect, accomplished but little or nothing; but in the gathering, when God has
set His hand to gather His people, efforts to spread the truth will have their designed
effect. All should be united and zealous in the work. I saw that it was wrong for any to
refer to the scattering for examples to govern us now in the gathering; for if God should
do no more for us now than He did then, Israel would never be gathered. I have seen that
the 1843 chart was directed by the hand of the Lord, and that it should not be altered;
that the figures were as He wanted them; that His hand was over and hid a mistake in some
of the figures, so that none could see it, until His hand was removed. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I saw in relation to the "daily" (Dan. 8:12) that the word
"sacrifice" was supplied by man's wisdom, and does not belong to the text, and
that the Lord gave the correct view of it to those who gave the judgement hour cry. When
union existed, before 1844, nearly all were united on the correct view of the
"daily"; but in the confusion since 1844, other views have been embraced, and
darkness and confusion have followed. Time has not been a test since 1844, and it will
never again be a test. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me that the message of the third angel must go, and be proclaimed to
the scattered children of the Lord, but it must not be hung on time. I saw that some were
getting a false excitement, arising from preaching time; but the third angels message is
stronger than time can be. I saw that this message can stand on its own foundation and
needs not time to strengthen it; and that it will go in mighty power, and do its work, and
will be cut short in righteousness. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I was pointed to some who are in the great error of believing that it is their
duty to go to Old Jerusalem, and think they have a work to do there before the Lord comes.
Such a view is calculated to take the mind and interest from the present work of the Lord,
under the message of the third angel; for those who think that they are yet to go to
Jerusalem will have their minds there, and their means will be withheld from the cause of
present truth to get themselves and others there. I saw that such a mission would
accomplish no real good, that it would take a long while to make a very few of the Jews
believe even in the first advent of Christ, much more to believe in His second advent. I
saw that Satan had greatly deceived some in this thing and that souls all around them in
this land could be helped by them and led to keep the commandments of God, but they were
leaving them to perish. I also saw that Old Jerusalem never would be built up; and that
Satan was doing his utmost to lead the minds of the children of the Lord into these things
now, in the gathering time, to keep them from throwing their whole interest into the
present work of the Lord, and to cause them to neglect the necessary preparation for the
day of the Lord. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Dear Reader </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>A sense of duty to my brethren and sisters and a desire that the blood of souls might
not be found on my garments have governed me in writing this little work. I am aware of
the unbelief that exists in the minds of the multitude relative to visions, also that many
who profess to be looking for Christ and teach that we are in the "last days"
call them all of Satan. I expect much opposition from such, and had I not felt that the
Lord required it of me, I should not have made my views thus public, as they will probably
call forth the hatred and derision of some. But I fear God more than man. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>When the Lord first gave me messages to deliver to His people, it was hard for me to
declare them, and I often softened them down and made them as mild as possible for fear of
grieving some. It was a great trial to declare the messages as the Lord gave them to me. I
did not realise that I was so unfaithful and did not see the sin and danger of such a
course until in vision I was taken into the presence of Jesus. He looked upon me with a
frown and turned His face from me. It is not possible to describe the terror and agony I
then felt. I fell upon my face before Him, but had no power to utter a word. Oh, how I
longed to be covered and hid from that dreadful frown! Then could I realise, in some
degree, what the feeling of the lost will be when they cry, "Mountains and rocks,
fall on us, and hide us from the face of Him that sitteth on the throne, and from the
wrath of the Lamb." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Presently an angel bade me rise, and the sight that met my eyes can hardly be
described. A company was presented before me whose hair and garments were torn and whose
countenances were the very picture of despair and horror. They came close to me and took
their garments and rubbed them on mine. I looked upon my garments and saw that they were
stained with blood, and that blood was eating holes in them. Again I fell like one dead at
the feet of my accompanying angel. I could not plead one excuse. My tongue refused all
utterance, and I longed to be away from such a holy place. Again the angel stood me upon
my feet and said, "This is not your case now, but this scene has passed before you to
let you know what your situation must be if you neglect to declare to others what the Lord
has revealed to you. But if you are faithful to the end, you shall eat of the tree of life
and shall drink of the river of the water of life. You will have to suffer much, but the
grace of God is sufficient." I then felt willing to do all that the Lord might
require me to do that I might have His approbation and not feel His dreadful frown. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I have frequently been falsely charged with teaching views peculiar to Spiritualism.
But before the editor of the Day-Star ran into that delusion, the Lord gave me a view of
the sad and desolating effects that would be produced upon the flock by him and others in
teaching the spiritual views. I have often seen the lovely Jesus, that He is a person . I
asked Him if His Father was a person and had a form like Himself. Said Jesus, "I am
in the express image of My Father's person." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I have often seen that the spiritual view took away all the glory of heaven, and that
in many minds the throne of David and the lovely person of Jesus have been burned up in
the fire of Spiritualism. I have seen that some who have been deceived and led into this
error will be brought out into the light of truth, but it will be almost impossible for
them to get entirely rid of the deceptive power of Spiritualism. Such should make thorough
work in confessing their errors and leaving them forever. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I recommend to you, dear reader, the Word of God as the rule of your faith and
practice. By that Word we are to be judged. God has, in that Word, promised to give
visions in the "last days"; not for a new rule of faith, but for the comfort of
His people, and to correct those who err from Bible truth. Thus God dealt with Peter when
He was about to send him to preach to the Gentiles. (Acts 10.)<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>To those who may circulate this little work, I would say that it is designed for the
sincere only and not for those who would ridicule the things of the Spirit of God. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Mrs. White's Dreams </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I dreamed of seeing a temple to which many people were flocking. Only those who took
refuge in that temple would be saved when time should close. All who remained outside
would be forever lost. The multitudes without, who were going their various ways, were
deriding and ridiculing those who were entering the temple, and told them that this plan
of safety was a cunning deception, that, in fact, there was no danger whatever to avoid.
They even laid hold of some to prevent them from hastening within the walls. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Fearing to be laughed at and ridiculed, I thought best to wait until the multitude were
dispersed, or until I could enter unobserved by them. But the numbers increased instead of
diminishing, and fearful of being too late, I hastily left my home and pressed through the
crowd. In my anxiety to reach the temple I did not notice or care for the throng that
surrounded me. On entering the building, I saw that the vast temple was supported by one
immense pillar, and to this was tied a Lamb all mangled and bleeding. We who were present
seemed to know that this Lamb had been torn and bruised on our account. All who entered
the temple must come before it and confess their sins. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Just before the Lamb were elevated seats upon which sat a company of people looking
very happy. The light of heaven seemed to shine upon their faces, and they praised God and
sang songs of glad thanksgiving that seemed to be like the music of angels. These were
they who had come before the Lamb, confessed their sins, been pardoned, and were now
waiting in glad expectation of some joyful event. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Even after having entered the building a fear came over me and a sense of shame that I
must humiliate myself before these people. But I seemed compelled to move forward, and was
slowly making my way around the pillar in order to face the Lamb, when a trumpet sounded,
the temple shook, shouts of triumph arose from the assembled saints, an awful brightness
illuminated the building, then all was intense darkness. The happy people had all
disappeared with the brightness, and I was left alone in the silent horror of night. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I awoke in agony of mind and could hardly convince myself that I had been dreaming. It
seemed to me that my doom was fixed, that the Spirit of the Lord had left me, never to
return. My despondency deepened, if that were possible. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Soon after this I had another dream. I seemed to be sitting in abject despair, with my
face in my hands, reflecting like this: If Jesus were upon earth, I would go to Him, throw
myself at His feet, and tell Him all my sufferings. He would not turn away from me, He
would have mercy upon me, and I should love and serve Him always. Just then the door
opened, and a person of beautiful form and countenance entered. He looked upon me
pityingly and said: "Do you wish to see Jesus? He is here and you can see Him if you
desire to do so. Take everything you possess and follow me." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I heard this with unspeakable joy, and gladly gathered up all my little possessions,
every treasured trinket, and followed my guide. He led me to a steep and apparently frail
stairway. As I commenced to ascend the steps, he cautioned me to keep my eyes fixed
upward, lest I should grow dizzy and fall. Many others who were climbing up the steep
ascent fell before gaining the top. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Finally we reached the last step and stood before the door. Here my guide directed me
to leave all the things that I had brought with me. I cheerfully laid them down; he then
opened the door and bade me enter. In a moment I stood before Jesus. There was no
mistaking that beautiful countenance. Such a radiant expression of benevolence and majesty
could belong to no other. As His gaze rested upon me, I knew at once that He was
acquainted with every circumstance of my life and all my inner thoughts and feelings. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I tried to shield myself from His gaze, feeling unable to endure His searching eyes,
but He drew near with a smile, and, laying His hand upon my head, said: "Fear
not." The sound of His sweet voice thrilled my heart with a happiness it had never
before experienced. I was too joyful to utter a word, but, overcome with ineffable
happiness, sank prostrate at His feet. While I was lying helpless there, scenes of beauty
and glory passed before me, and I seemed to have reached the safety and peace of heaven.
At length my strength returned, and I arose. The loving eyes of Jesus were still upon me,
and His smile filled my soul with gladness. His presence filled me with holy reverence and
an inexpressible love. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>My guide now opened the door, and we both passed out. He bade me take up again all the
things I had left without. This done, he handed me a green cord coiled up closely. This he
directed me to place next my heart, and when I wished to see Jesus, take from my bosom and
stretch it to the utmost. He cautioned me not to let it remain coiled for any length of
time, lest it should become knotted and difficult to straighten. I placed the cord near my
heart and joyfully descended the narrow stairs, praising the Lord and joyfully telling all
whom I met where they could find Jesus. This dream gave me hope. The green cord
represented faith to my mind, and the beauty and simplicity of trusting in God began to
dawn upon my benighted soul. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>William Miller's Dream </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I dreamed that God, by an unseen hand, sent me a curiously wrought casket about ten
inches long by six square, made of ebony and pearls curiously inlaid. To the casket there
was a key attached. I immediately took the key and opened the casket, when, to my wonder
and surprise, I found it filled with all sorts and sizes of jewels, diamonds, precious
stones, and gold and silver coin of every dimension and value, beautifully arranged in
their several places in the casket; and thus arranged they reflected a light and glory
equalled only to the sun. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I thought it was not my duty to enjoy this wonderful sight alone, although my heart was
overjoyed at the brilliancy, beauty, and value of its contents. I therefore placed it on a
centre table in my room and gave out word that all who had a desire might come and see the
most glorious and brilliant sight ever seen by man in this life. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The people began to come in, at first few in number, but increasing to a crowd. When
they first looked into the casket, they would wonder and shout for joy. But when the
spectators increased, everyone would begin to trouble the jewels, taking them out of the
casket and scattering them on the table. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I began to think that the owner would require the casket and the jewels again at my
hand; and if I suffered them to be scattered, I could never place them in their places in
the casket again as before; and felt I should never be able to meet the accountability,
for it would be immense. I then began to plead with the people not to handle them, nor to
take them out of the casket; but the more I pleaded, the more they scattered; and now they
seemed to scatter them all over the room, on the floor and on every piece of furniture in
the room. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then saw that among the genuine jewels and coin they had scattered an innumerable
quantity of spurious jewels and counterfeit coin. I was highly incensed at their base
conduct and ingratitude, and reproved and reproached them for it; but the more I reproved,
the more they scattered the spurious jewels and false coin among the genuine. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then became vexed in my physical soul and began to use physical force to push them
out of the room; but while I was pushing out one, three more would enter and bring in dirt
and shavings and sand and all manner of rubbish, until they covered every one of the true
jewels, diamonds, and coins, which were all excluded from sight. They also tore in pieces
my casket and scattered it among the rubbish. I thought no man regarded my sorrow or my
anger. I became wholly discouraged and disheartened, and sat down and wept. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>While I was thus weeping and mourning for my great loss and accountability, I
remembered God, and earnestly prayed that He would send me help. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Immediately the door opened, and a man entered the room, when the people all left it;
and he, having a dirt brush in his hand, opened the windows, and began to brush the dirt
and rubbish from the room. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I cried to him to forbear, for there were some precious jewels scattered among the
rubbish. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He told me to "fear not," for he would "take care of them". <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then, while he brushed the dirt and rubbish, false jewels and counterfeit coin, all
rose and went out of the window like a cloud, and the wind carried them away. In the
bustle I closed my eyes for a moment; when I opened them, the rubbish was all gone. The
precious jewels, the diamonds, the gold and silver coins, lay scattered in profusion all
over the room. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He then placed on the table a casket, much larger and more beautiful than the former,
and gathered up the jewels, the diamonds, the coins, by the handful, and cast them into
the casket, till not one was left, although some of the diamonds were not bigger than the
point of a pin. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He then called upon me to "come and see." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I looked into the casket, but my eyes were dazzled with the sight. They shone with ten
times their former glory. I thought they had been scoured in the sand by the feet of those
wicked persons who had scattered and trod them in the dust. They were arranged in
beautiful order in the casket, every one in its place, without any visible pains of the
man who cast them in. I shouted with very joy, and that shout awoke me. <br />
</span></p><span>By the request of dear friends I have consented to give a brief sketch of my experience
and views, with the hope that it will cheer and strengthen the humble, trusting children
of the Lord. </span>
<p><span>At the age of eleven years I was converted, and when twelve years old was baptised, and
joined the Methodist Church. At the age of thirteen I heard William Miller deliver his
second course of lectures in Portland, Maine. I then felt that I was not holy, not ready
to see Jesus. And when the invitation was given for church members and sinners to come
forward for prayers, I embraced the first opportunity, for I knew that I must have a great
work done for me to fit me for heaven. My soul was thirsting for full and free salvation,
but knew not how to obtain it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In 1842, I constantly attended the second advent meetings in Portland, Maine, and fully
believed that the Lord was coming. I was hungering and thirsting for full salvation, an
entire conformity to the will of God. Day and night I was struggling to obtain this
priceless treasure, that all the riches of earth could not purchase. As I was bowed before
God praying for this blessing, the duty to go and pray in a public prayer meeting was
presented before me. I had never prayed vocally in meeting, and drew back from the duty,
fearing that if I should attempt to pray I would be confounded. Every time I went before
the Lord in secret prayer this unfulfilled duty presented itself, until I ceased to pray,
and settled down in a melancholy state, and finally in deep despair.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In this state of mind I remained for three weeks, with not one ray of light to pierce
the thick clouds of darkness around me. I then had two dreams which gave me a faint ray of
light and hope. After that I opened my mind to my devoted mother. She told me that I was
not lost and advised me to go and see Brother Stockman, who then preached to the Advent
people in Portland. I had great confidence in him, for he was a devoted and beloved
servant of Christ. His words affected me and led me to hope. I returned home and again
went before the Lord, and promised that I would do and suffer anything if I could have the
smiles of Jesus. The same duty was presented. There was to be a prayer meeting that
evening, which I attended, and when others knelt to pray, I bowed with them trembling, and
after two or three had prayed, I opened my mouth in prayer before I was aware of it, and
the promises of God looked to me like so many precious pearls that were to be received by
only asking for them. As I prayed, the burden and agony of soul that I had so long felt
left me, and the blessing of God came upon me like the gentle dew. I gave glory to God for
what I felt, but I longed for more. I could not be satisfied till I was filled with the
fullness of God. Inexpressible love for Jesus filled my soul. Wave after wave of glory
rolled over me, until my body grew stiff. Everything was shut out from me but Jesus and
glory, and I knew nothing of what was passing around me. </span></p>
<p><span>I remained in this state of body and mind a long time, and when I realised what was
around me, everything seemed changed. Everything looked glorious and new, as if smiling
and praising God. I was then willing to confess Jesus everywhere. For six months not a
cloud of darkness passed over my mind. My soul was daily drinking rich draughts of
salvation. I thought that those who loved Jesus would love His coming, so went to the
class meeting and told them what Jesus had done for me and what a fullness I enjoyed
through believing that the Lord was coming. The class leader interrupted me, saying,
"Through Methodism"; but I could not give the glory to Methodism when it was
Christ and the hope of His soon coming that had made me free. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Most of my father's family were full believers in the advent, and for bearing testimony
to this glorious doctrine seven of us were at one time cast out of the Methodist Church.
At this time the words of the prophet were exceedingly precious to us: "Your brethren
that hated you, that cast you out for My name's sake, said, Let the Lord be glorified: but
He shall appear to your joy, and they shall be ashamed." Isa. 66:5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>From this time, up to December, 1844, my joys, trials, and disappointments were like
those of my dear Advent friends around me. At this time I visited one of our Advent
sisters, and in the morning we bowed around the family altar. It was not an exciting
occasion, and there were but five of us present, all women. While I was praying, the power
of God came upon me as I had never felt it before. I was wrapped in a vision of God's
glory, and seemed to be rising higher and higher from the earth, and was shown something
of the travels of the Advent people to the Holy City, as narrated below. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>My First Vision </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As God has shown me the travels of the Advent people to the Holy City and the rich
reward to be given those who wait the return of their Lord from the wedding, it may be my
duty to give you a short sketch of what God has revealed to me. The dear saints have many
trials to pass through. But our light afflictions, which are but for a moment, will work
for us a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory--while we look not at the things
which are seen, for the things which are seen are temporal, but the things which are not
seen are eternal. I have tried to bring back a good report and a few grapes from the
heavenly Canaan, for which many would stone me, as the congregation bade stone Caleb and
Joshua for their report. (Num. 14:10.) But I declare to you, my brethren and sisters in
the Lord, it is a goodly land, and we are well able to go up and possess it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>While I was praying at the family altar, the Holy Ghost fell upon me, and I seemed to
be rising higher and higher, far above the dark world. I turned to look for the Advent
people in the world, but could not find them, when a voice said to me, "Look again,
and look a little higher." At this I raised my eyes, and saw a straight and narrow
path, cast up high above the world. On this path the Advent people were travelling to the
city, which was at the farther end of the path. They had a bright light set up behind them
at the beginning of the path, which an angel told me was the midnight cry. This light
shone all along the path and gave light for their feet so that they might not stumble. If
they kept their eyes fixed on Jesus, who was just before them, leading them to the city,
they were safe. But soon some grew weary, and said the city was a great way off, and they
expected to have entered it before. Then Jesus would encourage them by raising His
glorious right arm, and from His arm came a light which waved over the Advent band, and
they shouted, "Alleluia!" Others rashly denied the light behind them and said
that it was not God that had led them out so far. The light behind them went out, leaving
their feet in perfect darkness, and they stumbled and lost sight of the mark and of Jesus,
and fell off the path down into the dark and wicked world below. Soon we heard the voice
of God like many waters, which gave us the day and hour of Jesus' coming. The living
saints, 144,000 in number, knew and understood the voice, while the wicked thought it was
thunder and an earthquake. When God spoke the time, He poured upon us the Holy Ghost, and
our faces began to light up and shine with the glory of God, as Moses' did when he came
down from Mount Sinai. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The 144,000 were all sealed and perfectly united. On their foreheads was written, God,
New Jerusalem, and a glorious star containing Jesus' new name. At our happy, holy state
the wicked were enraged, and would rush violently up to lay hands on us to thrust us into
prison, when we would stretch forth the hand in the name of the Lord, and they would fall
helpless to the ground. Then it was that the synagogue of Satan knew that God had loved us
who could wash one another's feet and salute the brethren with a holy kiss, and they
worshiped at our feet. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Soon our eyes were drawn to the east, for a small black cloud had appeared, about half
as large as a man's hand, which we all knew was the sign of the Son of man. We all in
solemn silence gazed on the cloud as it drew nearer and became lighter, glorious, and
still more glorious, till it was a great white cloud. The bottom appeared like fire; a
rainbow was over the cloud, while around it were ten thousand angels, singing a most
lovely song; and upon it sat the Son of man. His hair was white and curly and lay on His
shoulders; and upon His head were many crowns. His feet had the appearance of fire; in His
right hand was a sharp sickle; in His left, a silver trumpet. His eyes were as a flame of
fire, which searched His children through and through. Then all faces gathered paleness,
and those that God had rejected gathered blackness. Then we all cried out, "Who shall
be able to stand? Is my robe spotless?" Then the angels ceased to sing, and there was
some time of awful silence, when Jesus spoke: "Those who have clean hands and pure
hearts shall be able to stand; My grace is sufficient for you." At this our faces
lighted up, and joy filled every heart. And the angels struck a note higher and sang
again, while the cloud drew still nearer the earth. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then Jesus' silver trumpet sounded, as He descended on the cloud, wrapped in flames of
fire. He gazed on the graves of the sleeping saints, then raised His eyes and hands to
heaven, and cried, "Awake! awake! awake! ye that sleep in the dust, and arise."
Then there was a mighty earthquake. The graves opened, and the dead came up clothed with
immortality. The 144,000 shouted, "Alleluia!" as they recognised their friends
who had been torn from them by death, and in the same moment we were changed and caught up
together with them to meet the Lord in the air. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We all entered the cloud together, and were seven days ascending to the sea of glass,
when Jesus brought the crowns, and with His own right hand placed them on our heads. He
gave us harps of gold and palms of victory. Here on the sea of glass the 144,000 stood in
a perfect square. Some of them had very bright crowns, others not so bright. Some crowns
appeared heavy with stars, while others had but f </span></p>
<p><span>perfectly satisfied with their crowns. And they were all clothed with a glorious white
mantle from their shoulders to their feet. Angels were all about us as we marched over the
sea of glass to the gate of the city. Jesus raised His mighty, glorious arm, laid hold of
the pearly gate, swung it back on its glittering hinges, and said to us, "You have
washed your robes in My blood, stood stiffly for My truth, enter in." We all marched
in and felt that we had a perfect right in the city. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Here we saw the tree of life and the throne of God. Out of the throne came a pure river
of water, and on either side of the river was the tree of life. On one side of the river
was a trunk of a tree, and a trunk on the other side of the river, both of pure,
transparent gold. At first I thought I saw two trees. I looked again, and saw that they
were united at the top in one tree. So it was the tree of life on either side of the river
of life. Its branches bowed to the place where we stood, and the fruit was glorious; it
looked like gold mixed with silver. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We all went under the tree and sat down to look at the glory of the place, when
Brethren Fitch and Stockman, who had preached the gospel of the kingdom, and whom God had
laid in the grave to save them, came up to us and asked us what we had passed through
while they were sleeping. We tried to call up our greatest trials, but they looked so
small compared with the far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory that surrounded us
that we could not speak them out, and we all cried out, "Alleluia, heaven is cheap
enough!" and we touched our glorious harps and made heaven's arches ring. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>With Jesus at our head we all descended from the city down to this earth, on a great
and mighty mountain, which could not bear Jesus up, and it parted asunder, and there was a
mighty plain. Then we looked up and saw the great city, with twelve foundations, and
twelve gates, three on each side, and an angel at each gate. We all cried out, "The
city, the great city, it's coming, it's coming down from God out of heaven," and it
came and settled on the place where we stood. Then we began to look at the glorious things
outside of the city. There I saw most glorious houses, that had the appearance of silver,
supported by four pillars set with pearls most glorious to behold. These were to be
inhabited by the saints. In each was a golden shelf. I saw many of the saints go into the
houses, take off their glittering crowns and lay them on the shelf, then go out into the
field by the houses to do something with the earth; not as we have to do with the earth
here; no, no. A glorious light shone all about their heads, and they were continually
shouting and offering praises to God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw another field full of all kinds of flowers, and as I plucked them, I cried out,
"They will never fade." Next I saw a field of tall grass, most glorious to
behold; it was living green and had a reflection of silver and gold, as it waved proudly
to the glory of King Jesus. Then we entered a field full of all kinds of beasts--the lion,
the lamb, the leopard, and the wolf, all together in perfect union. We passed through the
midst of them, and they followed on peaceably after. Then we entered a wood, not like the
dark woods we have here; no, no; but light, and all over glorious; the branches of the
trees moved to and fro, and we all cried out, "We will dwell safely in the wilderness
and sleep in the woods." We passed through the woods, for we were on our way to Mount
Zion. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As we were travelling along, we met a company who also were gazing at the glories of
the place. I noticed red as a border on their garments; their crowns were brilliant; their
robes were pure white. As we greeted them, I asked Jesus who they were. He said they were
martyrs that had been slain for Him. With them was an innumerable company of little ones;
they also had a hem of red on their garments. Mount Zion was just before us, and on the
mount was a glorious temple, and about it were seven other mountains, on which grew roses
and lilies. And I saw the little ones climb, or, if they chose, use their little wings and
fly, to the top of the mountains and pluck the never-fading flowers. There were all kinds
of trees around the temple to beautify the place: the box, the pine, the fir, the oil, the
myrtle, the pomegranate, and the fig tree bowed down with the weight of its timely
figs--these made the place all over glorious. And as we were about to enter the holy
temple, Jesus raised His lovely voice and said, "Only the 144,000 enter this
place," and we shouted, "Alleluia." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>This temple was supported by seven pillars, all of transparent gold, set with pearls
most glorious. The wonderful things I there saw I cannot describe. Oh, that I could talk
in the language of Canaan, then could I tell a little of the glory of the better world. I
saw there tables of stone in which the names of the 144,000 were engraved in letters of
gold. After we beheld the glory of the temple, we went out, and Jesus left us and went to
the city. Soon we heard His lovely voice again, saying, "Come, My people, you have
come out of great tribulation, and done My will; suffered for Me; come in to supper, for I
will gird Myself, and serve you." We shouted, "Alleluia! glory!" and
entered into the city. And I saw a table of pure silver; it was many miles in length, yet
our eyes could extend over it. I saw the fruit of the tree of life, the manna, almonds,
figs, pomegranates, grapes, and many other kinds of fruit. I asked Jesus to let me eat of
the fruit. He said, "Not now. Those who eat of the fruit of this land go back to
earth no more. But in a little while, if faithful, you shall both eat of the fruit of the
tree of life and drink of the water of the fountain." And He said, "You must go
back to the earth again and relate to others what I have revealed to you." Then an
angel bore me gently down to this dark world. Sometimes I think I can stay here no longer;
all things of earth look so dreary. I feel very lonely here, for I have seen a better
land. Oh, that I had wings like a dove, then would I fly away and be at rest! - <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>After I came out of vision, everything looked changed; a gloom was spread over all that
I beheld. Oh, how dark this world looked to me. I wept when I found myself here, and felt
homesick. I had seen a better world, and it had spoiled this for me. I told the view to
our little band in Portland, who then fully believed it to be of God. That was a powerful
time. The solemnity of eternity rested upon us. About one week after this the Lord gave me
another view and showed me the trials I must pass through, and that I must go and relate
to others what He had revealed to me, and that I should meet with great opposition and
suffer anguish of spirit by going. But said the angel, "The grace of God is
sufficient for you; He will hold you up." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>After I came out of this vision, I was exceedingly troubled. My health was very poor,
and I was but seventeen years old. I knew that many had fallen through exaltation, and I
knew that if I in any way became exalted, God would leave me, and I should surely be lost.
I went to the Lord in prayer and begged Him to lay the burden on someone else. It seemed
to me that I could not bear it. I lay upon my face a long time, and all the light I could
get was, "Make known to others what I have revealed to you." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In my next vision I earnestly begged of the Lord that, if I must go and relate what He
had shown to me, He would keep me from exaltation. Then He showed me that my prayer was
answered, and if I should be in danger of exaltation His hand would be laid upon me, and I
would be afflicted with sickness. Said the angel, "If you deliver the messages
faithfully, and endure unto the end, you shall eat of the fruit of the tree of life and
drink of the water of the river of life." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Soon it was reported all around that the visions were the result of mesmerism, and many
Adventists were ready to believe and circulate the report. A physician who was a
celebrated mesmeriser told me that my views were mesmerism, that I was a very easy
subject, and that he could mesmerise me and give me a vision. I told him that the Lord had
shown me in vision that mesmerism was from the devil, from the bottomless pit, and that it
would soon go there, with those who continued to use it. I then gave him liberty to
mesmerise me if he could. He tried for more than half an hour, resorting to different
operations, and then gave it up. By faith in God I was able to resist his influence, so
that it did not affect me in the least. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If I had a vision in meeting, many would say that it was excitement and that someone
mesmerised me. Then I would go away alone in the woods, where no eye or ear but God's
could see or hear, and pray to Him, and He would sometimes give me a vision there. I then
rejoiced, and told them what God had revealed to me alone, where no mortal could influence
me. But I was told by some that I mesmerised myself. Oh, thought I, has it come to this
that those who honestly go to God alone to plead His promises and to claim His salvation,
are to be charged with being under the foul and soul-damning influence of mesmerism? Do we
ask our kind Father in heaven for "bread," only to receive a "stone"
or a "scorpion"? These things wounded my spirit, and wrung my soul in keen
anguish, well-nigh to despair, while many would have me believe that there was no Holy
Ghost and that all the exercises that holy men of God have experienced were only mesmerism
or the deceptions of Satan. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>At this time there was fanaticism in Maine. Some refrained wholly from labour and
disfellowshipped all those who would not receive their views on this point, and some other
things which they held to be religious duties. God revealed these errors to me in vision
and sent me to His erring children to declare them; but many of them wholly rejected the
message, and charged me with conforming to the world. On the other hand, the nominal
Adventists charged me with fanaticism, and I was falsely, and by some wickedly,
represented as being the leader of the fanaticism that I was actually labouring to
correct. Different times were repeatedly set for the Lord to come and were urged upon the
brethren; but the Lord showed me that they would all pass by, for the time of trouble must
come before the coming of Christ, and that every time that was set and passed by would
only weaken the faith of God's people. For this I was charged with being with the evil
servant that said in his heart, "My Lord delayeth His coming." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>All these things weighed heavily upon my spirits, and in the confusion I was sometimes
tempted to doubt my own experience. While at family prayers one morning, the power of God
began to rest upon me, and the thought rushed into my mind that it was mesmerism, and I
resisted it. Immediately I was struck dumb and for a few moments was lost to everything
around me. I then saw my sin in doubting the power of God, and that for so doing I was
struck dumb, and that my tongue would be loosed in less than twenty-four hours. A card was
held up before me, on which were written in letters of gold the chapter and verse of fifty
texts of Scripture. After I came out of vision, I beckoned for the slate, and wrote upon
it that I was dumb, also what I had seen, and that I wished the large Bible. I took the
Bible and readily turned to all the texts that I had seen upon the card. I was unable to
speak all day. Early the next morning my soul was filled with joy, and my tongue was
loosed to shout the high praises of God. After that I dared not doubt or for a moment
resist the power of God, however others might think of me. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In 1846, while at Fairhaven, Massachusetts, my sister (who usually accompanied me at
that time), Sister A., Brother G., and myself started in a sailboat to visit a family on
West's Island. It was almost night when we started. We had gone but a short distance when
a storm suddenly arose. It thundered and lightened, and the rain came in torrents upon us.
It seemed plain that we must be lost, unless God should deliver. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I knelt down in the boat and began to cry to God to deliver us. And there upon the
tossing billows, while the water washed over the top of the boat upon us, I was taken off
in vision and saw that sooner would every drop of water in the ocean be dried up than we
perish, for my work had but just begun. After I came out of the vision all my fears were
gone, and we sang and praised God, and our little boat was to us a floating Bethel. The
editor of The Advent Herald has said that my visions were known to be "the result of
mesmeric operations." But, I ask, what opportunity was there for mesmeric operations
in such a time as that? Brother G. had more than he could well do to manage the boat. He
tried to anchor, but the anchor dragged. Our little boat was tossed upon the waves and
driven by the wind, while it was so dark that we could not see from one end of the boat to
the other. Soon the anchor held, and Brother G. called for help. There were but two houses
on the island, and it proved that we were near one of them, but not the one where we
wished to go. All the family had retired to rest except a little child, who providentially
heard the call for help upon the water. Her father soon came to our relief, and, in a
small boat, took us to the shore. We spent the most of that night in thanksgiving and
praise to God for His wonderful goodness unto us. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Texts Referred to on Preceding Page </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>And, behold, thou shalt be dumb, and not able to speak, until the day that these things
shall be performed, because thou believest not My words, which shall be fulfilled in their
season. Luke 1:20. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>All things that the Father hath are Mine: therefore said I, that He shall take of Mine,
and shall show it unto you. John 16:15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And they were all filled with the Holy Ghost, and began to speak with other tongues, as
the Spirit gave them utterance. Acts 2:4. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And now, Lord, behold their threatenings: and grant unto Thy servants, that with all
boldness they may speak Thy word, by stretching forth Thine hand to heal; and that signs
and wonders may be done by the name of Thy holy child Jesus. And when they had prayed, the
place was shaken where they were assembled together; and they were all filled with the
Holy Ghost, and they spake the word of God with boldness. Acts 4:29-31. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Give not that which is holy unto the dogs, neither cast ye your pearls before swine,
lest they trample them under their feet, and turn again and rend you. Ask, and it shall be
given you; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you: for everyone
that asketh receiveth; and he that seeketh findeth; and to him that knocketh it shall be
opened. Or what man is there of you, whom if his son ask bread, will he give him a stone?
Or if he ask a fish, will he give him a serpent? If ye then, being evil, know how to give
good gifts unto your children, how much more shall your Father which is in heaven give
good things to them that ask Him? Therefore all things whatsoever ye would that men should
do to you, do ye even so to them: for this is the law and the prophets. Beware of false
prophets, which come to you in sheep's clothing, but inwardly they are ravening wolves.
Matt. 7:6-12, 15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For there shall arise false Christs, and false prophets, and shall show great signs and
wonders; insomuch that, if it were possible, they shall deceive the very elect. Matt.
24:24. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As ye have therefore received Christ Jesus the Lord, so walk ye in Him: rooted and
built up in Him, and stablished in the faith, as ye have been taught, abounding therein
with thanksgiving. Beware lest any man spoil you through philosophy and vain deceit, after
the tradition of men, after the rudiments of the world, and not after Christ. Col. 2:6-8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Cast not away therefore your confidence, which hath great recompense of reward. For ye
have need of patience, that, after ye have done the will of God, ye might receive the
promise. For yet a little while, and He that shall come will come, and will not tarry. Now
the just shall live by faith: but if any man draw back, My soul shall have no pleasure in
him. But we are not of them who draw back unto perdition; but of them that believe to the
saving of the soul. Heb. 10:35-39. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For he that is entered into his rest, he also hath ceased from his own works, as God
did from His. Let us labour therefore to enter into that rest, lest any man fall after the
same example of unbelief. For the Word of God is quick, and powerful, and sharper than any
two-edged sword, piercing even to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the
joints and marrow, and is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart. Heb.
4:10-12. 26 <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Being confident of this very thing, that He which hath begun a good work in you will
perform it until the day of Jesus Christ. . . . Only let your conversation be as it
becometh the gospel of Christ: that whether I come and see you, or else be absent, I may
hear of your affairs, that ye stand fast in one spirit, with one mind striving together
for the faith of the gospel; and in nothing terrified by your adversaries: which is to
them an evident token of perdition, but to you of salvation, and that of God. For unto you
it is given in the behalf of Christ, not only to believe on Him, but also to suffer for
His sake. Phil. 1:6, 27-29. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For it is God which worketh in you both to will and to do of His good pleasure. Do all
things without murmurings and disputings: that ye may be blameless and harmless, the sons
of God, without rebuke, in the midst of a crooked and perverse nation, among whom ye shine
as lights in the world. Phil. 2:13-15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Finally, my brethren, be strong in the Lord, and in the power of His might. Put on the
whole armour of God, that ye may be able to stand against the wiles of the devil. For we
wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against
the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places.
Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to withstand in the
evil day, and having done all, to stand. Stand therefore, having your loins girt about
with truth, and having on the breastplate of righteousness; and your feet shod with the
preparation of the gospel of peace; above all, taking the shield of faith, wherewith ye
shall be able to quench all the fiery darts of the wicked. And take the helmet of
salvation, and the sword of the Spirit, which is the Word of God. Praying always with all
prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance and
supplication for all saints. Eph. 6:10-18. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And be ye kind one to another, tender-hearted, forgiving one another, even as God for
Christ's sake hath forgiven you. Eph. 4:32.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Seeing ye have purified your souls in obeying the truth through the Spirit unto
unfeigned love of the brethren, see that ye love one another with a pure heart fervently.
1 Peter 1:22. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>A new commandment I give unto you, That ye love one another; as I have loved you, that
ye also love one another. By this shall all men know that ye are My disciples, if ye have
love one to another. John 13:34, 35. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Examine yourselves, whether ye be in the faith; prove your own selves. Know ye not your
own selves, how that Jesus Christ is in you, except ye be reprobates? 2 Cor. 13:5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>According to the grace of God which is given unto me, as a wise master builder, I have
laid the foundation, and another buildeth thereon. But let every man take heed how he
buildeth thereupon. For other foundation can no man lay than that is laid, which is Jesus
Christ. Now if any man build upon this foundation gold, silver, precious stones, wood,
hay, stubble; every man's work shall be made manifest: for the day shall declare it,
because it shall be revealed by fire; and the fire shall try every man's work of what sort
it is. 1 Cor. 3:10-13. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Take heed therefore unto yourselves, and to all the flock, over the which the Holy
Ghost hath made you overseers, to feed the church of God, which He hath purchased with His
own blood. For I know this, that after my departing shall grievous wolves enter in among
you, not sparing the flock. Also of your own selves shall men arise, speaking perverse
things, to draw away disciples after them. Acts 20:28-30. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I marvel that ye are so soon removed from Him that called you into the grace of Christ
unto another gospel: which is not another; but there be some that trouble you, and would
pervert the gospel of Christ. But though we, or an angel from heaven, preach any other
gospel unto you than that which we have preached unto you, let him be accursed. As we said
before, so say I now again, If any man preach any other gospel unto you than that ye have
received, let him be accursed. Gal. 1:6-9.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that
which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. And I
say unto you My friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no
more that they can do. But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear Him, which after
He hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear Him. Are not five
sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? But even the
very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than
many sparrows. Luke 12:3-7. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For it is written, He shall give His angels charge over thee, to keep thee: and in
their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone.
Luke 4:10, 11. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For God, who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, hath shined in our hearts,
to give the light of the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ. But we
have this treasure in earthen vessels, that the excellency of the power may be of God, and
not of us. We are troubled on every side, yet not distressed; we are perplexed, but not in
despair; persecuted, but not forsaken; cast down, but not destroyed. 2 Cor. 4:6-9. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For our light affliction, which is but for a moment, worketh for us a far more
exceeding and eternal weight of glory; while we look not at the things which are seen, but
at the things which are not seen: for the things which are seen are temporal; but the
things which are not seen are eternal. 2 Cor. 4:17, 18. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Who are kept by the power of God through faith unto salvation ready to be revealed in
the last time. Wherein ye greatly rejoice, though now for a season, if need be, ye are in
heaviness through manifold temptations: that the trial of your faith, being much more
precious than of gold that perisheth, though it be tried with fire, might be found unto
praise and honour and glory at the appearing of Jesus Christ. 1 Peter 1:5-7. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For now we live, if ye stand fast in the Lord. 1 Thess. 3:8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And these things shall follow them that believe: In My name shall they cast out devils;
they shall speak with new tongues; they shall take up serpents; and if they drink any
deadly thing, it shall not hurt them; they shall lay hands on the sick, and they shall
recover. Mark 16:17, 18. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>His parents answered them and said, We know that this is our son, and that he was born
blind: but by what means he now seeth, we know not; or who hath opened his eyes we know
not: he is of age; ask him: he shall speak for himself. These words spake his parents,
because they feared the Jews: for the Jews had agreed already, that if any man did confess
that He was Christ, he should be put out of the synagogue. Therefore said his parents, He
is of age; ask him. Then again called they the man that was blind, and said unto him, Give
God the praise: we know that this Man is a sinner. He answered and said, Whether He be a
sinner or no, I know not: one thing I know, that, whereas I was blind, now I see. Then
said they to him again, What did He to thee? how opened He thine eyes? He answered them, I
have told you already, and ye did not hear: wherefore would ye hear it again? Would ye
also be His disciples? John 9:20-27. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And whatsoever ye shall ask in My name, that will I do, that the Father may be
glorified in the Son. If ye shall ask anything in My name, I will do it. If ye love Me,
keep My commandments. John 14:13-15. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If ye abide in Me, and My words abide in you, ye shall ask what ye will, and it shall
be done unto you. Herein is My Father glorified, that ye bear much fruit; so shall ye be
My disciples. John 15:7, 8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And there was in their synagogue a man with an unclean spirit; and he cried out,
saying, Let us alone; what have we to do with Thee, Thou Jesus of Nazareth? art Thou come
to destroy us? I know Thee who Thou art, the Holy One of God. And Jesus rebuked him,
saying, Hold thy peace, and come out of him. Mark 1:23-25.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For I am persuaded, that neither death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor
powers, nor things present, nor things to come, nor height, nor depth, nor any other
creature, shall be able to separate us from the love of God, which is in Christ Jesus our
Lord. Rom. 8:38, 39. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And to the angel of the church in Philadelphia write: These things saith He that is
holy, He that is true, He that hath the key of David, He that openeth, and no man
shutteth; and shutteth, and no man openeth; I know thy works: behold, I have set before
thee an open door, and no man can shut it; for thou hast a little strength, and hast kept
My word, and hast not denied My name. Behold, I will make them of the synagogue of Satan,
which say they are Jews, and are not, but do lie; behold, I will make them to come and
worship before thy feet, and to know that I have loved thee. Because thou hast kept the
word of My patience, I also will keep thee from the hour of temptation, which shall come
upon all the world, to try them that dwell upon the earth. Behold, I come quickly: hold
that fast which thou hast, that no man take thy crown. Him that overcometh will I make a
pillar in the temple of My God, and he shall go no more out: and I will write upon him the
name of My God, and the name of the city of My God, which is New Jerusalem, which cometh
down out of heaven from My God: and I will write upon him My new name. He that hath an
ear, let him hear what the Spirit saith unto the churches. Rev. 3:7-13. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>These are they which were not defiled with women; for they are virgins. These are they
which follow the Lamb whithersoever He goeth. These were redeemed from among men, being
the first fruits unto God and to the Lamb. And in their mouth was found no guile: for they
are without fault before the throne of God. Rev. 14:4, 5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>For our conversation is in heaven; from whence also we look for the Saviour, the Lord
Jesus Christ. Phil. 3:20. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Be patient therefore, brethren, unto the coming of the Lord. Behold, the husbandman
waiteth for the precious fruit of the earth, and hath long patience for it, until he
receive the early and latter rain. Be ye also patient; stablish your hearts: for the
coming of the Lord draweth nigh. James 5:7, 8. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Who shall change our vile body, that it may be fashioned like unto His glorious body,
according to the working whereby He is able even to subdue all things unto Himself. Phil.
3:21. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I looked, and behold a white cloud, and upon the cloud one sat like unto the Son of
man, having on His head a golden crown, and in His hand a sharp sickle. And another angel
came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to Him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in
Thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for Thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth
is ripe. And He that sat on the cloud thrust in His sickle on the earth; and the earth was
reaped. And another angel came out of the temple which is in heaven, he also having a
sharp sickle. Rev. 14:14-17. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>There remaineth therefore a rest to the people of God. Heb. 4:9. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I John saw the holy city, New Jerusalem, coming down from God out of heaven,
prepared as a bride adorned for her husband. Rev. 21:2. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I looked, and lo, a Lamb stood on the Mount Sion, and with Him an hundred forty and
four thousand, having His Father's name written in their foreheads. Rev. 14:1. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And he showed me a pure river of water of life, clear as crystal, proceeding out of the
throne of God and of the Lamb. In the midst of the street of life, and on either side of
the river, was there the tree of life, which bare twelve manner of fruits, and yielded her
fruit every month: and the leaves of the tree were for the healing of the nations. And
there shall be no more curse: but the throne of God and of the Lamb shall be in it; and
His servants shall serve Him. And they shall see His face; and His name shall be in their
foreheads. And there shall be no night there; and they need no candle, neither light of
the sun; for the Lord giveth them light: and they shall reign forever and ever. Rev.
22:1-5. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Subsequent Visions </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord gave me the following view in 1847, while the brethren were assembled on the
Sabbath, at Topsham, Maine. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We felt an unusual spirit of prayer. And as we prayed the Holy Ghost fell upon us. We
were very happy. Soon I was lost to earthly things and was wrapped in a vision of God's
glory. I saw an angel flying swiftly to me. He quickly carried me from the earth to the
Holy City. In the city I saw a temple, which I entered. I passed through a door before I
came to the first veil. This veil was raised, and I passed into the holy place. Here I saw
the altar of incense, the candlestick with seven lamps, and the table on which was the
shewbread. After viewing the glory of the holy, Jesus raised the second veil and I passed
into the holy of holies. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In the holiest I saw an ark; on the top and sides of it was purest gold. On each end of
the ark was a lovely cherub, with its wings spread out over it. Their faces were turned
toward each other, and they looked downward. Between the angels was a golden censer. Above
the ark, where the angels stood, was an exceeding bright glory, that appeared like a
throne where God dwelt. Jesus stood by the ark, and as the saints' prayers came up to Him,
the incense in the censer would smoke, and He would offer up their prayers with the smoke
of the incense to His Father. In the ark was the golden pot of manna, Aaron's rod that
budded, and the tables of stone which folded together like a book. Jesus opened them, and
I saw the ten commandments written on them with the finger of God. On one table were four,
and on the other six. The four on the first table shone brighter than the other six. But
the fourth, the Sabbath commandment, shone above them all; for the Sabbath was set apart
to be kept in honour of God's holy name. The holy Sabbath looked glorious--a halo of glory
was all around it. I saw that the Sabbath commandment was not nailed to the cross. If it
was, the other nine commandments were; and we are at liberty to break them all, as well as
to break the fourth. I saw that God had not changed the Sabbath, for He never changes. But
the pope had changed it from the seventh to the first day of the week; for he was to
change times and laws. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>And I saw that if God had changed the Sabbath from the seventh to the first day, He
would have changed the writing of the Sabbath commandment, written on the tables of stone,
which are now in the ark in the most holy place of the temple in heaven; and it would read
thus: The first day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God. But I saw that it read the same as
when written on the tables of stone by the finger of God, and delivered to Moses on Sinai.
"But the seventh day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God." I saw that the holy
Sabbath is, and will be, the separating wall between the true Israel of God and
unbelievers; and that the Sabbath is the great question to unite the hearts of God's dear,
waiting saints. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that God had children who do not see and keep the Sabbath. They have not rejected
the light upon it. And at the commencement of the time of trouble, we were filled with the
Holy Ghost as we went forth and proclaimed the Sabbath more fully. This enraged the
churches and nominal Adventists, as they could not refute the Sabbath truth. And at this
time God's chosen all saw clearly that we had the truth, and they came out and endured the
persecution with us. I saw the sword, famine, pestilence, and great confusion in the land.
The wicked thought that we had brought the judgements upon them, and they rose up and took
counsel to rid the earth of us, thinking that then the evil would be stayed. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>In the time of trouble we all fled from the cities and villages, but were pursued by
the wicked, who entered the houses of the saints with a sword. They raised the sword to
kill us, but it broke, and fell as powerless as a straw. Then we all cried day and night
for deliverance, and the cry came up before God. The sun came up, and the moon stood
still. The streams ceased to flow. Dark, heavy clouds came up and clashed against each
other. But there was one clear place of settled glory, whence came the voice of God like
many waters, which shook the heavens and the earth. The sky opened and shut and was in
commotion. The mountains shook like a reed in the wind, and cast out ragged rocks all
around. The sea boiled like a pot and cast out stones upon the land. And as God spoke the
day and the hour of Jesus' coming and delivered the everlasting covenant to His people, He
spoke one sentence, and then paused, while the words were rolling through the earth. The
Israel of God stood with their eyes fixed upward, listening to the words as they came from
the mouth of Jehovah, and rolled through the earth like peals of loudest thunder. It was
awfully solemn. And at the end of every sentence the saints shouted, "Glory!
Alleluia!" Their countenances were lighted up with the glory of God; and they shone
with the glory, as did the face of Moses when he came down from Sinai. The wicked could
not look on them for the glory. And when the never-ending blessing was pronounced on those
who had honoured God in keeping His Sabbath holy, there was a mighty shout of victory over
the beast and over his image. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then commenced the jubilee, when the land should rest. I saw the pious slave rise in
triumph and victory and shake off the chains that bound him, while his wicked master was
in confusion and knew not what to do; for the wicked could not understand the words of the
voice of God. Soon appeared the great white cloud. It looked more lovely than ever before.
On it sat the Son of man. At first we did not see Jesus on the cloud, but as it drew near
the earth we could behold His lovely person. This cloud, when it first appeared, was the
sign of the Son of man in heaven. The voice of the Son of God called forth the sleeping
saints, clothed with glorious immortality. The living saints were changed in a moment and
were caught up with them into the cloudy chariot. It looked all over glorious as it rolled
upward. On either side of the chariot were wings, and beneath it wheels. And as the
chariot rolled upward, the wheels cried, "Holy," and the wings, as they moved,
cried, "Holy," and the retinue of holy angels around the cloud cried,
"Holy, holy, holy, Lord God Almighty!" And the saints in the cloud cried,
"Glory! Alleluia!" And the chariot rolled upward to the Holy City. Jesus threw
open the gates of the golden city and led us in. Here we were made welcome, for we had
kept the "commandments of God," and had a "right to the tree of life."<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Sealing </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At the commencement of the holy Sabbath, January 5, 1849, we engaged in prayer with
Brother Belden's family at Rocky Hill, Connecticut, and the Holy Ghost fell upon us. I was
taken off in vision to the most holy place, where I saw Jesus still interceding for
Israel. On the bottom of His garment was a bell and a pomegranate. Then I saw that Jesus
would not leave the most holy place until every case was decided either for salvation or
destruction, and that the wrath of God could not come until Jesus had finished His work in
the most holy place, laid off His priestly attire, and clothed Himself with the garments
of vengeance. Then Jesus will step out from between the Father and man, and God will keep
silence no longer, but pour out His wrath on those who have rejected His truth. I saw that
the anger of the nations, the wrath of God, and the time to judge the dead were separate
and distinct, one following the other, also that Michael had not stood up, and that the
time of trouble, such as never was, had not yet commenced. The nations are now getting
angry, but when our High Priest has finished His work in the sanctuary, He will stand up,
put on the garments of vengeance, and then the seven last plagues will be poured out. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the four angels would hold the four winds until Jesus' work was done in the
sanctuary, and then will come the seven last plagues. These plagues enraged the wicked
against the righteous; they thought that we had brought the judgements of God upon them,
and that if they could rid the earth of us, the plagues would then be stayed. A decree
went forth to slay the saints, which caused them to cry day and night for deliverance.
This was the time of Jacob's trouble. Then all the saints cried out with anguish of
spirit, and were delivered by the voice of God. The 144,000 triumphed. Their faces were
lighted up with the glory of God. Then I was shown a company who were howling in agony. On
their garments was written in large characters, "Thou art weighed in the balance, and
found wanting." I asked who this company were. The angel said, "These are they
who have once kept the Sabbath and have given it up." I heard them cry with a loud
voice, "We have believed in Thy coming, and taught it with energy." And while
they were speaking, their eyes would fall upon their garments and see the writing, and
then they would wail aloud. I saw that they had drunk of the deep waters, and fouled the
residue with their feet--trodden the Sabbath underfoot-- and that was why they were
weighed in the balance and found wanting. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then my attending angel directed me to the city again, where I saw four angels winging
their way to the gate of the city. They were just presenting the golden card to the angel
at the gate when I saw another angel flying swiftly from the direction of the most
excellent glory, and crying with a loud voice to the other angels, and waving something up
and down in his hand. I asked my attending angel for an explanation of what I saw. He told
me that I could see no more then, but he would shortly show me what those things that I
then saw meant. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Sabbath afternoon one of our number was sick, and requested prayers that he might be
healed. We all united in applying to the Physician who never lost a case, and while
healing power came down, and the sick was healed, the Spirit fell upon me, and I was taken
off in vision. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw four angels who had a work to do on the earth, and were on their way to
accomplish it. Jesus was clothed with priestly garments. He gazed in pity on the remnant,
then raised His hands, and with a voice of deep pity cried, "My blood, Father, My
blood, My blood, My blood!" Then I saw an exceeding bright light come from God, who
sat upon the great white throne, and was shed all about Jesus. Then I saw an angel with a
commission from Jesus, swiftly flying to the four angels who had a work to do on the
earth, and waving something up and down in his hand, and crying with a loud voice,
"Hold! Hold! Hold! Hold! until the servants of God are sealed in their
foreheads." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I asked my accompanying angel the meaning of what I heard, and what the four angels
were about to do. He said to me that it was God that restrained the powers, and that He
gave His angels charge over things on the earth; that the four angels had power from God
to hold the four winds, and that they were about to let them go; but while their hands
were loosening, and the four winds were about to blow, the merciful eye of Jesus gazed on
the remnant that were not sealed, and He raised His hands to the Father and pleaded with
Him that He had spilled His blood for them. Then another angel was commissioned to fly
swiftly to the four angels and bid them hold, until the servants of God were sealed with
the seal of the living God in their foreheads.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>God's Love for His People </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have seen the tender love that God has for His people, and it is very great. I saw
angels over the saints with their wings spread about them. Each saint had an attending
angel. If the saints wept through discouragement, or were in danger, the angels that ever
attended them would fly quickly upward to carry the tidings, and the angels in the city
would cease to sing. Then Jesus would commission another angel to descend to encourage,
watch over, and try to keep them from going out of the narrow path; but if they did not
take heed to the watchful care of these angels, and would not be comforted by them, but
continued to go astray, the angels would look sad and weep. They would bear the tidings
upward, and all the angels in the city would weep, and then with a loud voice say,
"Amen." But if the saints fixed their eyes upon the prize before them and
glorified God by praising Him, then the angels would bear the glad tidings to the city,
and the angels in the city would touch their golden harps and sing with a loud voice,
"Alleluia!" and the heavenly arches would ring with their lovely songs. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>There is perfect order and harmony in the Holy City. All the angels that are
commissioned to visit the earth hold a golden card, which they present to the angels at
the gates of the city as they pass in and out. Heaven is a good place. I long to be there
and behold my lovely Jesus, who gave His life for me, and be changed into His glorious
image. Oh, for language to express the glory of the bright world to come! I thirst for the
living streams that make glad the city of our God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has given me a view of other worlds. Wings were given me, and an angel
attended me from the city to a place that was bright and glorious. The grass of the place
was living green, and the birds there warbled a sweet song. The inhabitants of the place
were of all sizes; they were noble, majestic, and lovely. They bore the express image of
Jesus, and their countenances beamed with holy joy, expressive of the freedom and
happiness of the place. I asked one of them why they were so much more lovely than those
on the earth. The reply was, "We have lived in strict obedience to the commandments
of God, and have not fallen by disobedience, like those on the earth." Then I saw two
trees, one looked much like the tree of life in the city. The fruit of both looked
beautiful, but of one they could not eat. They had power to eat of both, but were
forbidden to eat of one. Then my attending angel said to me, "None in this place have
tasted of the forbidden tree; but if they should eat, they would fall." Then I was
taken to a world which had seven moons. There I saw good old Enoch, who had been
translated. On his right arm he bore a glorious palm, and on each leaf was written
"Victory." Around his head was a dazzling white wreath, and leaves on the
wreath, and in the middle of each leaf was written "Purity," and around the
wreath were stones of various colours, that shone brighter than the stars, and cast a
reflection upon the letters and magnified them. On the back part of his head was a bow
that confined the wreath, and upon the bow was written "Holiness." Above the
wreath was a lovely crown that shone brighter than the sun. I asked him if this was the
place he was taken to from the earth. He said, "It is not; the city is my home, and I
have come to visit this place." He moved about the place as if perfectly at home. I
begged of my attending angel to let me remain in that place. I could not bear the thought
of coming back to this dark world again. Then the angel said, "You must go back, and
if you are faithful, you, with the 144,000, shall have the privilege of visiting all the
worlds and viewing the handiwork of God." <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Shaking of the Powers of Heaven </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>December 16, 1848, the Lord gave me a view of the shaking of the powers of the heavens.
I saw that when the Lord said "heaven," in giving the signs recorded by Matthew,
Mark, and Luke, He meant heaven, and when He said "earth" He meant earth. The
powers of heaven are the sun, moon, and stars. They rule in the heavens. The powers of
earth are those that rule on the earth. The powers of heaven will be shaken at the voice
of God. Then the sun, moon, and stars will be moved out of their places. They will not
pass away, but be shaken by the voice of God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Dark, heavy clouds came up and clashed against each other. The atmosphere parted and
rolled back; then we could look up through the open space in Orion, whence came the voice
of God. The Holy City will come down through that open space. I saw that the powers of
earth are now being shaken and that events come in order. War, and rumours of war, sword,
famine, and pestilence are first to shake the powers of earth, then the voice of God will
shake the sun, moon, and stars, and this earth also. I saw that the shaking of the powers
in Europe is not, as some teach, the shaking of the powers of heaven, but it is the
shaking of the angry nations. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Open and the Shut Door </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Sabbath, March 24, 1849, we had a sweet and very interesting meeting with the brethren
at Topsham, Maine. The Holy Ghost was poured out upon us, and I was taken off in the
Spirit to the city of the living God. Then I was shown that the commandments of God and
the testimony of Jesus Christ relating to the shut door could not be separated, and that
the time for the commandments of God to shine out with all their importance, and for God's
people to be tried on the Sabbath truth, was when the door was opened in the most holy
place in the heavenly sanctuary, where the ark is, in which are contained the ten
commandments. This door was not opened until the mediation of Jesus was finished in the
holy place of the sanctuary in 1844. Then Jesus rose up and shut the door of the holy
place, and opened the door into the most holy, and passed within the second veil, where He
now stands by the ark, and where the faith of Israel now reaches. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that Jesus had shut the door of the holy place, and no man can open it; and that
He had opened the door into the most holy, and no man can shut it (Rev. 3:7,8); and that
since Jesus has opened the door into the most holy place, which contains the ark, the
commandments have been shining out to God's people, and they are being tested on the
Sabbath question. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the present test on the Sabbath could not come until the mediation of Jesus
in the holy place was finished and He had passed within the second veil; therefore
Christians who fell asleep before the door was opened into the most holy, when the
midnight cry was finished, at the seventh month, 1844, and who had not kept the true
Sabbath, now rest in hope; for they had not the light and the test on the Sabbath which we
now have since that door was opened. I saw that Satan was tempting some of God's people on
this point. Because so many good Christians have fallen asleep in the triumphs of faith
and have not kept the true Sabbath, they were doubting about its being a test for us now. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The enemies of the present truth have been trying to open the door of the holy place,
that Jesus has shut, and to close the door of the most holy place, which He opened in
1844, where the ark is, containing the two tables of stone on which are written the ten
commandments by the finger of Jehovah. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan is now using every device in this sealing time to keep the minds of God's people
from the present truth and to cause them to waver. I saw a covering that God was drawing
over His people to protect them in the time of trouble; and every soul that was decided on
the truth and was pure in heart was to be covered with the covering of the Almighty. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan knew this, and he was at work in mighty power to keep the minds of as many people
as he possibly could wavering and unsettled on the truth. I saw that the mysterious
knocking in New York and other places was the power of Satan, and that such things would
be more and more common, clothed in a religious garb so as to lull the deceived to greater
security and to draw the minds of God's people, if possible, to those things and cause
them to doubt the teachings and power of the Holy Ghost.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that Satan was working through agents in a number of ways. He was at work through
ministers who have rejected the truth and are given over to strong delusions to believe a
lie that they might be damned. While they were preaching or praying, some would fall
prostrate and helpless, not by the power of the Holy Ghost, but by the power of Satan
breathed upon these agents, and through them to the people. While preaching, praying, or
conversing, some professed Adventists who had rejected present truth used mesmerism to
gain adherents, and the people would rejoice in this influence, for they thought it was
the Holy Ghost. Some even that used it were so far in the darkness and deception of the
devil that they thought it was the power of God, given them to exercise. They had made God
altogether such a one as themselves and had valued His power as a thing of nought. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Some of these agents of Satan were affecting the bodies of some of the saints--those
whom they could not deceive and draw away from the truth by a Satanic influence. Oh, that
all could get a view of it as God revealed it to me, that they might know more of the
wiles of Satan and be on their guard! I saw that Satan was at work in these ways to
distract, deceive, and draw away God's people, just now in this sealing time. I saw some
who were not standing stiffly for present truth. Their knees were trembling, and their
feet sliding, because they were not firmly planted on the truth, and the covering of
Almighty God could not be drawn over them while they were thus trembling. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan was trying his every art to hold them where they were, until the sealing was
past, until the covering was drawn over God's people, and they left without a shelter from
the burning wrath of God, in the seven last plagues. God has begun to draw this covering
over His people, and it will soon be drawn over all who are to have a shelter in the day
of slaughter. God will work in power for His people; and Satan will be permitted to work
also. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the mysterious signs and wonders and false reformations would increase and
spread. The reformations that were shown me were not reformations from error to truth. My
accompanying angel bade me look for the travail of soul for sinners as used to be. I
looked, but could not see it; for the time for their salvation is past.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Trial of our Faith </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In this time of trial we need to be encouraged and comforted by one another. The
temptations of Satan are greater now than ever before, for he knows that his time is short
and that very soon every case will be decided, either for life or for death. It is no time
now to sink down beneath discouragement and trial; we must bear up under all our
afflictions and trust wholly in the Almighty God of Jacob. The Lord has shown me that His
grace is sufficient for all our trials; and although they are greater than ever before,
yet if we trust wholly in God, we can overcome every temptation and through His grace come
off victorious. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If we overcome our trials and get victory over the temptations of Satan, then we endure
the trial of our faith, which is more precious than gold, and are stronger and better
prepared to meet the next. But if we sink down and give way to the temptations of Satan,
we shall grow weaker and get no reward for the trial and shall not be so well prepared for
the next. In this way we shall grow weaker and weaker, until we are led captive by Satan
at his will. We must have on the whole armour of God and be ready at any moment for a
conflict with the powers of darkness. When temptations and trials rush in upon us, let us
go to God and agonise with Him in prayer. He will not turn us away empty, but will give us
grace and strength to overcome, and to break the power of the enemy. Oh, that all could
see these things in their true light and endure hardness as good soldiers of Jesus! Then
would Israel move forward, strong in God, and in the power of His might. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God has shown me that He gave His people a bitter cup to drink, to purify and cleanse
them. It is a bitter draught, and they can make it still more bitter by murmuring,
complaining, and repining. But those who receive it thus must have another draught, for
the first does not have its designed effect upon the heart. And if the second does not
effect the work, then they must have another, and another, until it does have its designed
effect, or they will be left filthy, impure in heart. I saw that this bitter cup can be
sweetened by patience, endurance, and prayer, and that it will have its designed effect
upon the hearts of those who thus receive it, and God will be honoured and glorified. It
is no small thing to be a Christian and to be owned and approved of God. The Lord has
shown me some who profess the present truth, whose lives do not correspond with their
profession. They have the standard of piety altogether too low, and they come far short of
Bible holiness. Some engage in vain and unbecoming conversation, and others give way to
the risings of self. We must not expect to please ourselves, live and act like the world,
have its pleasures, and enjoy the company of those who are of the world, and reign with
Christ in glory. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We must be partakers of Christ's sufferings here if we would share in His glory
hereafter. If we seek our own interest, how we can best please ourselves, instead of
seeking to please God and advance His precious, suffering cause, we shall dishonour God
and the holy cause we profess to love. We have but a little space of time left in which to
work for God. Nothing should be too dear to sacrifice for the salvation of the scattered
and torn flock of Jesus. Those who make a covenant with God by sacrifice now will soon be
gathered home to share a rich reward and possess the new kingdom forever and ever. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Oh, let us live wholly for the Lord and show by a well-ordered life and godly
conversation that we have been with Jesus and are His meek and lowly followers. We must
work while the day lasts, for when the dark night of trouble and anguish comes, it will be
too late to work for God. Jesus is in His holy temple and will now accept our sacrifices,
our prayers, and our confessions of faults and sins and will pardon all the transgressions
of Israel, that they may be blotted out before He leaves the sanctuary. When Jesus leaves
the sanctuary, then they who are holy and righteous will be holy and righteous still; for
all their sins will then be blotted out, and they will be sealed with the seal of the
living God. But those that are unjust and filthy will be unjust and filthy still; for then
there will be no Priest in the sanctuary to offer their sacrifices, their confessions, and
their prayers before the Father's throne. Therefore what is done to rescue souls from the
coming storm of wrath must be done before Jesus leaves the most holy place of the heavenly
sanctuary. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>To the Little Flock Dear Brethren</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord gave me a view, January 26, 1850, which I will relate. I saw that some of the
people of God are stupid and dormant and but half awake; they do not realise the time we
are now living in, and that the man with the "dirt brush" has entered, and that
some are in danger of being swept away. I begged of Jesus to save them, to spare them a
little longer, and let them see their awful danger, that they might get ready before it
should be forever too late. The angel said, "Destruction is coming like a mighty
whirlwind." I begged of the angel to pity and to save those who loved this world, who
were attached to their possessions and were not willing to cut loose from them and
sacrifice to speed the messengers on their way to feed the hungry sheep who were perishing
for want of spiritual food. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As I viewed poor souls dying for want of the present truth, and some who professed to
believe the truth were letting them die by withholding the necessary means to carry
forward the work of God, the sight was too painful, and I begged of the angel to remove it
from me. I saw that when the cause of God called for some of their property, like the
young man who came to Jesus (Matt. 19:16-22) they went away sorrowful, and that soon the
overflowing scourge would pass over and sweep their possessions all away, and then it
would be too late to sacrifice earthly goods, and lay up a treasure in heaven. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then saw the glorious Redeemer, beautiful and lovely; that He left the realms of
glory and came to this dark and lonely world to give His precious life and die, the just
for the unjust. He bore the cruel mocking and scourging, wore the plaited crown of thorns,
and sweat great drops of blood in the garden, while the burden of the sins of the whole
world was upon Him. The angel asked, "What for?" Oh, I saw and knew that it was
for us; for our sins He suffered all this, that by His precious blood He might redeem us
unto God! <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then again was held up before me those who were not willing to dispose of this world's
goods to save perishing souls by sending them the truth while Jesus stands before the
Father pleading His blood, His sufferings, and His death for them; and while God's
messengers are waiting, ready to carry them the saving truth that they might be sealed
with the seal of the living God. It is hard for some who profess to believe the present
truth to do even so little as to hand the messengers God's own money that He has lent them
to be stewards over. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The suffering Jesus, His love so deep as to lead Him to give His life for man, was
again held up before me; also the lives of those who professed to be His followers, who
had this world's goods, but considered it so great a thing to help the cause of salvation.
The angel said, "Can such enter heavens?" Another angel answered, "No,
never, never, never. Those who are not interested in the cause of God on earth can never
sing the song of redeeming love above." I saw that the quick work that God was doing
on the earth would soon be cut short in righteousness and that the messengers must speed
swiftly on their way to search out the scattered flock. An angel said, "Are all
messengers?" Another answered, "No, no; God's messengers have a message." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the cause of God had been hindered and dishonoured by some travelling who
had no message from God. Such will have to give an account to God for every dollar they
have used in travelling where it was not their duty to go, because that money might have
helped on the cause of God; and for the lack of the spiritual food that might have been
given them by God's called and chosen messengers, had they had the means, souls have
starved and died. I saw that those who have strength to labour with their hands and help
sustain the cause were as accountable for their strength as others were for their
property. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The mighty shaking has commenced and will go on, and all will be shaken out who are not
willing to take a bold and unyielding stand for the truth and to sacrifice for God and His
cause. The angel said, "Think ye that any will be compelled to sacrifice? No, no. It
must be a freewill offering. It will take all to buy the field." I cried to God to
spare His people, some of whom were fainting and dying. Then I saw that the judgements of
the Almighty were speedily coming, and I begged of the angel to speak in his language to
the people. Said he, "All the thunders and lightnings of Mount Sinai would not move
those who will not be moved by the plain truths of the Word of God, neither would an
angel's message awake them." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then beheld the beauty and loveliness of Jesus. His robe was whiter than the whitest
white. No language can describe His glory and exalted loveliness. All, all who keep the
commandments of God, will enter in through the gates into the city and have right to the
tree of life and ever be in the presence of the lovely Jesus, whose countenance shines
brighter than the sun at noonday. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I was pointed to Adam and Eve in Eden. They partook of the forbidden tree and were
driven from the garden, and then the flaming sword was placed around the tree of life,
lest they should partake of its fruit and be immortal sinners. The tree of life was to
perpetuate immortality. I heard an angel ask, "Who of the family of Adam have passed
the flaming sword and have partaken of the tree of life?" I heard another angel
answer, "Not one of Adam's family has passed that flaming sword and partaken of that
tree; therefore there is not an immortal sinner. The soul that sinneth it shall die an
everlasting death--a death that will last forever, from which there will be no hope of a
resurrection; and then the wrath of God will be appeased. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>"The saints will rest in the Holy City and reign as kings and priests one thousand
years; then Jesus will descend with the saints upon the Mount of Olives, and the mount
will part asunder and become a mighty plain for the Paradise of God to rest upon. The rest
of the earth will not be cleansed until the end of the one thousand years, when the wicked
dead are raised, and gather up around the city. The feet of the wicked will never
desecrate the earth made n </span></p>
<p><span>them--burn them up root and branch. Satan is the root, and his children are the
branches. The same fire that will devour the wicked will purify the earth." - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Last Plagues and the Judgement </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At the general conference of believers in the present truth, held at Sutton, Vermont,
September, 1850, I was shown that the seven last plagues will be poured out after Jesus
leaves the sanctuary. Said the angel, "It is the wrath of God and the Lamb that
causes the destruction or death of the wicked. At the voice of God the saints will be
mighty and terrible as an army with banners, but they will not then execute the judgement
written. The execution of the judgement will be at the close of the one thousand
years." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>After the saints are changed to immortality and caught up together with Jesus, after
they receive their harps, their robes, and their crowns, and enter the city, Jesus and the
saints sit in judgement. The books are opened--the book of life and the book of death. The
book of life contains the good deeds of the saints; and the book of death contains the
evil deeds of the wicked. These books are compared with the statute book, the Bible, and
according to that men are judged. The saints, in unison with Jesus, pass their judgement
upon the wicked dead. "Behold ye," said the angel, "the saints, in unison
with Jesus, sit in judgement, and mete out to the wicked according to the deeds done in
the body, and that which they must receive at the execution of the judgement is set off
against their names." This, I saw, was the work of the saints with Jesus through the
one thousand years in the Holy City before it descends to the earth. Then at the close of
the one thousand years, Jesus, with the angels and all the saints, leaves the Holy City,
and while He is descending to the earth with them, the wicked dead are raised, and then
the very men that "pierced Him," being raised, will see Him afar off in all His
glory, the angels and saints with Him, and will wail because of Him. They will see the
prints of the nails in His hands and in His feet, and where they thrust the spear into His
side. The prints of the nails and the spear will then be His glory. It is at the close of
the one thousand years that Jesus stands upon the Mount of Olives, and the mount parts
asunder and becomes a mighty plain. Those who flee at that time are the wicked, who have
just been raised. Then the Holy City comes down and settles on the plain. Satan then
imbues the wicked with his spirit. He flatters them that the army in the city is small,
and that his army is large, and that they can overcome the saints and take the city. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>While Satan was rallying his army, the saints were in the city, beholding the beauty
and glory of the Paradise of God. Jesus was at their head, leading them. All at once the
lovely Saviour was gone from our company; but soon we heard His lovely voice, saying,
"Come, ye blessed of My Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the
foundation of the world." We gathered about Jesus, and just as He closed the gates of
the city, the curse was pronounced upon the wicked. The gates were shut. Then the saints
used their wings and mounted to the top of the wall of the city. Jesus was also with them;
His crown looked brilliant and glorious. It was a crown within a crown, seven in number.
The crowns of the saints were of the most pure gold, decked with stars. Their faces shone
with glory, for they were in the express image of Jesus; and as they arose and moved all
together to the top of the city, I was enraptured with the sight. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then the wicked saw what they had lost; and fire was breathed from God upon them and
consumed them. This was the execution of the judgement. The wicked then received according
as the saints, in unison with Jesus, had meted out to them during the one thousand years.
The same fire from God that consumed the wicked purified the whole earth. The broken,
ragged mountains melted with fervent heat, the atmosphere also, and all the stubble was
consumed. Then our inheritance opened before us, glorious and beautiful, and we inherited
the whole earth made new. </span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>End of the 2300 Days </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I saw a throne, and on it sat the Father and the Son. I gazed on Jesus' countenance and
admired His lovely person. The Father's person I could not behold, for a cloud of glorious
light covered Him. I asked Jesus if His Father had a form like Himself. He said He had,
but I could not behold it, for said He, "If you should once behold the glory of His
person, you would cease to exist." Before the throne I saw the Advent people--the
church and the world. I saw two companies, one bowed down before the throne, deeply
interested, while the other stood uninterested and careless. Those who were bowed before
the throne would offer up their prayers and look to Jesus; then He would look to His
Father, and appear to be pleading with Him. A light would come from the Father to the Son
and from the Son to the praying company. Then I saw an exceeding bright light come from
the Father to the Son, and from the Son it waved over the people before the throne. But
few would receive this great light. Many came out from under it and immediately resisted
it; others were careless and did not cherish the light, and it moved off from them. Some
cherished it, and went and bowed down with the little praying company. This company all
received the light and rejoiced in it, and their countenances shone with its glory. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the Father rise from the throne, and in a flaming chariot go into the holy of
holies within the veil, and sit down. Then Jesus rose up from the throne, and the most of
those who were bowed down arose with Him. I did not see one ray of light pass from Jesus
to the careless multitude after He arose, and they were left in perfect darkness. Those
who arose when Jesus did, kept their eyes fixed on Him as He left the throne and led them
out a little way. Then He raised His right arm, and we heard His lovely voice saying,
"Wait here; I am going to My Father to receive the kingdom; keep your garments
spotless, and in a little while I will return from the wedding and receive you to
Myself." Then a cloudy chariot, with wheels like flaming fire, surrounded by angels,
came to where Jesus was. He stepped into the chariot and was borne to the holiest, where
the Father sat. There I beheld Jesus, a great High Priest, standing before the Father. On
the hem of His garment was a bell and a pomegranate, a bell and a pomegranate. Those who
rose up with Jesus would send up their faith to Him in the holiest, and pray, "My
Father, give us Thy Spirit." Then Jesus would breathe upon them the Holy Ghost. In
that breath was light, power, and much love, joy, and peace. 56 <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I turned to look at the company who were still bowed before the throne; they did not
know that Jesus had left it. Satan appeared to be by the throne, trying to carry on the
work of God. I saw them look up to the throne, and pray, "Father, give us Thy
Spirit." Satan would then breathe upon them an unholy influence; in it there was
light and much power, but no sweet love, joy, and peace. Satan's object was to keep them
deceived and to draw back and deceive God's children. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Duty in View of the Time of Trouble </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me repeatedly that it is contrary to the Bible to make any provision
for our temporal wants in the time of trouble. I saw that if the saints had food laid up
by them or in the field in the time of trouble, when sword, famine, and pestilence are in
the land, it would be taken from them by violent hands and strangers would reap their
fields. Then will be the time for us to trust wholly in God, and He will sustain us. I saw
that our bread and water will be sure at that time, and that we shall not lack or suffer
hunger; for God is able to spread a table for us in the wilderness. If necessary He would
send ravens to feed us, as He did to feed Elijah, or rain manna from heaven, as He did for
the Israelites. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Houses and lands will be of no use to the saints in the time of trouble, for they will
then have to flee before infuriated mobs, and at that time their possessions cannot be
disposed of to advance the cause of present truth. I was shown that it is the will of God
that the saints should cut loose from every encumbrance before the time of trouble comes,
and make a covenant with God through sacrifice. If they have their property on the altar
and earnestly inquire of God for duty, He will teach them when to dispose of these things.
Then they will be free in the time of trouble and have no clogs to weigh them down. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that if any held on to their property and did not inquire of the Lord as to their
duty, He would not make duty known, and they would be permitted to keep their property,
and in the time of trouble it would come up before them like a mountain to crush them, and
they would try to dispose of it, but would not be able. I heard some mourn like this:
"The cause was languishing, God's people were starving for the truth, and we made no
effort to supply the lack; now our property is useless. Oh, that we had let it go, and
laid up treasure in heaven!" I saw that a sacrifice did not increase, but it
decreased and was consumed. I also saw that God had not required all of His people to
dispose of their property at the same time; but if they desired to be taught, He would
teach them, in a time of need, when to sell and how much to sell. Some have been required
to dispose of their property in times past to sustain the Advent cause, while others have
been permitted to keep theirs until a time of need. Then, as the cause needs it, their
duty is to sell. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the message, "Sell that ye have, and give alms," has not been
given, by some, in its clear light, and the object of the words of our Saviour has not
been clearly presented. The object of selling is not to give to those who are able to
labour and support themselves, but to spread the truth. It is a sin to support and indulge
in idleness those who are able to labour. Some have been zealous to attend all the
meetings, not to glorify God, but for the "loaves and fishes." Such would much
better have been at home labouring with their hands, "the thing that is good,"
to supply the wants of their families and to have something to give to sustain the
precious cause of present truth. Now is the time to lay up treasure in heaven and to set
our hearts in order, ready for the time of trouble. Those only who have clean hands and
pure hearts will stand in that trying time. Now is the time for the law of God to be in
our minds, foreheads, and written in our hearts. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me the danger of letting our minds be filled with worldly thoughts
and cares. I saw that some minds are led away from present truth and a love of the Holy
Bible by reading other exciting books; others are filled with perplexity and care for what
they shall eat, drink, and wear. Some are looking too far off for the coming of the Lord.
Time has continued a few years longer than they expected; therefore they think it may
continue a few years more, and in this way their minds are being led from present truth,
out after the world. In these things I saw great danger; for if the mind is filled with
other things, present truth is shut out, and there is no place in our foreheads for the
seal of the living God. I saw that the time for Jesus to be in the most holy place was
nearly finished and that time can last but a very little longer. What leisure time we have
should be spent in searching the Bible, which is to judge us in the last day. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>My dear brethren and sisters, let the commandments of God and the testimony of Jesus
Christ be in your minds continually and let them crowd out worldly thoughts and cares.
When you lie down and when you rise up, let them be your meditation. Live and act wholly
in reference to the coming of the Son of man. The sealing time is very short, and will
soon be over. Now is the time, while the four angels are holding the four winds, to make
our calling and election sure. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>"Mysterious Rapping" </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>August 24, 1850, I saw that the "mysterious rapping" was the power of Satan;
some of it was directly from him, and some indirectly, through his agents, but it all
proceeded from Satan. It was his work that he accomplished in different ways; yet many in
the churches and the world were so enveloped in gross darkness that they thought and held
forth that it was the power of God. Said the angel, "Should not a people seek unto
their God? for the living to the dead?" Should the living go to the dead for
knowledge? The dead know not anything. For the living God do ye go to the dead? They have
departed from the living God to converse with the dead who know not anything. (See Isa.
8:19, 20.) <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that soon it would be considered blasphemy to speak against the rapping, and that
it would spread more and more, that Satan's power would increase and some of his devoted
followers would have power to work miracles and even to bring down fire from heaven in the
sight of men. I was shown that by the rapping and mesmerism these modern magicians would
yet account for all the miracles wrought by our Lord Jesus Christ, and that many would
believe that all the mighty works of the Son of God when on earth were accomplished by
this same power. I was pointed back to the time of Moses and saw the signs and wonders
which God wrought through him before Pharaoh, most of which were imitated by the magicians
of Egypt; and that just before the final deliverance of the saints, God would work
powerfully for His people, and these modern magicians would be permitted to imitate the
work of God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>That time will soon come, and we shall have to keep hold of the strong arm of Jehovah;
for all these great signs and mighty wonders of the devil are designed to deceive God's
people and overthrow them. Our minds must be stayed upon God, and we must not fear the
fear of the wicked, that is, fear what they fear, and reverence what they reverence, but
be bold and valiant for the truth. Could our eyes be opened, we should see forms of evil
angels around us, trying to invent some new way to annoy and destroy us. And we should
also see angels of God guarding us from their power; for God's watchful eye is ever over
Israel for good, and He will protect and save His people, if they put their trust in Him.
When the enemy shall come in like a flood, the Spirit of the Lord will lift up a standard
against him. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Said the angel, "Remember, thou art on the enchanted ground." I saw that we
must watch and have on the whole armour and take the shield of faith, and then we shall be
able to stand, and the fiery darts of the wicked cannot harm us.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Messengers </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has often given me a view of the situation and wants of the scattered jewels
who have not yet come to the light of the present truth, and has shown that the messengers
should speed their way to them as fast as possible, to give them the light. Many all
around us only need to have their prejudices removed and the evidences of our present
position spread out before them from the Word, and they will joyfully receive the present
truth. The messengers should watch for souls as they that must give account. Theirs must
be a life of toil and anguish of spirit, while the weight of the precious but
often-wounded cause of Christ rests upon them. They will have to lay aside worldly
interests and comforts and make it their first object to do all in their power to advance
the cause of present truth and save perishing souls. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>They will also have a rich reward. In their crowns of rejoicing those who are rescued
by them and finally saved will shine as stars forever and ever. And to all eternity they
will enjoy the satisfaction of having done what they could in presenting the truth in its
purity and beauty, so that souls fell in love with it, were sanctified through it, and
availed themselves of the inestimable privilege of being made rich, and being washed in
the blood of the Lamb and redeemed unto God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the shepherds should consult those in whom they have reason to have
confidence, those who have been in all the messages, and are firm in all the present
truth, before they advocate new points of importance, which they may think the Bible
sustains. Then the shepherds will be perfectly united and the union of the shepherds will
be felt by the church. Such a course I saw would prevent unhappy divisions, and then there
would be no danger of the precious flock being divided and the sheep scattered without a
shepherd. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I also saw that God had messengers that He would use in His cause, but they were not
ready. They were too light and trifling to exert a good influence over the flock and did
not feel the weight of the cause and the worth of souls as God's messengers must feel in
order to effect good. Said the angel, "Be ye clean that bear the vessels of the Lord.
Be ye clean that bear the vessels of the Lord." They can accomplish but little good
unless they are wholly given up to God and feel the importance and solemnity of the last
message of mercy that is now being given to the scattered flock. Some who are not called
of God are very willing to go with the message. But if they felt the weight of the cause
and the responsibilities of such a station, they would feel to shrink back and say with
the apostle, "Who is sufficient for these things?" One reason why they are so
willing to go is that God has not laid upon them the weight of the cause. Not all who
proclaimed the first and the second angel's message are to give the third, even after they
fully embrace it, for some have been in so many errors and delusions that they can but
just save their own souls, and if they undertake to guide others, they will be the means
of overthrowing them. But I saw that some who have formerly run deep into fanaticism would
be the first now to run before God sends them, before they are purified from their past
errors; having error mixed with the truth, they would feed the flock of God with it, and
if they were suffered to go on, the flock would become sickly, and distraction and death
would follow. I saw that they would have to be sifted and sifted, until they were freed
from all their errors, or they could never enter the kingdom. The messengers could not
have that confidence in the judgement and discernment of those who have been in errors and
fanaticism that they could have in those who have been in the truth and not in extravagant
errors. Many, also, are too apt to urge out into the field some who have but just
professed the present truth, who have much to learn and much to do before they can be
right in the sight of God themselves, much less point out the way to others. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the necessity of the messengers, especially, watching and checking all fanaticism
wherever they might see it rise. Satan is pressing in on every side, and unless we watch
for him, and have our eyes open to his devices and snares, and have on the whole armour of
God, the fiery darts of the wicked will hit us. There are many precious truths contained
in the Word of God, but it is "present truth" that the flock needs now. I have
seen the danger of the messengers running off from the important points of present truth,
to dwell upon subjects that are not calculated to unite the flock and sanctify the soul.
Satan will here take every possible advantage to injure the cause. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>But such subjects as the sanctuary, in connection with the 2300 days, the commandments
of God and the faith of Jesus, are perfectly calculated to explain the past Advent
movement and show what our present position is, establish the faith of the doubting, and
give certainty to the glorious future. These, I have frequently seen, were the principal
subjects on which the messengers should dwell. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If the chosen messengers of the Lord should wait for every obstacle to be moved out of
their way, many never would go to search for the scattered sheep. Satan will present many
objections in order to keep them from duty. But they will have to go out by faith,
trusting in Him who has called them to His work, and He will open the way before them, as
far as it will be for their good and His glory. Jesus, the great teacher and pattern, had
not where to lay His head. His life was one of toil, sorrow, and suffering; He then gave
Himself for us. Those who, in Christ's stead, beseech souls to be reconciled to God, and
who hope to reign with Christ in glory, must expect to be partakers of His sufferings
here. "They that sow in tears shall reap in joy. He that goeth forth and weepeth,
bearing precious seed, shall doubtless come again with rejoicing, bringing his sheaves
with him." Ps. 126:5, 6.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Mark of the Beast </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>In a view given June 27, 1850, my accompanying angel said, "Time is almost
finished. Do you reflect the lovely image of Jesus as you should?" Then I was pointed
to the earth and saw that there would have to be a getting ready among those who have of
late embraced the third angel's message. Said the angel, "Get ready, get ready, get
ready. Ye will have to die a greater death to the world than ye have ever yet died."
I saw that there was a great work to do for them and but little time in which to do it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I saw that the seven last plagues were soon to be poured out upon those who have
no shelter; yet the world regarded them no more than they would so many drops of water
that were about to fall. I was then made capable of enduring the awful sight of the seven
last plagues, the wrath of God. I saw that His anger was dreadful and terrible, and if He
should stretch forth His hand, or lift it in anger, the inhabitants of the world would be
as though they had never been, or would suffer from incurable sores and withering plagues
that would come upon them, and they would find no deliverance, but be destroyed by them.
Terror seized me, and I fell upon my face before the angel and begged of him to cause the
sight to be removed, to hide it from me, for it was too dreadful. Then I realised, as
never before, the importance of searching the Word of God carefully, to know how to escape
the plagues which that Word declares shall come on all the ungodly who shall worship the
beast and his image and receive his mark in their foreheads or in their hands. It was a
great wonder for me that any could transgress the law of God and tread down His holy
Sabbath, when such awful threatenings and denunciations were against them. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The pope has changed the day of rest from the seventh to the first day. He has thought
to change the very commandment that was given to cause man to remember his Creator. He has
thought to change the greatest commandment in the decalogue and thus make himself equal
with God, or even exalt himself above God. The Lord is unchangeable, therefore His law is
immutable; but the pope has exalted himself above God, in seeking to change His immutable
precepts of holiness, justice, and goodness. He has trampled underfoot God's sanctified
day, and, on his own authority, put in its place one of the six labouring days. The whole
nation has followed after the beast, and every week they rob God of His holy time. The
pope has made a breach in the holy law of God, but I saw that the time had fully come for
this breach to be made up by the people of God and the waste places built up. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I pleaded before the angel for God to save His people who had gone astray, to save them
for His mercy's sake. When the plagues begin to fall, those who continue to break the holy
Sabbath will not open their mouths to plead those excuses that they now make to get rid of
keeping it. Their mouths will be closed while the plagues are falling, and the great
Lawgiver is requiring justice of those who have had His holy law in derision and have
called it "a curse to man," "miserable," and "rickety." When
such feel the iron grasp of this law taking hold of them, these expressions will appear
before them in living characters, and they will then realise the sin of having that law in
derision which the Word of God calls "holy, just, and good." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I was pointed to the glory of heaven, to the treasure laid up for the faithful.
Everything was lovely and glorious. The angels would sing a lovely song, then they would
cease singing and take their crowns from their heads and cast them glittering at the feet
of the lovely Jesus, and with melodious voices cry, "Glory, Alleluia!" I joined
with them in their songs of praise and honour to the Lamb, and every time I opened my
mouth to praise Him, I felt an unutterable sense of the glory that surrounded me. It was a
far more, an exceeding and eternal weight of glory. Said the angel, "The little
remnant who love God and keep His commandments and are faithful to the end will enjoy this
glory and ever be in the presence of Jesus and sing with the holy angels." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then my eyes were taken from the glory, and I was pointed to the remnant on the earth.
The angel said to them, "Will ye shun the seven last plagues? Will ye go to glory and
enjoy all that God has prepared for those who love Him and are willing to suffer for His
sake? If so, ye must die that ye may live. Get ready, get ready, get ready. Ye must have a
greater preparation than ye now have, for the day of the Lord cometh, cruel both with
wrath and fierce anger, to lay the land desolate and to destroy the sinners thereof out of
it. Sacrifice all to God. Lay all upon His altar--self, property, and all, a living
sacrifice. It will take all to enter glory. Lay up for yourselves treasure in heaven,
where no thief can approach or rust corrupt. Ye must be partakers of Christ's sufferings
here if ye would be partakers with Him of His glory hereafter." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Heaven will be cheap enough, if we obtain it through suffering. We must deny self all
along the way, die to self daily, let Jesus alone appear, and keep His glory continually
in vi </span></p>
<p><span>have embraced the truth would have to know what it is to suffer for Christ's sake, that
they would have trials to pass through that would be keen and cutting, in order that they
may be purified and fitted through suffering to receive the seal of the living God, pass
through the time of trouble, see the King in His beauty, and dwell in the presence of God
and of pure, holy angels. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As I saw what we must be in order to inherit glory, and then saw how much Jesus had
suffered to obtain for us so rich an inheritance, I prayed that we might be baptised into
Christ's sufferings, that we might not shrink at trials, but bear them with patience and
joy, knowing what Jesus had suffered that we through His poverty and sufferings might be
made rich. Said the angel, "Deny self; ye must step fast." Some of us have had
time to get the truth and to advance step by step, and every step we have taken has given
us strength to take the next. But now time is almost finished, and what we have been years
learning, they will have to learn in a few months. They will also have much to unlearn and
much to learn again. Those who would not receive the mark of the beast and his image when
the decree goes forth, must have decision now to say, Nay, we will not regard the
institution of the beast. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Blind Leading the Blind </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have seen how the blind guides were labouring to make souls as blind as themselves,
little realising what is coming upon them. They are exalting themselves against the truth,
and as it triumphs, many who have looked on these teachers as men of God and have looked
to them for light, are troubled. They inquire of these leaders relative to the Sabbath,
and they, with the object of getting rid of the fourth commandment, will answer them
thereto. I saw that real honesty was not regarded in taking the many positions that were
taken against the Sabbath. The main object is to get around the Sabbath of the Lord and
observe another day than that sanctified and hallowed by Jehovah. If they are driven from
one position, they take an opposite one, even a position that they had but just before
condemned as unsound. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God's people are coming into the unity of the faith. Those who observe the Sabbath of
the Bible are united in their views of Bible truth. But those who oppose the Sabbath among
the Advent people are disunited and strangely divided. One comes forward in opposition to
the Sabbath and declares it to be thus and so, and at the conclusion calls it settled. But
as his effort does not put the question to rest, and as the Sabbath cause progresses and
the children of the Lord still embrace it, another comes forward to overthrow it. But in
presenting his views to get around the Sabbath, he entirely tears down the arguments of
him who made the first effort against the truth, and presents a theory as opposite to his
as to ours. So with the third and the fourth; but none of them will have it as it stands
in the Word of God: "The seventh day is the Sabbath of the Lord thy God." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Such, I saw, have the carnal mind, therefore are not subject to the holy law of God.
They are not agreed among themselves, yet labour hard with their inferences to wrest the
Scriptures to make a breach in God's law, to change, abolish, or do anything with the
fourth commandment rather than to observe it. They wish to silence the flock upon this
question; therefore they get up something with the hope that it will quiet them and that
many of their followers will search their Bibles so little that their leaders can easily
make error appear like truth, and they receive it as such, not looking higher than their
leaders. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Preparation for the End </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>At Oswego, New York, September 7, 1850, the Lord showed me that a great work must be
done for His people before they could stand in the battle in the day of the Lord. I was
pointed to those who claim to be Adventists, but who reject the present truth, and saw
that they were crumbling and that the hand of the Lord was in their midst to divide and
scatter them now in the gathering time, so that the precious jewels among them, who have
formerly been deceived, may have their eyes opened to see their true state. And now when
the truth is presented to them by the Lord's messengers, they are prepared to listen, and
see its beauty and harmony, and to leave their former associates and errors, embrace the
precious truth and stand where they can define their position. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that those who oppose the Sabbath of the Lord could not take the Bible and show
that our position is incorrect; therefore they would slander those who believe and teach
the truth and would attack their characters. Many who were once conscientious and loved
God and His Word have become so hardened by rejecting the light of truth that they do not
hesitate to wickedly misrepresent and falsely accuse those who love the holy Sabbath, if
by so doing they can injure the influence of those who fearlessly declare the truth. But
these things will not hinder the work of God. In fact, this course pursued by those who
hate the truth will be the very means of opening the eyes of some. Every jewel will be
brought out and gathered, for the hand of the Lord is set to recover the remnant of His
people, and He will accomplish the work gloriously. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We who believe the truth should be very careful to give no occasion for our good to be
evil spoken of. We should know that every step we take is in accordance with the Bible;
for those who hate the commandments of God will triumph over our missteps and faults, as
the wicked did in 1843. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>May 14, 1851, I saw the beauty and loveliness of Jesus. As I beheld His glory, the
thought did not occur to me that I should ever be separated from His presence. I saw a
light coming from the glory that encircled the Father, and as it approached near to me, my
body trembled and shook like a leaf. I thought that if it should come near me I would be
struck out of existence, but the light passed me. Then could I have some sense of the
great and terrible God with whom we have to do. I saw then what faint views some have of
the holiness of God, and how much they take His holy and reverend name in vain, without
realising that it is God, the great and terrible God, of whom they are speaking. While
praying, many use careless and irreverent expressions, which grieve the tender Spirit of
the Lord and cause their petitions to be shut out of heaven. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I also saw that many do not realise what they must be in order to live in the sight of
the Lord without a high priest in the sanctuary through the time of trouble. Those who
receive the seal of the living God and are protected in the time of trouble must reflect
the image of Jesus fully. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that many were neglecting the preparation so needful and were looking to the time
of "refreshing" and the "latter rain" to fit them to stand in the day
of the Lord and to live in His sight. Oh, how many I saw in the time of trouble without a
shelter! They had neglected the needful preparation; therefore they could not receive the
refreshing that all must have to fit them to live in the sight of a holy God. Those who
refuse to be hewed by the prophets and fail to purify their souls in obeying the whole
truth, and who are willing to believe that their condition is far better than it really
is, will come up to the time of the falling of the plagues, and then see that they needed
to be hewed and squared for the building. But there will be no time then to do it and no
Mediator to plead their cause before the Father. Before this time the awfully solemn
declaration has gone forth, "He that is unjust, let him be unjust still: and he which
is filthy, let him be filthy still: and he that is righteous, let him be righteous still:
and he that is holy, let him be holy still." I saw that none could share the
"refreshing" unless they obtain the victory over every besetment, over pride,
selfishness, love of the world, and over every wrong word and action. We should,
therefore, be drawing nearer and nearer to the Lord and be earnestly seeking that
preparation necessary to enable us to stand in the battle in the day of the Lord. Let all
remember that God is holy and that none but holy beings can ever dwell in His presence. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Prayer and Faith </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have frequently seen that the children of the Lord neglect prayer, especially secret
prayer, altogether too much; that many do not exercise that faith which it is their
privilege and duty to exercise, often waiting for that feeling which faith alone can
bring. Feeling is not faith; the two are distinct. Faith is ours to exercise, but joyful
feeling and the blessing are God's to give. The grace of God comes to the soul through the
channel of living faith, and that faith it is in our power to exercise. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>True faith lays hold of and claims the promised blessing before it is realised and
felt. We must send up our petitions in faith within the second veil and let our faith take
hold of the promised blessing and claim it as ours. We are then to believe that we receive
the blessing, because our faith has hold of it, and according to the Word it is ours.
"What things soever ye desire, when ye pray, believe that ye receive them, and ye
shall have them." Mark 11:24. Here is faith, naked faith, to believe that we receive
the blessing, even before we realise it. When the promised blessing is realised and
enjoyed, faith is swallowed up. But many suppose they have much faith when sharing largely
of the Holy Spirit and that they cannot have faith unless they feel the power of the
Spirit. Such confound faith with the blessing that comes through faith. The very time to
exercise faith is when we feel destitute of the Spirit. When thick clouds of darkness seem
to hover over the mind, then is the time to let living faith pierce the darkness and
scatter the clouds. True faith rests on the promises contained in the Word of God, and
those only who obey that Word can claim its glorious promises. "If ye abide in Me,
and My words abide in you, ye shall ask what ye will, and it shall be done unto you."
John 15:7. "Whatsoever we ask, we receive of Him, because we keep His commandments,
and do those things that are pleasing in His sight." 1 John 3:22. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We should be much in secret prayer. Christ is the vine, ye are the branches. And if we
would grow and flourish, we must continually draw sap and nourishment from the Living
Vine; for separated from the Vine we have no strength. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I asked the angel why there was no more faith and power in Israel. He said, "Ye
let go of the arm of the Lord too soon. Press your petitions to the throne, and hold on by
strong faith. The promises are sure. Believe ye receive the things ye ask for, and ye
shall have them." I was then pointed to Elijah. He was subject to like passions as we
are, and he prayed earnestly. His faith endured the trial. Seven times he prayed before
the Lord, and at last the cloud was seen. I saw that we had doubted the sure promises, and
wounded the Saviour by our lack of faith. Said the angel, "Gird the armour about
thee, and above all take the shield of faith; for that will guard the heart, the very
life, from the fiery darts of the wicked." If the enemy can lead the desponding to
take their eyes off from Jesus, and look to themselves, and dwell upon their own
unworthiness, instead of dwelling upon the worthiness of Jesus, His love, His merits, and
His great mercy, he will get away their shield of faith and gain his object; they will be
exposed to his fiery temptations. The weak should therefore look to Jesus, and believe in
Him; they then exercise faith.<br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>The Gathering Time </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>September 23, the Lord showed me that He had stretched out His hand the second time to
recover the remnant of His people, and that efforts must be redoubled in this gathering
time. In the scattering, Israel was smitten and torn, but now in the gathering time God
will heal and bind up His people. In the scattering, efforts made to spread the truth had
but little effect, accomplished but little or nothing; but in the gathering, when God has
set His hand to gather His people, efforts to spread the truth will have their designed
effect. All should be united and zealous in the work. I saw that it was wrong for any to
refer to the scattering for examples to govern us now in the gathering; for if God should
do no more for us now than He did then, Israel would never be gathered. I have seen that
the 1843 chart was directed by the hand of the Lord, and that it should not be altered;
that the figures were as He wanted them; that His hand was over and hid a mistake in some
of the figures, so that none could see it, until His hand was removed. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I saw in relation to the "daily" (Dan. 8:12) that the word
"sacrifice" was supplied by man's wisdom, and does not belong to the text, and
that the Lord gave the correct view of it to those who gave the judgement hour cry. When
union existed, before 1844, nearly all were united on the correct view of the
"daily"; but in the confusion since 1844, other views have been embraced, and
darkness and confusion have followed. Time has not been a test since 1844, and it will
never again be a test. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me that the message of the third angel must go, and be proclaimed to
the scattered children of the Lord, but it must not be hung on time. I saw that some were
getting a false excitement, arising from preaching time; but the third angels message is
stronger than time can be. I saw that this message can stand on its own foundation and
needs not time to strengthen it; and that it will go in mighty power, and do its work, and
will be cut short in righteousness. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then I was pointed to some who are in the great error of believing that it is their
duty to go to Old Jerusalem, and think they have a work to do there before the Lord comes.
Such a view is calculated to take the mind and interest from the present work of the Lord,
under the message of the third angel; for those who think that they are yet to go to
Jerusalem will have their minds there, and their means will be withheld from the cause of
present truth to get themselves and others there. I saw that such a mission would
accomplish no real good, that it would take a long while to make a very few of the Jews
believe even in the first advent of Christ, much more to believe in His second advent. I
saw that Satan had greatly deceived some in this thing and that souls all around them in
this land could be helped by them and led to keep the commandments of God, but they were
leaving them to perish. I also saw that Old Jerusalem never would be built up; and that
Satan was doing his utmost to lead the minds of the children of the Lord into these things
now, in the gathering time, to keep them from throwing their whole interest into the
present work of the Lord, and to cause them to neglect the necessary preparation for the
day of the Lord. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Dear Reader </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>A sense of duty to my brethren and sisters and a desire that the blood of souls might
not be found on my garments have governed me in writing this little work. I am aware of
the unbelief that exists in the minds of the multitude relative to visions, also that many
who profess to be looking for Christ and teach that we are in the "last days"
call them all of Satan. I expect much opposition from such, and had I not felt that the
Lord required it of me, I should not have made my views thus public, as they will probably
call forth the hatred and derision of some. But I fear God more than man. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>When the Lord first gave me messages to deliver to His people, it was hard for me to
declare them, and I often softened them down and made them as mild as possible for fear of
grieving some. It was a great trial to declare the messages as the Lord gave them to me. I
did not realise that I was so unfaithful and did not see the sin and danger of such a
course until in vision I was taken into the presence of Jesus. He looked upon me with a
frown and turned His face from me. It is not possible to describe the terror and agony I
then felt. I fell upon my face before Him, but had no power to utter a word. Oh, how I
longed to be covered and hid from that dreadful frown! Then could I realise, in some
degree, what the feeling of the lost will be when they cry, "Mountains and rocks,
fall on us, and hide us from the face of Him that sitteth on the throne, and from the
wrath of the Lamb." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Presently an angel bade me rise, and the sight that met my eyes can hardly be
described. A company was presented before me whose hair and garments were torn and whose
countenances were the very picture of despair and horror. They came close to me and took
their garments and rubbed them on mine. I looked upon my garments and saw that they were
stained with blood, and that blood was eating holes in them. Again I fell like one dead at
the feet of my accompanying angel. I could not plead one excuse. My tongue refused all
utterance, and I longed to be away from such a holy place. Again the angel stood me upon
my feet and said, "This is not your case now, but this scene has passed before you to
let you know what your situation must be if you neglect to declare to others what the Lord
has revealed to you. But if you are faithful to the end, you shall eat of the tree of life
and shall drink of the river of the water of life. You will have to suffer much, but the
grace of God is sufficient." I then felt willing to do all that the Lord might
require me to do that I might have His approbation and not feel His dreadful frown. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I have frequently been falsely charged with teaching views peculiar to Spiritualism.
But before the editor of the Day-Star ran into that delusion, the Lord gave me a view of
the sad and desolating effects that would be produced upon the flock by him and others in
teaching the spiritual views. I have often seen the lovely Jesus, that He is a person . I
asked Him if His Father was a person and had a form like Himself. Said Jesus, "I am
in the express image of My Father's person." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I have often seen that the spiritual view took away all the glory of heaven, and that
in many minds the throne of David and the lovely person of Jesus have been burned up in
the fire of Spiritualism. I have seen that some who have been deceived and led into this
error will be brought out into the light of truth, but it will be almost impossible for
them to get entirely rid of the deceptive power of Spiritualism. Such should make thorough
work in confessing their errors and leaving them forever. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I recommend to you, dear reader, the Word of God as the rule of your faith and
practice. By that Word we are to be judged. God has, in that Word, promised to give
visions in the "last days"; not for a new rule of faith, but for the comfort of
His people, and to correct those who err from Bible truth. Thus God dealt with Peter when
He was about to send him to preach to the Gentiles. (Acts 10.)<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>To those who may circulate this little work, I would say that it is designed for the
sincere only and not for those who would ridicule the things of the Spirit of God. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Mrs. White's Dreams </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I dreamed of seeing a temple to which many people were flocking. Only those who took
refuge in that temple would be saved when time should close. All who remained outside
would be forever lost. The multitudes without, who were going their various ways, were
deriding and ridiculing those who were entering the temple, and told them that this plan
of safety was a cunning deception, that, in fact, there was no danger whatever to avoid.
They even laid hold of some to prevent them from hastening within the walls. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Fearing to be laughed at and ridiculed, I thought best to wait until the multitude were
dispersed, or until I could enter unobserved by them. But the numbers increased instead of
diminishing, and fearful of being too late, I hastily left my home and pressed through the
crowd. In my anxiety to reach the temple I did not notice or care for the throng that
surrounded me. On entering the building, I saw that the vast temple was supported by one
immense pillar, and to this was tied a Lamb all mangled and bleeding. We who were present
seemed to know that this Lamb had been torn and bruised on our account. All who entered
the temple must come before it and confess their sins. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Just before the Lamb were elevated seats upon which sat a company of people looking
very happy. The light of heaven seemed to shine upon their faces, and they praised God and
sang songs of glad thanksgiving that seemed to be like the music of angels. These were
they who had come before the Lamb, confessed their sins, been pardoned, and were now
waiting in glad expectation of some joyful event. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Even after having entered the building a fear came over me and a sense of shame that I
must humiliate myself before these people. But I seemed compelled to move forward, and was
slowly making my way around the pillar in order to face the Lamb, when a trumpet sounded,
the temple shook, shouts of triumph arose from the assembled saints, an awful brightness
illuminated the building, then all was intense darkness. The happy people had all
disappeared with the brightness, and I was left alone in the silent horror of night. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I awoke in agony of mind and could hardly convince myself that I had been dreaming. It
seemed to me that my doom was fixed, that the Spirit of the Lord had left me, never to
return. My despondency deepened, if that were possible. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Soon after this I had another dream. I seemed to be sitting in abject despair, with my
face in my hands, reflecting like this: If Jesus were upon earth, I would go to Him, throw
myself at His feet, and tell Him all my sufferings. He would not turn away from me, He
would have mercy upon me, and I should love and serve Him always. Just then the door
opened, and a person of beautiful form and countenance entered. He looked upon me
pityingly and said: "Do you wish to see Jesus? He is here and you can see Him if you
desire to do so. Take everything you possess and follow me." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I heard this with unspeakable joy, and gladly gathered up all my little possessions,
every treasured trinket, and followed my guide. He led me to a steep and apparently frail
stairway. As I commenced to ascend the steps, he cautioned me to keep my eyes fixed
upward, lest I should grow dizzy and fall. Many others who were climbing up the steep
ascent fell before gaining the top. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Finally we reached the last step and stood before the door. Here my guide directed me
to leave all the things that I had brought with me. I cheerfully laid them down; he then
opened the door and bade me enter. In a moment I stood before Jesus. There was no
mistaking that beautiful countenance. Such a radiant expression of benevolence and majesty
could belong to no other. As His gaze rested upon me, I knew at once that He was
acquainted with every circumstance of my life and all my inner thoughts and feelings. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I tried to shield myself from His gaze, feeling unable to endure His searching eyes,
but He drew near with a smile, and, laying His hand upon my head, said: "Fear
not." The sound of His sweet voice thrilled my heart with a happiness it had never
before experienced. I was too joyful to utter a word, but, overcome with ineffable
happiness, sank prostrate at His feet. While I was lying helpless there, scenes of beauty
and glory passed before me, and I seemed to have reached the safety and peace of heaven.
At length my strength returned, and I arose. The loving eyes of Jesus were still upon me,
and His smile filled my soul with gladness. His presence filled me with holy reverence and
an inexpressible love. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>My guide now opened the door, and we both passed out. He bade me take up again all the
things I had left without. This done, he handed me a green cord coiled up closely. This he
directed me to place next my heart, and when I wished to see Jesus, take from my bosom and
stretch it to the utmost. He cautioned me not to let it remain coiled for any length of
time, lest it should become knotted and difficult to straighten. I placed the cord near my
heart and joyfully descended the narrow stairs, praising the Lord and joyfully telling all
whom I met where they could find Jesus. This dream gave me hope. The green cord
represented faith to my mind, and the beauty and simplicity of trusting in God began to
dawn upon my benighted soul. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>William Miller's Dream </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I dreamed that God, by an unseen hand, sent me a curiously wrought casket about ten
inches long by six square, made of ebony and pearls curiously inlaid. To the casket there
was a key attached. I immediately took the key and opened the casket, when, to my wonder
and surprise, I found it filled with all sorts and sizes of jewels, diamonds, precious
stones, and gold and silver coin of every dimension and value, beautifully arranged in
their several places in the casket; and thus arranged they reflected a light and glory
equalled only to the sun. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I thought it was not my duty to enjoy this wonderful sight alone, although my heart was
overjoyed at the brilliancy, beauty, and value of its contents. I therefore placed it on a
centre table in my room and gave out word that all who had a desire might come and see the
most glorious and brilliant sight ever seen by man in this life. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The people began to come in, at first few in number, but increasing to a crowd. When
they first looked into the casket, they would wonder and shout for joy. But when the
spectators increased, everyone would begin to trouble the jewels, taking them out of the
casket and scattering them on the table. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I began to think that the owner would require the casket and the jewels again at my
hand; and if I suffered them to be scattered, I could never place them in their places in
the casket again as before; and felt I should never be able to meet the accountability,
for it would be immense. I then began to plead with the people not to handle them, nor to
take them out of the casket; but the more I pleaded, the more they scattered; and now they
seemed to scatter them all over the room, on the floor and on every piece of furniture in
the room. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then saw that among the genuine jewels and coin they had scattered an innumerable
quantity of spurious jewels and counterfeit coin. I was highly incensed at their base
conduct and ingratitude, and reproved and reproached them for it; but the more I reproved,
the more they scattered the spurious jewels and false coin among the genuine. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then became vexed in my physical soul and began to use physical force to push them
out of the room; but while I was pushing out one, three more would enter and bring in dirt
and shavings and sand and all manner of rubbish, until they covered every one of the true
jewels, diamonds, and coins, which were all excluded from sight. They also tore in pieces
my casket and scattered it among the rubbish. I thought no man regarded my sorrow or my
anger. I became wholly discouraged and disheartened, and sat down and wept. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>While I was thus weeping and mourning for my great loss and accountability, I
remembered God, and earnestly prayed that He would send me help. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Immediately the door opened, and a man entered the room, when the people all left it;
and he, having a dirt brush in his hand, opened the windows, and began to brush the dirt
and rubbish from the room. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I cried to him to forbear, for there were some precious jewels scattered among the
rubbish. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He told me to "fear not," for he would "take care of them". <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then, while he brushed the dirt and rubbish, false jewels and counterfeit coin, all
rose and went out of the window like a cloud, and the wind carried them away. In the
bustle I closed my eyes for a moment; when I opened them, the rubbish was all gone. The
precious jewels, the diamonds, the gold and silver coins, lay scattered in profusion all
over the room. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He then placed on the table a casket, much larger and more beautiful than the former,
and gathered up the jewels, the diamonds, the coins, by the handful, and cast them into
the casket, till not one was left, although some of the diamonds were not bigger than the
point of a pin. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He then called upon me to "come and see." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I looked into the casket, but my eyes were dazzled with the sight. They shone with ten
times their former glory. I thought they had been scoured in the sand by the feet of those
wicked persons who had scattered and trod them in the dust. They were arranged in
beautiful order in the casket, every one in its place, without any visible pains of the
man who cast them in. I shouted with very joy, and that shout awoke me. <br />
</span></p>Supplement2008-08-10T23:44:09Z2008-08-10T23:44:09Zhttp://www.crcbermuda.com/reference/ellen-white-books-a-f/early-writings/1707-supplementBrother Michaelmichael@nisbett.com<!--mstheme--><span>An Explanation Dear Christian Friends </span>
<p><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As I have given a brief sketch of my experience and views, published in 1851, it seems
to be my duty to notice some points in that little work, also to give more recent views. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>1. On page 33 is given the following: "I saw that the holy Sabbath is, and will
be, the separating wall between the true Israel of God and unbelievers; and that the
Sabbath is the great question to unite the hearts of God's dear, waiting saints. I saw
that God had children who do not see and keep the Sabbath. They have not rejected the
light upon it. And at the commencement of the time of trouble, we were filled with the
Holy Ghost as we went forth and proclaimed the Sabbath more fully." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>This view was given in 1847 when there were but very few of the Advent brethren
observing the Sabbath, and of these but few supposed that its observance was of sufficient
importance to draw a line between the people of God and unbelievers. Now the fulfilment of
that view is beginning to be seen. "The commencement of that time of trouble,"
here mentioned does not refer to the time when the plagues shall begin to be poured out,
but to a short period just before they are poured out, while Christ is in the sanctuary.
At that time, while the work of salvation is closing, trouble will be coming on the earth,
and the nations will be angry, yet held in check so as not to prevent the work of the
third angel. At that time the "latter rain," or refreshing from the presence of
the Lord, will come, to give power to the loud voice of the third angel, and prepare the
saints to stand in the period when the seven last plagues shall be poured out. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>2. The view of "The Open and Shut Door", on pages 42-45, was given in 1849.
The application of Revelation 3:7, 8, to the heavenly sanctuary and Christ's ministry was
entirely new to me. I had never heard the idea advanced by anyone. Now as the subject of
the sanctuary is being clearly understood, the application is seen in its force and
beauty. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>3. The view that the Lord "had stretched out His hand the second time to recover
the remnant of His people," on page 74, refers only to the union and strength once
existing among those looking for Christ, and to the fact that He had begun to unite and to
raise up His people again. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>4. Spirit Manifestations . On page 43 read as follows: "I saw that the mysterious
knocking in New York and other places was the power of Satan, and that such things would
be more and more common, clothed in a religious garb so as to lull the deceived to greater
security and to draw the minds of God's people, if possible, to those things and cause
them to doubt the teaching and power of the Holy Ghost." This view was given in 1849,
nearly five years since. Then spirit manifestations were mostly confined to the city of
Rochester, known as the "Rochester knockings." Since that time the heresy has
spread beyond the expectations of anyone. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Much of the view on page 59, headed "Mysterious Rapping" given August 1850,
has since been fulfilled, and is now fulfilling. Here is a portion of it: "I saw that
soon it would be considered blasphemy to speak against the rapping, and that it would
spread more and more, that Satan's power would increase, and some of his devoted followers
would have power to work miracles, and even to bring down fire from heaven in the sight of
men. I was shown that by the rapping and mesmerism these modern magicians would yet
account for all the miracles wrought by our Lord Jesus Christ, and that many would believe
that all the mighty works of the Son of God when on earth were accomplished by this same
power." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the rapping delusion-what progress it was making, and that if it were possible it
would deceive the very elect. Satan will have power to bring before us the appearance of
forms purporting to be our relatives or friends now sleeping in Jesus. It will be made to
appear as if these friends were present; the words that they uttered while here, with
which we were familiar, will be spoken, and the same tone of voice that they had while
living will fall upon the ear. All this is to deceive the saints and ensnare them into the
belief of this delusion. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the saints must get a thorough understanding of present truth, which they
will be obliged to maintain from the Scriptures. They must understand the state of the
dead; for the spirits of devils will yet appear to them, professing to be beloved friends
and relatives, who will declare to them that the Sabbath has been changed, also other
unscriptural doctrines. They will do all in their power to excite sympathy and will work
miracles before them to confirm what they declare. The people of God must be prepared to
withstand these spirits with the Bible truth that the dead know not anything, and that
they who appear to them are the spirits of devils. Our minds must not be taken up with
things around us, but must be occupied with the present truth and a preparation to give a
reason of our hope with meekness and fear. We must seek wisdom from on high that we may
stand in this day of error and delusion. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We must examine well the foundation of our hope, for we shall have to give a reason for
it from the Scriptures. This delusion will spread, and we shall have to contend with it
face to face; and unless we are prepared for it, we shall be ensnared and overcome. But if
we do what we can on our part to be ready for the conflict that is just before us, God
will do His part, and His all-powerful arm will protect us. He would sooner send every
angel out of glory to the relief of faithful souls, to make a hedge about them, than have
them deceived and led away by the lying wonders of Satan. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the rapidity with which this delusion was spreading. A train of cars was shown
me, going with the speed of lightning. The angel bade me look carefully. I fixed my eyes
upon the train. It seemed that the whole world was on board, that there could not be one
left. Said the angel, "They are binding in bundles ready to burn." Then he
showed me the conductor, who appeared like a stately, fair person, whom all the passengers
looked up to and reverenced. I was perplexed and asked my attending angel who it was. He
said, "It is Satan. He is the conductor in the form of an angel of light. He has
taken the world captive. They are given over to strong delusions, to believe a lie, that
they may be damned. This agent, the next highest in order to him, is the engineer, and
other of his agents are employed in different offices as he may need them, and they are
all going with lightning speed to perdition." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I asked the angel if there were none left. He bade me look in an opposite direction,
and I saw a little company travelling a narrow pathway. All seemed to be firmly united,
bound together by the truth, in bundles, or companies. Said the angel, "The third
angel is binding, or sealing, them in bundles for the heavenly garner." This little
company looked careworn, as if they had passed through severe trials and conflicts. And it
appeared as if the sun had just risen from behind a cloud and shone upon their
countenances, causing them to look triumphant, as if their victories were nearly won. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the Lord has given the world opportunity to discover the snare. This one
thing is evidence enough for the Christian, if there were no other; namely, that there is
no difference made between the precious and the vile. Thomas Paine, whose body has now
mouldered to dust and who is to be called forth at the end of the one thousand years, at
the second resurrection, to receive his reward and suffer the second death, is represented
by Satan as being in heaven, and highly exalted there. Satan used him on earth as long as
he could, and now he is carrying on the same work through pretensions of having Thomas
Paine so much exalted and honoured in heaven; as he taught here, Satan would make it
appear that he is teaching in heaven. There are some who have looked with horror at his
life and death, and his corrupt teachings while living, but who now submit to be taught by
him, one of the vilest and most corrupt of men, one who despised God and His law. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He who is the father of lies, blinds and deceives the world by sending forth his angels
to speak for the apostles, and to make it appear that they contradict what they wrote by
the dictation of the Holy Ghost when on earth. These lying angels make the apostles to
corrupt their own teachings and to declare them to be adulterated. By so doing Satan
delights to throw professed Christians and all the world into uncertainty about the Word
of God. That holy Book cuts directly across his track and thwarts his plans; therefore he
leads them to doubt its divine origin. Then he sets up the infidel, Thomas Paine, as if he
were ushered into heaven when he died, and now, united with the holy apostles whom he
hated on earth, were engaged in teaching the world. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan assigns to each of his angels a part to act. He enjoins upon them all to be sly,
artful, cunning. He instructs some of them to act the part of the apostles and to speak
for them, while others are to act the part of infidels and wicked men who died cursing
God, but now appear to be very religious. There is no difference made between the most
holy apostles and the vilest infidel. They are both made to teach the same thing. It
matters not whom Satan makes to speak, if his object is only accomplished. He was so
intimately connected with Paine upon the earth, aiding him in his work, that it is an easy
thing for him to know the very words Paine used and the very handwriting of one who served
him so faithfully and accomplished his purposes so well. Satan dictated much of his
writings, and it is an easy thing for him to dictate sentiments through his angels now and
make it appear that they come through Thomas Paine, who, while living, was a devoted
servant of the evil one. This is the masterpiece of Satan. All this teaching, purporting
to be from apostles and saints and wicked men who have died, comes directly from his
satanic majesty. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The fact that Satan claims that one whom he loved so well, and who hated God so
perfectly, is now with the holy apostles and angels in glory, should be enough to remove
the veil from all minds and discover to them the dark, mysterious works of Satan. He
virtually says to the world and to infidels, No matter how wicked you are, no matter
whether you believe or disbelieve in God or the Bible, live as you please, heaven is your
home; for all know that if Thomas Paine is in heaven, and so exalted, they will surely get
there. This error is so glaring that all may see if they will. Satan is now doing through
persons like Thomas Paine what he has been trying to do since his fall. He is, through his
power and lying wonders, tearing away the foundation of the Christian's hope and putting
out the sun that is to light them in the narrow way to heaven. He is making the world
believe that the Bible is uninspired, no better than a storybook, while he holds out
something to take its place; namely, spiritual manifestations! <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Here is a channel wholly devoted to himself and under his control, and he can make the
world believe what he will. The Book that is to judge him and his followers he puts back
in the shade, just where he wants it. The Saviour of the world he makes to be no more than
a common man; and as the Roman guard that watched the tomb of Jesus spread the lying
report that the chief priests and elders put into their mouths, so will the poor, deluded
followers of these pretended spiritual manifestations repeat and try to make it appear
that there is nothing miraculous about our Saviour's birth, death, and resurrection. After
putting Jesus in the background, they attract the attention of the world to themselves and
to their miracles and lying wonders, which, they declare, far exceed the works of Christ.
Thus the world is taken in the snare and lulled into a feeling of security, not to find
out their awful deception until the seven last plagues are poured out. Satan laughs as he
sees his plan succeed so well and the whole world taken in the snare. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>5. On page 55, I stated that a cloud of glorious light covered the Father and that His
person could not be seen. I also stated that I saw the Father rise from the throne. The
Father was enshrouded with a body of light and glory, so that His person could not be
seen; yet I knew that it was the Father and that from His person emanated this light and
glory. When I saw this body of light and glory rise from the throne, I knew it was because
the Father moved, therefore said, I saw the Father rise. The glory, or excellency, of His
form I never saw; no one could behold it and live; yet the body of light and glory that
enshrouded His person could be seen. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I also stated that "Satan appeared to be by the throne, trying to carry on the
work of God." I will give another sentence from the same page: "I turned to look
at the company who were still bowed before the throne." Now this praying company was
in this mortal state, on the earth, yet represented to me as bowed before the throne. I
never had the idea that these individuals were actually in the New Jerusalem. Neither did
I ever think that any mortal could suppose that I believed that Satan was actually in the
New Jerusalem. But did not John see the great red dragon in heaven? Certainly. "And
there appeared another wonder in heaven; and behold a great red dragon, having seven heads
and ten horns." Rev. 12:3. What a monster to be in heaven! Here seems to be as good a
chance for ridicule as in the interpretation which some have placed upon my statements. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>6. On pages 48-52 is a view given January, 1850. That portion of this view which
relates to means being withheld from the messengers, applied more particularly to that
time. Since then, friends of the cause of present truth have been raised up, who have
watched for opportunity to do good with their means. Some have handed out too freely, to
the injury of the receivers. For about two years I have been shown more relative to a
careless and too free use of the Lord's money, than a lack of it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The following is from a view given at Jackson, Michigan, June 2, 1853. It related
mostly to the brethren at that place: "I saw that the brethren commenced to sacrifice
their property and handed it out without having the true object set before them-the
suffering cause-and they handed out too freely, too much, and too often. I saw that the
teachers should have stood in a place to correct this error and exert a good influence in
the church. Money has been made of little or no consequence, the sooner disposed of the
better. A bad example has been set by some in accepting large donations and not giving the
least caution to those who had means not to use it too freely and carelessly. By accepting
so large an amount of means, without questioning whether God had made it the duty of the
brethren to bestow so largely, too bountiful giving has been sanctioned. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>"Those who gave also erred, not being particular to inquire into the necessities
of the case, whether there was actual need or not. Those who had means were thrown into
great perplexity. One brother was much hurt by too much means being put into his hands. He
did not study economy, but lived extravagantly, and in his travels laid out money here and
there to no profit. He spread a wrong influence by making such free use of the Lord's
money, and would say in his own heart, and to others, 'There is means enough in J--, more
than can be used before the Lord comes.' Some were very much injured by such a course and
came into the truth with wrong views, not realising that it was the Lord's money they were
using and not feeling the worth of it. Those poor souls who have just embraced the third
angel's message and have had such an example set before them will have much to learn to
deny self and suffer for Christ's sake. They will have to learn to give up ease, cease
studying their convenience and comfort, and bear in mind the worth of souls. Those who
feel the 'woe' upon them will not be for making great preparations to travel in ease and
comfort. Some who have no calling have been encouraged into the field. Others have been
affected by these things and have not felt the need of economy, of denying themselves, and
putting into the treasury of the Lord. They would feel and say, 'There are others who have
means enough; they will give for the paper. I need not do anything. The paper will be
supported without my help.'" <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>It has been no small trial to me to see that some have taken that portion of my views
which related to sacrificing property to sustain the cause and made a wrong use of it;
they use means extravagantly, while neglecting to carry out the principles of other
portions. On page 50, read the following: "I saw that the cause of God had been
hindered and dishonoured by some travelling who had no message from God. Such will have to
give an account to God for every dollar they have used in travelling where it was not
their duty to go, because that money might have helped on the cause of God." Also,
page 50: "I saw that those who have strength to labour with their hands, and help
sustain the cause, were as accountable for their strength as others were for their
property." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I would here call special attention to the view of this subject given on page 57. Here
is a short extract: "The object of the words of our Saviour [in Luke 12:33] has not
been clearly presented." I saw that "the object of selling is not to give to
those who are able to labour and support themselves, but to spread the truth. It is a sin
to support and indulge in idleness those who are able to labour. Some have been zealous to
attend all the meetings, not to glorify God, but for the 'loaves and fishes.' Such would
much better have been at home labouring with their hands, 'the thing that is good,' to
supply the wants of their families, and to have something to give to sustain the precious
cause." It has been Satan's design in times past to push out some with a hurried
spirit to make a too free use of means, and influence the brethren to rashly dispose of
their property, that through an abundance of means thrown out carelessly and hastily,
souls might be injured and lost, and that now, when the truth is to be spread more
extensively, the lack might be felt. His design has, in some degree, been accomplished. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown the error of many in looking to those only who have property to
support the publication of the paper and tracts. All should act their part. Those who have
strength to labour with their hands, and earn means to help sustain the cause, are as
accountable for it as others are for their property. Every child of God who professes to
believe the present truth, should be zealous to act his part in this cause. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>July, 1853, I saw that it was not as it should be that the paper, owned and approved by
God, should come out so seldom. The cause, in the time in which we are living, demands the
paper weekly, and the publication of many more tracts to expose the increasing errors of
this time; but the work is hindered for want of means. I saw that the truth must go and
that we must not be too fearful, that tracts and papers might better go to three where
they were not needed than to have one deprived of them who prizes them and can be
benefited by them. I saw that the last-day signs should be brought out clearly, for the
manifestations of Satan are on the increase. The publications of Satan and his agents are
increasing, their power is growing, and what we do to get the truth before others must be
done quickly. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I was shown that the truth once published now, will stand, for it is the truth for the
last days; it will live, and less need be said upon it in future. Numberless words need
not be put upon paper to justify what speaks for itself and shines in its clearness. Truth
is straight, plain, clear, and stands out boldly in its own defence; but it is not so with
error. It is so winding and twisting that it needs a multitude of words to explain it in
its crooked form. I saw that all the light they had received in some places had come from
the paper; that souls had received the truth in this way, and then talked it to others;
and that now in places where there are several, they had been raised up by this silent
messenger. It was their only preacher. The cause of truth should not be hindered in its
onward progress for want of means. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Gospel Order </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown that gospel order has been too much feared and neglected. Formality
should be shunned; but, in so doing, order should not be neglected. There is order in
heaven. There was order in the church when Christ was upon the earth, and after His
departure order was strictly observed among His apostles. And now in these last days,
while God is bringing His children into the unity of the faith, there is more real need of
order than ever before; for, as God unites His children, Satan and his evil angels are
very busy to prevent this unity and to destroy it. Therefore men are hurried into the
field who lack wisdom and judgement, perhaps not ruling well their own house, and not
having order or government over the few that God has given them charge of at home; yet
they feel capable of having charge of the flock. They make many wrong moves, and those
unacquainted with our faith judge all the messengers to be like these self-sent men. Thus
the cause of God is reproached, and the truth shunned by many unbelievers who would
otherwise be candid and anxiously inquire, Are these things so? <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Men whose lives are not holy and who are unqualified to teach the present truth enter
the field without being acknowledged by the church or the brethren generally, and
confusion and disunion are the result. Some have a theory of the truth, and can present
the argument, but lack spirituality, judgement, and experience; they fail in many things
which it is very necessary for them to understand before they can teach the truth. Others
have not the argument, but because a few brethren hear them pray well and give an exciting
exhortation now and then, they are pressed into the field, to engage in a work for which
God has not qualified them and for which they have not sufficient experience and judgement.
Spiritual pride comes in, they are lifted up, and act under the deception of thinking that
they are labourers. They do not know themselves. They lack sound judgement and patient
reasoning, talk boastingly of themselves, and assert many things which they cannot prove
from the Word. God knows this; therefore He does not call such to labour in these perilous
times, and brethren should be careful not to push those out into the field whom He has not
called. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Those men who are not called of God are generally the very ones that are the most
confident that they are so called and that their labours are very important. They go into
the field and do not generally exert a good influence; yet in some places they have a
measure of success, and this leads them and others to think that they are surely called of
God. It is not a positive evidence that men are called of God because they have some
success; for angels of God are now moving upon the hearts of His honest children to
enlighten their understanding as to the present truth, that they may lay hold upon it and
live. And even if self-sent men put themselves where God does not put them and profess to
be teachers, and souls receive the truth by hearing them talk it, this is no evidence that
they are called of God. The souls who receive the truth from them receive it to be brought
into trial and bondage, as they afterward find that these men were not standing in the
counsel of God. Even if wicked men talk the truth, some may receive it; but it does not
bring those who talked it into any more favour with God. Wicked men are wicked men still,
and according to the deception they practised upon those who were beloved of God, and
according to the confusion brought into the church, so will be their punishment; their
sins will not remain covered, but will be exposed in the day of God's fierce anger. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>These self-sent messengers are a curse to the cause. Honest souls put confidence in
them, thinking that they are moving in the counsel of God and that they are in union with
the church, and therefore suffer them to administer the ordinances, and, as duty is made
plain that they must do their first works, allow themselves to be baptised by them. But
when light comes, as it surely will, and they are aware that these men are not what they
understood them to be, God's called and chosen messengers, they are thrown into trial and
doubt as to the truth they have received and feel that they must learn it all over again;
they are troubled and perplexed by the enemy about all their experience, whether God has
led them or not, and are not satisfied until they are again baptised and begin an </span></p>
<p><span>messengers to go into places where those have been who have exerted this wrong
influence than to enter new fields. God's servants have to deal plainly, act openly, and
not cover up wrongs; for they are standing between the living and the dead and must render
an account of their faithfulness, their mission, and the influence they exert over the
flock of which the Lord has made them overseers. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Those who receive the truth and are brought into such trials would have had the truth
the same if these men had stayed away and filled the humble place the Lord designed for
them. God's eye was upon His jewels, and He would have directed to them His called and
chosen messengers--men who would have moved understandingly. The light of truth would have
shown and discovered to these souls their true position, and they would have received the
truth understandingly and been satisfied with its beauty and clearness. And as they felt
its powerful effects, they would have been strong and shed a holy influence. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Again the danger of those travelling whom God has not called, was shown me. If they do
have some success, the qualifications that are lacking will be felt. Injudicious moves
will be made, and by a lack of wisdom some precious souls may be driven where they can
never be reached. I saw that the church should feel their responsibility and should look
carefully and attentively at the lives, qualifications, and general course of those who
profess to be teachers. If unmistakable evidence is not given that God has called them,
and that the "woe" is upon them if they heed not this call, it is the duty of
the church to act and let it be known that these persons are not acknowledged as teachers
by the church. This is the only course the church can take in order to be clear in this
matter, for the burden lies upon them. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that this door at which the enemy comes in to perplex and trouble the flock can
be shut. I inquired of the angel how it could be closed. He said, "The church must
flee to God's Word and become established upon gospel order, which has been overlooked and
neglected." This is indispensably necessary in order to bring the church into the
unity of the faith. I saw that in the apostles' day the church was in danger of being
deceived and imposed upon by false teachers. Therefore the brethren chose men who had
given good evidence that they were capable of ruling well their own house and preserving
order in their own families, and who could enlighten those who were in darkness. Inquiry
was made of God concerning these, and then, according to the mind of the church and the
Holy Ghost, they were set apart by the laying on of hands. Having received their
commission from God and having the approbation of the church, they went forth baptising in
the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, and administering the ordinances of the
Lord's house, often waiting upon the saints by presenting them the emblems of the broken
body and spilt blood of the crucified Saviour, to keep fresh in the memory of God's
beloved children His sufferings and death. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that we are no more secure from false teachers now than they were in the
apostles' days; and, if we do no more, we should take as special measures as they did to
secure the peace, harmony, and union of the flock. We have their example, and should
follow it. Brethren of experience and of sound minds should assemble, and following the
Word of God and the sanction of the Holy Spirit, should, with fervent prayer, lay hands
upon those who have given full proof that they have received their commission of God, and
set them apart to devote themselves entirely to His work. This act would show the sanction
of the church to their going forth as messengers to carry the most solemn message ever
given to men. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God will not entrust the care of His precious flock to men whose mind and judgement
have been weakened by former errors that they have cherished, such as so-called
perfectionism and Spiritualism, and who, by their course while in these errors, have
disgraced themselves and brought reproach upon the cause of truth. Although they may now
feel free from error and competent to go forth and to teach this last message, God will
not accept them. He will not entrust precious souls to their care; for their judgement was
perverted while in error, and is now weakened. The great and holy One is a jealous God,
and He will have holy men to carry His truth. The holy law spoken by God from Sinai as a
part of Himself, and holy men who are its strict observers will alone honour Him by
teaching it to others. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The servants of God who teach the truth should be men of judgement. They should be men
who can bear opposition and not get excited; for those who oppose the truth will pick at
those who teach it, and every objection that can be produced, will be brought in its worst
form to bear against the truth. The servants of God who bear the message must be prepared
to remove these objections, with calmness and meekness, by the light of truth. Frequently
opposers talk to ministers of God in a provoking manner, to call out something from them
of the same nature, that they can make as much of it as possible and declare to others
that the teachers of the commandments have a bitter spirit and are harsh, as has been
reported. I saw that we must be prepared for objections, and with patience, judgement, and
meekness, let them have the weight they deserve, not throw them away or dispose of them by
positive assertions, and then bear down upon the objector, and manifest a hard spirit
toward him; but give the objections their weight, then bring forth the light and the power
of the truth, and let it outweigh and remove the errors. Thus a good impression will be
made, and honest opposers will acknowledge that they have been deceived and that the
commandment keepers are not what they have been represented to be. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Those who profess to be servants of the living God must be willing to be servants of
all, instead of being exalted above the brethren, and they must possess a kind, courteous
spirit. If they err, they should be ready to confess thoroughly. Honesty of intention
cannot stand as an excuse for not confessing errors. Confession would not lessen the
confidence of the church in the messenger, and he would set a good example; a spirit of
confession would be encouraged in the church, and sweet union would be the result. Those
who profess to be teachers should be patterns of piety, meekness, and humility, possessing
a kind spirit, to win souls to Jesus and the truth of the Bible. A minister of Christ
should be pure in conversation and in actions. He should ever bear in mind that he is
handling words of inspiration, words of a holy God. He must also bear in mind that the
flock is entrusted to his care, and that he is to bear their cases to Jesus, and plead for
them as Jesus pleads for us with the Father. I was pointed back to the children of Israel
anciently and saw how pure and holy the ministers of the sanctuary had to be, because they
were brought by their work into a close connection with God. They that minister must be
holy, pure, and without blemish, or God will destroy them. God has not changed. He is just
as holy and pure, just as particular, as He ever was. Those who profess to be the
ministers of Jesus should be men of experience and deep piety, and then at all times and
in all places they can shed a holy influence. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I have seen that it is now time for the messengers to move out wherever there is an
opening, and that God will go before them and open the hearts of some to hear. New places
must be entered, and, wherever this is done, it would be well, if consistent, to go two
and two, so as to hold up each other's hands. A plan like this was presented: It would be
well for two brethren to start together and travel in company to the darkest places, where
there is much opposition and where the most labour is needed, and with united efforts and
strong faith set the truth before those in darkness. And then, if they could accomplish
more by visiting many places, to go separately, but often meet, while on the tour, to
encourage each other by their faith, and thereby strengthen and hold up each other's
hands. Also, let them consult upon the places opened for them, and decide which of their
gifts will be the most needed, and in what way they can have the most success in reaching
the heart. Then as they separate again their courage and energy will be renewed to meet
the opposition and darkness and to labour with feeling hearts to save perishing souls. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the servants of God should not go over and over the same field of labour,
but should be searching out souls in new places. Those who are already established in the
truth should not demand so much of their labour; for they ought to be able to stand alone,
and strengthen others about them, while the messengers of God visit the dark and lonely
places, setting the truth before those who are not now enlightened as to the present
truth. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Church Difficulties</span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Dear brethren and sisters: </span></p>
<p><span>As error is fast progressing, we should seek to be awake in the cause of God, and
realise the time in which we live. Darkness is to cover the earth, and gross darkness the
people. And as nearly all around us are being enveloped in the thick darkness of error and
delusion, it becomes us to shake off stupidity and live near to God, where we can draw
divine rays of light and glory from the countenance of Jesus. As darkness thickens and
error increases, we should obtain a more thorough knowledge of the truth and be prepared
to maintain our position from the Scriptures. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We must be sanctified through the truth, be wholly consecrated to God, and so live out
our holy profession that the Lord can shed increasing light upon us, and that we may see
light in His light, and be strengthened with His strength. Every moment that we are not on
our watch we are liable to be beset by the enemy and are in great danger of being overcome
by the powers of darkness. Satan commissions his angels to be vigilant and overthrow all
they can; to find out the waywardness and besetting sins of those who profess the truth,
and throw darkness around them, that they may cease to be watchful, take a course that
will dishonour the cause they profess to love, and bring sorrow upon the church. The souls
of these misguided, unwatchful ones grow darker, and the light of heaven fades from them.
They cannot discover their besetting sins, and Satan weaves his net about them, and they
are taken in his snare. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God is our strength. We must look to Him for wisdom and guidance, and keeping in view
His glory, the good of the church, and the salvation of our own souls, we must overcome
our besetting sins. We should individually seek to obtain new victory every day. We must
learn to stand alone and depend wholly upon God. The sooner we learn this the better. Let
each one find out where he fails, and then faithfully watch that his sins do not overcome
him, but that he gets the victory over them. Then can we have confidence toward God, and
great trouble will be saved the church. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The messengers of God, as they leave their homes to labour for the salvation of souls,
spend much of their time in labouring for those who have been in the truth for years, but
who are still weak, because they needlessly let loose the reins, cease watching over
themselves, and, I sometimes think, tempt the enemy to tempt them. They get into some
petty difficulty and trial, and the time of the servants of the Lord is spent to visit
them. They are held hours and even days, and their souls are grieved and wounded by
hearing little difficulties and trials talked over, each magnifying his own grievances to
make them look as serious as possible, for fear the servants of God will think them too
small to be noticed. Instead of depending on the Lord's servants to help them out of these
trials, they should break down before God and fast and pray until the trials are removed. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Some seem to think that all that God has called messengers into the field for, is to go
at their bidding and to carry them in their arms; and that the most important part of
their work is to settle the petty trials and difficulties which they have brought upon
themselves by injudicious moves, and by giving way to the enemy, and indulging an
unyielding, faultfinding spirit toward those around them. But where are the hungry sheep
at this time? Starving for the bread of life. Those who know the truth and have been
established in it, but obey it not--if they did, they would be saved many of these
trials--are holding the messengers, and the very object for which God has called them into
the field is not accomplished. The servants of God are grieved and their courage taken
away by such things in the church, when all should strive not to add a feather's weight to
their burden, but by cheering words and the prayer of faith, should help them. How much
more free would they be if all who profess the truth would look about them and try to help
others, instead of claiming so much help themselves. As it is, when the servants of God
enter dark places, where the truth has not yet been proclaimed, they carry a wounded
spirit caused by the needless trials of their brethren. In addition to all this, they have
to meet the unbelief and prejudice of opposers and be trampled upon by some. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>How much easier it would be to affect the heart and how much more would God be
glorified if His servants were free from discouragement and trial, that they might with a
free spirit present the truth in its beauty. Those who have been guilty of requiring so
much labour of God's servants and burdening them with trials which belong to themselves to
settle, will have to give account to God for all the time and means that have been spent
to gratify themselves, thereby satisfying the enemy. They should be in a situation to help
their brethren. They should never defer their trials and difficulties to burden a whole
meeting, or wait until some of the messengers come to settle them; but they should get
right before God themselves, have their trials all out of the way, and be prepared when
labourers come to hold up their hands instead of weakening them. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Hope of the Church </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As I have of late looked around to find the humble followers of the meek and lowly
Jesus, my mind has been much exercised. Many who profess to be looking for the speedy
coming of Christ are becoming conformed to this world and seek more earnestly the applause
of those around them than the approbation of God. They are cold and formal, like the
nominal churches from which they but a short time since separated. The words addressed to
the Laodicean church describe their present condition perfectly. (See Rev. 3:14-20.) They
are "neither cold nor hot," but "lukewarm" . And unless they heed the
counsel of the "faithful and true Witness," and zealously repent and obtain
"gold tried in the fire," "white raiment," and "eye-salve,"
He will spew them out of His mouth. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The time has come when a large portion of those who once rejoiced and shouted aloud for
joy in view of the immediate coming of the Lord, are on the ground of the churches and the
world who once derided them for believing that Jesus was coming, and circulated all manner
of falsehoods to raise prejudice against them and destroy their influence. Now, if any one
longs after the living God, hungering and thirsting for righteousness, and God gives him
to feel His power, and satisfies his longing soul by shedding abroad His love in his
heart, and if he glorifies God by praising Him, he is, by these professed believers in the
soon coming of the Lord, often considered deluded, and charged with being mesmerised or
having some wicked spirit. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Many of these professed Christians dress, talk, and act like the world, and the only
thing by which they may be known is their profession. Though they profess to be looking
for Christ, their conversation is not in heaven, but on worldly things. "What manner
of persons" ought those to be "in all holy conversation and godliness," who
profess to be "looking for and hasting unto the coming of the day of God." 2
Peter 3:11, 12. "Every man that hath this hope in him purifieth himself, even as He
is pure." 1 John 3:3. But it is evident that many who bear the name of Adventist
study more to decorate their bodies and to appear well in the eyes of the world than they
do to learn from the Word of God how they may be approved of Him. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>What if the lovely Jesus, our pattern, should make His appearance among them and the
professors of religion generally, as at His first advent? He was born in a manger. Follow
Him through His life and ministry. He was a man of sorrows and acquainted with grief.
These professed Christians would be ashamed of the meek and lowly Saviour who wore a
plain, seamless coat, and had not where to lay His head. His spotless, self-denying life
would condemn them; His holy solemnity would be a painful restraint upon their lightness
and vain laughter; His guileless conversation would be a check to their worldly and
covetous conversation; His declaring the unvarnished, cutting truth, would manifest their
real character, and they would wish to get the meek pattern, the lovely Jesus, out of the
way as soon as possible. They would be among the first to try to catch Him in His words,
and raise the cry, "Crucify Him! Crucify Him!" <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Let us follow Jesus as He so meekly rode into Jerusalem, when "the whole multitude
of the disciples began to rejoice and praise God with a loud voice, . . . saying, Blessed
be the King that cometh in the name of the Lord: peace in heaven, and glory in the
highest. And some of the Pharisees from among the multitude said unto Him, Master, rebuke
Thy disciples. And He answered and said unto them, I tell you that if these should hold
their peace, the stones would immediately cry out." A large portion of those who
profess to be looking for Christ would be as forward as the Pharisees were to have the
disciples silenced, and they would doubtless raise the cry, "Fanaticism! Mesmerism!
Mesmerism!" And the disciples, spreading their garments and branches of palm trees in
the way, would be thought extravagant and wild. But God will have a people on the earth
who will not be so cold and dead but that they can praise and glorify Him. He will receive
glory from some people, and if those of His choice, those who keep His commandments,
should hold their peace, the very stones would cry out. Jesus is coming, but not as at His
first advent, a babe in Bethlehem; not as He rode into Jerusalem, when the disciples
praised God with a loud voice and cried, "Hosanna"; but in the glory of the
Father and with all the retinue of holy angels to escort Him on His way to earth. All
heaven will be emptied of the angels, while the waiting saints will be looking for Him and
gazing into heaven, as were the men of Galilee when He ascended from the Mount of Olivet.
Then only those who are holy, those who have followed fully the meek Pattern, will with
rapturous joy exclaim as they behold Him, "Lo, this is our God; we have waited for
Him, and He will save us." And they will be changed "in a moment, in the
twinkling of an eye, at the last trump"--that trump which wakes the sleeping saints,
and calls them forth from their dusty beds, clothed with glorious immortality, and
shouting, "Victory! Victory over death and the grave!" The changed saints are
then caught up together with the angels to meet the Lord in the air, never more to be
separated from the object of their love. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>With such a prospect as this before us, such a glorious hope, such a redemption that
Christ has purchased for us by His own blood, shall we hold our peace? Shall we not praise
God even with a loud voice, as did the disciples when Jesus rode into Jerusalem? Is not
our prospect far more glorious than was theirs? Who dare then forbid us glorifying God,
even with a loud voice, when we have such a hope, big with immortality, and full of glory?
We have tasted of the powers of the world to come, and long for more. My whole being cries
out after the living God, and I shall not be satisfied until I am filled with all His
fullness. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Preparation for Christ's Coming </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Dear Brethren and Sisters: </span></p>
<p><span>Do we believe with all the heart that Christ is soon coming and that we are now having
the last message of mercy that is ever to be given to a guilty world? Is our example what
it should be? Do we, by our lives and holy conversation, show to those around us that we
are looking for the glorious appearing of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, who shall
change these vile bodies and fashion them like unto His glorious body? I fear that we do
not believe and realise these things as we should. Those who believe the important truths
that we profess, should act out their faith. There is too much seeking after amusements
and things to take the attention in this world; the mind is left to run too much upon
dress, and the tongue is engaged too often in light and trifling conversation, which gives
the lie to our profession, for our conversation is not in heaven, whence we look for the
Saviour. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Angels are watching over and guarding us; we often grieve these angels by indulging in
trifling conversation, jesting, and joking, and also by sinking down into a careless,
stupid state. Although we may now and then make an effort for the victory and obtain it,
yet if we do not keep it, but sink down into the same careless, indifferent state, unable
to endure temptations and resist the enemy, we do not endure the trial of our faith that
is more precious than gold. We are not suffering for Christ's sake, and glorying in
tribulation. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>There is a great lack of Christian fortitude and serving God from principle. We should
not seek to please and gratify self, but to honour and glorify God, and in all we do and
say to have an eye single to His glory. If we would let our hearts be impressed with the
following important words, and ever bear them in mind, we should not so easily fall into
temptation and our words would be few and well chosen: "He was wounded for our
transgressions, He was bruised for our iniquities: the chastisement of our peace was upon
Him; and with His stripes we are healed." "Every idle word that men shall speak,
they shall give account thereof in the day of judgement." "Thou God seest
me." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We could not think of these important words, and call to mind the sufferings of Jesus
that we poor sinners might receive pardon and be redeemed unto God by His most precious
blood, without feeling a holy restraint upon us and an earnest desire to suffer for Him
who suffered and endured so much for us. If we dwell on these things, dear self, with its
dignity, will be humbled, and its place will be occupied by a childlike simplicity which
will bear reproof from others and will not be easily provoked. A self-willed spirit will
not then come in to rule the soul. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The true Christian's joys and consolation must and will be in heaven. The longing souls
of those who have tasted of the powers of the world to come and have feasted on heavenly
joys, will not be satisfied with things of earth. Such will find enough to do in their
leisure moments. Their souls will be drawn out after God. Where the treasure is, there
will the heart be, holding sweet communion with the God they love and worship. Their
amusement will be in contemplating their treasure--the Holy City, the earth made new,
their eternal home. And while they dwell upon those things which are lofty, pure, and
holy, heaven will be brought near, and they will feel the power of the Holy Spirit, and
this will tend to wean them more and more from the world and cause their consolation and
chief joy to be in the things of heaven, their sweet home. The power of attraction to God
and heaven will then be so great that nothing can draw their minds from the great object
of securing the soul's salvation and honouring and glorifying God. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>As I realise how much has been done for us to keep us right, I am led to exclaim, Oh,
what love, what wondrous love, hath the Son of God for us poor sinners! Should we be
stupid and careless while everything is being done for our salvation that can be done? All
heaven is interested for us. We should be alive and awake to honour, glorify, and adore
the high and lofty One. Our hearts should flow out in love and gratitude to Him who has
been so full of love and compassion to us. With our lives we should honour Him, and with
pure and holy conversation show that we are born from above, that this world is not our
home, but that we are pilgrims and strangers here, travelling to a better country. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Many who profess the name of Christ and claim to be looking for His speedy coming, know
not what it is to suffer for Christ's sake. Their hearts are not subdued by grace, and
they are not dead to self, as is often shown in various ways. At the same time they are
talking of having trials. But the principal cause of their trials is an unsubdued heart,
which makes self so sensitive that it is often crossed. If such could realise what it is
to be a humble follower of Christ, a true Christian, they would begin to work in good
earnest and begin right. They would first die to self, then be instant in prayer, and
check every passion of the heart. Give up your self-confidence and self-sufficiency,
brethren, and follow the meek Pattern. Ever keep Jesus in your mind that He is your
example and you must tread in His footsteps. Look unto Jesus, the author and finisher of
our faith, who for the joy that was set before Him endured the cross, despising the shame.
He endured the contradiction of sinners against Himself. He for our sins was once the
meek, slain lamb, wounded, bruised, smitten, and afflicted. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Let us, then, cheerfully suffer something for Jesus' sake, crucify self daily, and be
partakers of Christ's sufferings here, that we may be made partakers with Him of His
glory, and be crowned with glory, honour, immortality, and eternal life. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Faithfulness in Social Meeting </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown me that great interest should be taken by Sabbathkeepers to keep up
their meetings and make them interesting. There is great necessity of more interest and
energy being manifested in this direction. All should have something to say for the Lord,
for by so doing they will be blest. A book of remembrance is written of those who do not
forsake the assembling of themselves together, but speak often one to another. The remnant
are to overcome by the blood of the Lamb and the word of their testimony. Some expect to
overcome alone by the blood of the Lamb, without making any special effort of their own. I
saw that God has been merciful in giving us the power of speech. He has given us a tongue,
and we are accountable to Him for its use. We should glorify God with our mouth, speaking
in honour of the truth and of His unbounded mercy, and overcome by the word of our
testimony through the blood of the Lamb. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We should not come together to remain silent; those only are remembered of the Lord who
assemble to speak of His honour and glory and tell of His power; upon such the blessing of
God will rest, and they will be refreshed. If all moved as they should, no precious time
would run to waste, and no reproofs would be needed for long prayers and exhortations; all
the time would be occupied by short, pointed testimonies and prayers. Ask, believe, and
receive. There is too much mocking the Lord, too much praying that is no praying and that
wearies angels and displeases God, too many vain, unmeaning petitions. First we should
feel needy, and then ask God for the very things we need, believing that He gives them to
us, even while we ask; and then our faith will grow, all will be edified, the weak will be
strengthened, and the discouraged and desponding made to look up and believe that God is a
rewarder of all those who diligently seek Him. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Some hold back in meeting because they have nothing new to say and must repeat the same
story if they speak. I saw that pride was at the bottom of this, that God and angels
witnessed the testimonies of the saints and were well pleased and glorified by their being
repeated weekly. The Lord loves simplicity and humility, but He is displeased and angels
are grieved when professed heirs of God and joint heirs with Jesus suffer precious time to
run to waste in their meetings. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>If the brethren and sisters were in the place they should be, they would not be at a
loss to find something to say in honour of Jesus, who hung upon Calvary's cross for their
sins. If they would cherish more of a realising sense of the condescension of God in
giving His only beloved Son to die a sacrifice for our sins and transgressions, and of the
sufferings and anguish of Jesus to make a way of escape for guilty man, that he might
receive pardon and live, they would be more ready to extol and magnify Jesus. They could
not hold their peace, but with thankfulness and gratitude would talk of His glory and tell
of His power. And blessings from God would rest upon them by so doing. Even if the same
story were repeated, God would be glorified. The angel showed me those who ceased not day
nor night to cry, "Holy, Holy, Lord God Almighty." "Continued
repetition," said the angel, "yet God is glorified by it." Although we may
tell the same story over and over, it honours God, and shows that we are not unmindful of
His goodness and mercies to us. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the nominal churches have fallen; that coldness and death reign in their
midst. If they would follow the Word of God, it would humble them. But they get above the
work of the Lord. It is too humiliating for them to repeat the same simple story of God's
goodness when they meet together, and they study to get something new, something great,
and to have their words exact to the ear and pleasing to man, and God's Spirit leaves
them. When we follow the humble Bible way, we shall have the movings of the Spirit of God.
All will be in sweet harmony if we follow the humble channel of truth, depending wholly
upon God, and there will be no danger of being affected by the evil angels. It is when
souls get above the Spirit of God, moving in their own strength, that the angels cease
watching over them, and they are left to the buffetings of Satan. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Duties are laid down in God's Word, the performance of which will keep the people of
God humble and separate from the world, and from backsliding, like the nominal churches.
The washing of feet and partaking of the Lord's supper should be more frequently practised.
Jesus set us the example, and told us to do as He had done. I saw that His example should
be as exactly followed as possible; yet brethren and sisters have not always moved as
judiciously as they should in washing feet, and confusion has been caused. It should be
introduced into new places with carefulness and wisdom, especially where the people are
not informed relative to the example and teachings of our Lord on this point, and where
they have prejudice against it. Many honest souls, through the influence of former
teachers in whom they had confidence, are much prejudiced against this plain duty, and the
subject should be introduced to them in a proper time and manner. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>There is no example given in the Word for brethren to wash sisters' feet; but there is
an example for sisters to wash the feet of brethren. Mary washed the feet of Jesus with
her tears, and wiped them with the hair of her head. (See also 1 Tim. 5:10.) I saw that
the Lord had moved upon sisters to wash the feet of brethren and that it was according to
gospel order. All should move understandingly and not make the washing of feet a tedious
ceremony. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The holy salutation mentioned in the gospel of Jesus Christ by the apostle Paul should
ever be considered in its true character. It is a holy kiss. It should be regarded as a
sign of fellowship to Christian friends when parting, and when meeting again after a
separation of weeks or months. In 1 Thessalonians 5:26 Paul says: "Greet all the
brethren with an holy kiss." In the same chapter he says: "Abstain from all
appearance of evil." There can be no appearance of evil when the holy kiss is given
at a proper time and place. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the strong hand of the enemy is set against the work of God, and the help
and strength of everyone who loves the cause of truth should be enlisted; great interest
should be manifested by them to uphold the hands of those who advocate the truth, that by
steady watchcare they may shut out the enemy. All should stand as one, united in the work.
Every energy of the soul should be awake, for what is done must be done quickly. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I then saw the third angel. Said my accompanying angel, "Fearful is his work.
Awful is his mission. He is the angel that is to select the wheat from the tares, and
seal, or bind, the wheat for the heavenly garner. These things should engross the whole
mind, the whole attention." - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>To the Inexperienced </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>Some, I saw, have not a realising sense of the importance of the truth or of its
effect, and moving from the impulse of the moment or from excitement, often follow their
feelings and disregard church order. Such seem to think that religion consists chiefly in
making a noise. Some who have but just received the truth of the third angel's message are
ready to reprove and teach those who have been established in the truth for years, and who
have suffered for its sake and felt its sanctifying power. Those who are so puffed up by
the enemy will have to feel the sanctifying influence of the truth and obtain a realising
sense of how it found them--"wretched, and miserable, and poor, and blind, and
naked." When the truth begins to purify them and purge away their dross and tin, as
it surely will when it is received in the love of it, the one who has this great work done
for him will not feel that he is rich and increased in goods and has need of nothing. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Those who profess the truth and think they know it all before they have learned its
first principles, and who are forward to take the place of teachers and reprove those who
for years have stood stiffly for the truth, plainly show that they have no understanding
of the truth, and know none of its effects; for if they knew any of the sanctifying power,
they should yield the peaceable fruits of righteousness and be humbled under its sweet,
powerful influence. They would bear fruit to the glory of God, and understand what the
truth has done for them, and esteem others better than themselves. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the remnant were not prepared for what is coming upon the earth. Stupidity,
like lethargy, seemed to hang upon the minds of most of those who profess to believe that
we are having the last message. My accompanying angel cried out with awful solemnity,
"Get ready! get ready! get ready! for the fierce anger of the Lord is soon to come.
His wrath is to be poured out, unmixed with mercy, and ye are not ready. Rend the heart,
and not the garment. A great work must be done for the remnant. Many of them are dwelling
upon little trials." Said the angel, "Legions of evil angels are around you, and
are trying to press in their awful darkness, that ye may be ensnared and taken. Ye suffer
your minds to be diverted too readily from the work of preparation and the all-important
truths for these last days. And ye dwell upon little trials and go into minute particulars
of little difficulties to explain them to the satisfaction of this one or that."
Conversation has been protracted for hours between the parties concerned, and not only has
their time been wasted, but the servants of God are held to listen to them, when the
hearts of both parties are unsubdued by grace. If pride and selfishness were laid aside,
five minutes would remove most difficulties. Angels have been grieved and God displeased
by the hours which have been spent in justifying self. I saw that God will not bow down
and listen to long justifications, and He does not want His servants to do so, and thus
precious time be wasted that should be spent in showing transgressors the error of their
ways and pulling souls out of the fire. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that God's people are on the enchanted ground, and that some have lost nearly all
sense of the shortness of time and the worth of the soul. Pride has crept in among
Sabbathkeepers-pride of dress and appearance. Said the angel, "Sabbathkeepers will
have to die to self, die to pride and love of approbation." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Truth, saving truth, must be given to the starving people who are in darkness. I saw
that many prayed for God to humble them; but if God should answer their prayers, it would
be by terrible things in righteousness. It was their duty to humble themselves. I saw that
if self-exaltation was suffered to come in, it would surely lead souls astray, and if not
overcome would prove their ruin. When one begins to get lifted up in his own eyes and
thinks he can do something, the Spirit of God is withdrawn, and he goes on in his own
strength until he is overthrown. I saw that one saint, if he were right, could move the
arm of God; but a multitude together, if they were wrong, would be weak and could effect
nothing. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Many have unsubdued, unhumbled hearts, and think more of their own little grievances
and trials than of the souls of sinners. If they had the glory of God in view, they would
feel for perishing souls around them; and as they realised their perilous situation, would
take hold with energy, exercising faith in God, and hold up the hands of His servants,
that they might boldly, yet in love, declare the truth and warn souls to lay hold upon it
before the sweet voice of mercy should die away. Said the angel, "Those who profess
His name are not ready." I saw that the seven last plagues were coming upon the
shelterless heads of the wicked; and then those who have stood in their way will hear the
bitter reproaches of sinners, and their hearts will faint within them. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Said the angel. "Ye have been picking at straws- dwelling upon little trials-and
sinners must be lost as a consequence." God is willing to work for us in our
meetings, and it is His pleasure to work. But Satan says, "I will hinder the
work." His agents say, "Amen." Professed believers in the truth dwell upon
their petty trials and difficulties which Satan has magnified before them. Time is wasted
that can never be recalled. The enemies of the truth have seen our weakness, God has been
grieved, Christ wounded. Satan's object is accomplished, his plans have succeeded, and he
triumphs. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Self-Denial </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I saw that there was danger of the saints making too great preparations for
conferences; that some were cumbered with too much serving; that the appetite must be
denied. There is danger of some attending the meetings for the loaves and fishes. I saw
that all those who are indulging self by using the filthy weed tobacco, should lay it
aside and put their means to a better use. Those make a sacrifice who deprive themselves
of some gratification and take the means they formerly used to gratify the appetite and
put it into the treasury of the Lord. Like the widow's two mites, such gifts will be
noticed of God. The amount may be small; but if all will do this, it will tell in the
treasury. If all would study to be more economical in their articles of dress, depriving
themselves of some things which are not actually necessary and should lay aside such
useless and injurious things as tea and coffee, giving to the cause what these cost, they
would receive more blessings here and a reward in heaven. Many think that because God has
given them the means, they may live almost above want, can have rich food, and clothe
themselves abundantly, and that it is no virtue to deny themselves when they have enough.
Such do not sacrifice. If they would live a little poorer and give to the cause of God to
help forward the truth, it would be a sacrifice on their part, and when God rewards every
man according to his works, it would be remembered by Him. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Irreverence </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I saw that God's holy name should be used with reverence and awe. The words God
Almighty are coupled together and used by some in prayer in a careless, thoughtless
manner, which is displeasing to Him. Such have no realising sense of God or the truth, or
they would not speak so irreverently of the great and dreadful God, who is soon to judge
them in the last day. Said the angel, "Couple them not together; for fearful is His
name." Those who realise the greatness and majesty of God, will take His name on
their lips with holy awe. He dwelleth in light unapproachable; no man can see Him and
live. I saw that these things will have to be understood and corrected before the church
can prosper.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span>False Shepherds </span></p>
<p><span>I have been shown that the false shepherds were drunk, but not with wine; they stagger,
but not with strong drink. The truth of God is sealed up to them; they cannot read it.
When they are interrogated as to what the seventh-day Sabbath is, whether or not it is the
true Sabbath of the Bible, they lead the mind to fables. I saw that these prophets were
like the foxes of the desert. They have not gone up into the gaps, they have not made up
the hedge that the people of God may stand in the battle in the day of the Lord. When the
minds of any get stirred up, and they begin to inquire of these false shepherds about the
truth, they take the easiest and best manner to effect their object and quiet the minds of
the inquiring ones, even changing their own position to do it. Light has shone on many of
these shepherds, but they would not acknowledge it and have changed their position a
number of times to evade the truth and get away from the conclusions that they must come
to if they continued in their former position. The power of truth tore up their
foundation, but instead of yielding to it they would get up another platform that they
were not satisfied with themselves. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that many of these shepherds had denied the past teachings of God; they had
denied and rejected the glorious truths which they once zealously advocated and had
covered themselves with mesmerism and all kinds of delusions. I saw that they were drunken
with error and were leading on their flock to death. Many of the opposers of God's truth
devise mischief in their heads upon their beds, and in the day they carry out their wicked
devices to put down the truth and to get something new to interest the people and divert
their minds from the precious, all-important truth. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the priests who are leading on their flock to death are soon to be arrested
in their dreadful career. The plagues of God are coming, but it will not be sufficient for
the false shepherds to be tormented with one or two of these plagues. God's hand at that
time will be stretched out still in wrath and justice and will not be brought to Himself
again until His purposes are fully accomplished, and the hireling priests are led to
worship at the feet of the saints, and to acknowledge that God has loved them because they
held fast the truth and kept God's commandments, and until all the unrighteous ones are
destroyed from the earth. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The different parties of professed Advent believers have each a little truth, but God
has given all these truths to His children who are being prepared for the day of God. He
has also given them truths that none of these parties know, neither will they understand.
Things which are sealed up to them, the Lord has opened to those who will see and are
ready to understand. If God has any new light to communicate, He will let His chosen and
beloved understand it, without their going to have their minds enlightened by hearing
those who are in darkness and error. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I was shown the necessity of those who believe that we are having the last message of
mercy, being separate from those who are daily imbibing new errors. I saw that neither
young nor old should attend their meetings; for it is wrong to thus encourage them while
they teach error that is a deadly poison to the soul and teach for doctrines the
commandments of men. The influence of such gatherings is not good. If God has delivered us
from such darkness and error, we should stand fast in the liberty wherewith He has set us
free and rejoice in the truth. God is displeased with us when we go to listen to error,
without being obliged to go; for unless He sends us to those meetings where error is
forced home to the people by the power of the will, He will not keep us. The angels cease
their watchful care over us, and we are left to the buffetings of the enemy, to be
darkened and weakened by him and the power of his evil angels; and the light around us
becomes contaminated with the darkness. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that we have no time to throw away in listening to fables. Our minds should not
be thus diverted, but should be occupied with the present truth, and seeking wisdom that
we may obtain a more thorough knowledge of our position, that with meekness we may be able
to give a reason of our hope from the Scriptures. While false doctrines and dangerous
errors are pressed upon the mind, it cannot be dwelling upon the truth which is to fit and
prepare the house of Israel to stand in the day of the Lord. - <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>God's Gift to Man </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>I have been shown the great love and condescension of God in giving His Son to die that
man might find pardon and live. I was shown Adam and Eve, who were privileged to behold
the beauty and loveliness of the Garden of Eden and were permitted to eat of all the trees
in the garden except one. But the serpent tempted Eve, and she tempted her husband, and
they both ate of the forbidden tree. They broke God's command, and became sinners. The
news spread through heaven, and every harp was hushed. The angels sorrowed, and feared
lest Adam and Eve would again put forth the hand and eat of the tree of life and be
immortal sinners. But God said that He would drive the transgressors from the garden, and
by cherubim and a flaming sword would guard the way of the tree of life, so that man could
not approach unto it and eat of its fruit, which perpetuates immortality. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Sorrow filled heaven as it was realised that man was lost and that the world which God
had created was to be filled with mortals doomed to misery, sickness, and death, and that
there was no way of escape for the offender. The whole family of Adam must die. I then saw
the lovely Jesus and beheld an expression of sympathy and sorrow upon His countenance.
Soon I saw Him approach the exceeding bright light which enshrouded the Father. Said my
accompanying angel, "He is in close converse with His Father." The anxiety of
the angels seemed to be intense while Jesus was communing with His Father. Three times He
was shut in by the glorious light about the Father, and the third time He came from the
Father we could see His person. His countenance was calm, free from all perplexity and
trouble, and shone with a loveliness which words cannot describe. He then made known to
the angelic choir that a way of escape had been made for lost man; that He had been
pleading with His Father, and had obtained permission to give His own life as a ransom for
the race, to bear their sins, and take the sentence of death upon Himself, thus opening a
way whereby they might, through the merits of His blood, find pardon for past
transgressions, and by obedience be brought back to the garden from which they were
driven. Then they could again have access to the glorious, immortal fruit of the tree of
life to which they had now forfeited all right. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Then joy, inexpressible joy, filled heaven, and the heavenly choir sang a song of
praise and adoration. They touched their harps and sang a note higher than they had done
before, because of the great mercy and condescension of God in yielding up His dearly
Beloved to die for a race of rebels. Then praise and adoration was poured forth for the
self-denial and sacrifice of Jesus, in consenting to leave the bosom of His Father, and
choosing a life of suffering and anguish, and an ignominious death, that He might give
life to others. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Said the angel, "Think ye that the Father yielded up His dearly beloved Son
without a struggle? No, no." It was even a struggle with the God of heaven, whether
to let guilty man perish, or to give His darling Son to die for them. Angels were so
interested for man's salvation that there could be found among them those who would yield
their glory and give their life for perishing man. "But," said my accompanying
angel, "that would avail nothing." The transgression was so great that an
angel's life would not pay the debt. Nothing but the death and intercession of God's Son
would pay the debt and save lost man from hopeless sorrow and misery. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>But the work which was assigned the angels was to ascend and descend with strengthening
balm from glory to soothe the Son of God in His life of suffering. They administered unto
Jesus. Also, their work was to guard and keep the subjects of grace from the evil angels
and from the darkness which was constantly thrown around them by Satan. I saw that it was
impossible for God to change His law in order to save lost, perishing man; therefore He
suffered His darling Son to die for man's transgressions. <br />
</span></p><!--mstheme--><span>An Explanation Dear Christian Friends </span>
<p><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>As I have given a brief sketch of my experience and views, published in 1851, it seems
to be my duty to notice some points in that little work, also to give more recent views. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>1. On page 33 is given the following: "I saw that the holy Sabbath is, and will
be, the separating wall between the true Israel of God and unbelievers; and that the
Sabbath is the great question to unite the hearts of God's dear, waiting saints. I saw
that God had children who do not see and keep the Sabbath. They have not rejected the
light upon it. And at the commencement of the time of trouble, we were filled with the
Holy Ghost as we went forth and proclaimed the Sabbath more fully." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>This view was given in 1847 when there were but very few of the Advent brethren
observing the Sabbath, and of these but few supposed that its observance was of sufficient
importance to draw a line between the people of God and unbelievers. Now the fulfilment of
that view is beginning to be seen. "The commencement of that time of trouble,"
here mentioned does not refer to the time when the plagues shall begin to be poured out,
but to a short period just before they are poured out, while Christ is in the sanctuary.
At that time, while the work of salvation is closing, trouble will be coming on the earth,
and the nations will be angry, yet held in check so as not to prevent the work of the
third angel. At that time the "latter rain," or refreshing from the presence of
the Lord, will come, to give power to the loud voice of the third angel, and prepare the
saints to stand in the period when the seven last plagues shall be poured out. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>2. The view of "The Open and Shut Door", on pages 42-45, was given in 1849.
The application of Revelation 3:7, 8, to the heavenly sanctuary and Christ's ministry was
entirely new to me. I had never heard the idea advanced by anyone. Now as the subject of
the sanctuary is being clearly understood, the application is seen in its force and
beauty. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>3. The view that the Lord "had stretched out His hand the second time to recover
the remnant of His people," on page 74, refers only to the union and strength once
existing among those looking for Christ, and to the fact that He had begun to unite and to
raise up His people again. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>4. Spirit Manifestations . On page 43 read as follows: "I saw that the mysterious
knocking in New York and other places was the power of Satan, and that such things would
be more and more common, clothed in a religious garb so as to lull the deceived to greater
security and to draw the minds of God's people, if possible, to those things and cause
them to doubt the teaching and power of the Holy Ghost." This view was given in 1849,
nearly five years since. Then spirit manifestations were mostly confined to the city of
Rochester, known as the "Rochester knockings." Since that time the heresy has
spread beyond the expectations of anyone. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Much of the view on page 59, headed "Mysterious Rapping" given August 1850,
has since been fulfilled, and is now fulfilling. Here is a portion of it: "I saw that
soon it would be considered blasphemy to speak against the rapping, and that it would
spread more and more, that Satan's power would increase, and some of his devoted followers
would have power to work miracles, and even to bring down fire from heaven in the sight of
men. I was shown that by the rapping and mesmerism these modern magicians would yet
account for all the miracles wrought by our Lord Jesus Christ, and that many would believe
that all the mighty works of the Son of God when on earth were accomplished by this same
power." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the rapping delusion-what progress it was making, and that if it were possible it
would deceive the very elect. Satan will have power to bring before us the appearance of
forms purporting to be our relatives or friends now sleeping in Jesus. It will be made to
appear as if these friends were present; the words that they uttered while here, with
which we were familiar, will be spoken, and the same tone of voice that they had while
living will fall upon the ear. All this is to deceive the saints and ensnare them into the
belief of this delusion. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the saints must get a thorough understanding of present truth, which they
will be obliged to maintain from the Scriptures. They must understand the state of the
dead; for the spirits of devils will yet appear to them, professing to be beloved friends
and relatives, who will declare to them that the Sabbath has been changed, also other
unscriptural doctrines. They will do all in their power to excite sympathy and will work
miracles before them to confirm what they declare. The people of God must be prepared to
withstand these spirits with the Bible truth that the dead know not anything, and that
they who appear to them are the spirits of devils. Our minds must not be taken up with
things around us, but must be occupied with the present truth and a preparation to give a
reason of our hope with meekness and fear. We must seek wisdom from on high that we may
stand in this day of error and delusion. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>We must examine well the foundation of our hope, for we shall have to give a reason for
it from the Scriptures. This delusion will spread, and we shall have to contend with it
face to face; and unless we are prepared for it, we shall be ensnared and overcome. But if
we do what we can on our part to be ready for the conflict that is just before us, God
will do His part, and His all-powerful arm will protect us. He would sooner send every
angel out of glory to the relief of faithful souls, to make a hedge about them, than have
them deceived and led away by the lying wonders of Satan. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw the rapidity with which this delusion was spreading. A train of cars was shown
me, going with the speed of lightning. The angel bade me look carefully. I fixed my eyes
upon the train. It seemed that the whole world was on board, that there could not be one
left. Said the angel, "They are binding in bundles ready to burn." Then he
showed me the conductor, who appeared like a stately, fair person, whom all the passengers
looked up to and reverenced. I was perplexed and asked my attending angel who it was. He
said, "It is Satan. He is the conductor in the form of an angel of light. He has
taken the world captive. They are given over to strong delusions, to believe a lie, that
they may be damned. This agent, the next highest in order to him, is the engineer, and
other of his agents are employed in different offices as he may need them, and they are
all going with lightning speed to perdition." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I asked the angel if there were none left. He bade me look in an opposite direction,
and I saw a little company travelling a narrow pathway. All seemed to be firmly united,
bound together by the truth, in bundles, or companies. Said the angel, "The third
angel is binding, or sealing, them in bundles for the heavenly garner." This little
company looked careworn, as if they had passed through severe trials and conflicts. And it
appeared as if the sun had just risen from behind a cloud and shone upon their
countenances, causing them to look triumphant, as if their victories were nearly won. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that the Lord has given the world opportunity to discover the snare. This one
thing is evidence enough for the Christian, if there were no other; namely, that there is
no difference made between the precious and the vile. Thomas Paine, whose body has now
mouldered to dust and who is to be called forth at the end of the one thousand years, at
the second resurrection, to receive his reward and suffer the second death, is represented
by Satan as being in heaven, and highly exalted there. Satan used him on earth as long as
he could, and now he is carrying on the same work through pretensions of having Thomas
Paine so much exalted and honoured in heaven; as he taught here, Satan would make it
appear that he is teaching in heaven. There are some who have looked with horror at his
life and death, and his corrupt teachings while living, but who now submit to be taught by
him, one of the vilest and most corrupt of men, one who despised God and His law. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>He who is the father of lies, blinds and deceives the world by sending forth his angels
to speak for the apostles, and to make it appear that they contradict what they wrote by
the dictation of the Holy Ghost when on earth. These lying angels make the apostles to
corrupt their own teachings and to declare them to be adulterated. By so doing Satan
delights to throw professed Christians and all the world into uncertainty about the Word
of God. That holy Book cuts directly across his track and thwarts his plans; therefore he
leads them to doubt its divine origin. Then he sets up the infidel, Thomas Paine, as if he
were ushered into heaven when he died, and now, united with the holy apostles whom he
hated on earth, were engaged in teaching the world. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Satan assigns to each of his angels a part to act. He enjoins upon them all to be sly,
artful, cunning. He instructs some of them to act the part of the apostles and to speak
for them, while others are to act the part of infidels and wicked men who died cursing
God, but now appear to be very religious. There is no difference made between the most
holy apostles and the vilest infidel. They are both made to teach the same thing. It
matters not whom Satan makes to speak, if his object is only accomplished. He was so
intimately connected with Paine upon the earth, aiding him in his work, that it is an easy
thing for him to know the very words Paine used and the very handwriting of one who served
him so faithfully and accomplished his purposes so well. Satan dictated much of his
writings, and it is an easy thing for him to dictate sentiments through his angels now and
make it appear that they come through Thomas Paine, who, while living, was a devoted
servant of the evil one. This is the masterpiece of Satan. All this teaching, purporting
to be from apostles and saints and wicked men who have died, comes directly from his
satanic majesty. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The fact that Satan claims that one whom he loved so well, and who hated God so
perfectly, is now with the holy apostles and angels in glory, should be enough to remove
the veil from all minds and discover to them the dark, mysterious works of Satan. He
virtually says to the world and to infidels, No matter how wicked you are, no matter
whether you believe or disbelieve in God or the Bible, live as you please, heaven is your
home; for all know that if Thomas Paine is in heaven, and so exalted, they will surely get
there. This error is so glaring that all may see if they will. Satan is now doing through
persons like Thomas Paine what he has been trying to do since his fall. He is, through his
power and lying wonders, tearing away the foundation of the Christian's hope and putting
out the sun that is to light them in the narrow way to heaven. He is making the world
believe that the Bible is uninspired, no better than a storybook, while he holds out
something to take its place; namely, spiritual manifestations! <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Here is a channel wholly devoted to himself and under his control, and he can make the
world believe what he will. The Book that is to judge him and his followers he puts back
in the shade, just where he wants it. The Saviour of the world he makes to be no more than
a common man; and as the Roman guard that watched the tomb of Jesus spread the lying
report that the chief priests and elders put into their mouths, so will the poor, deluded
followers of these pretended spiritual manifestations repeat and try to make it appear
that there is nothing miraculous about our Saviour's birth, death, and resurrection. After
putting Jesus in the background, they attract the attention of the world to themselves and
to their miracles and lying wonders, which, they declare, far exceed the works of Christ.
Thus the world is taken in the snare and lulled into a feeling of security, not to find
out their awful deception until the seven last plagues are poured out. Satan laughs as he
sees his plan succeed so well and the whole world taken in the snare. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>5. On page 55, I stated that a cloud of glorious light covered the Father and that His
person could not be seen. I also stated that I saw the Father rise from the throne. The
Father was enshrouded with a body of light and glory, so that His person could not be
seen; yet I knew that it was the Father and that from His person emanated this light and
glory. When I saw this body of light and glory rise from the throne, I knew it was because
the Father moved, therefore said, I saw the Father rise. The glory, or excellency, of His
form I never saw; no one could behold it and live; yet the body of light and glory that
enshrouded His person could be seen. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I also stated that "Satan appeared to be by the throne, trying to carry on the
work of God." I will give another sentence from the same page: "I turned to look
at the company who were still bowed before the throne." Now this praying company was
in this mortal state, on the earth, yet represented to me as bowed before the throne. I
never had the idea that these individuals were actually in the New Jerusalem. Neither did
I ever think that any mortal could suppose that I believed that Satan was actually in the
New Jerusalem. But did not John see the great red dragon in heaven? Certainly. "And
there appeared another wonder in heaven; and behold a great red dragon, having seven heads
and ten horns." Rev. 12:3. What a monster to be in heaven! Here seems to be as good a
chance for ridicule as in the interpretation which some have placed upon my statements. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>6. On pages 48-52 is a view given January, 1850. That portion of this view which
relates to means being withheld from the messengers, applied more particularly to that
time. Since then, friends of the cause of present truth have been raised up, who have
watched for opportunity to do good with their means. Some have handed out too freely, to
the injury of the receivers. For about two years I have been shown more relative to a
careless and too free use of the Lord's money, than a lack of it. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The following is from a view given at Jackson, Michigan, June 2, 1853. It related
mostly to the brethren at that place: "I saw that the brethren commenced to sacrifice
their property and handed it out without having the true object set before them-the
suffering cause-and they handed out too freely, too much, and too often. I saw that the
teachers should have stood in a place to correct this error and exert a good influence in
the church. Money has been made of little or no consequence, the sooner disposed of the
better. A bad example has been set by some in accepting large donations and not giving the
least caution to those who had means not to use it too freely and carelessly. By accepting
so large an amount of means, without questioning whether God had made it the duty of the
brethren to bestow so largely, too bountiful giving has been sanctioned. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>"Those who gave also erred, not being particular to inquire into the necessities
of the case, whether there was actual need or not. Those who had means were thrown into
great perplexity. One brother was much hurt by too much means being put into his hands. He
did not study economy, but lived extravagantly, and in his travels laid out money here and
there to no profit. He spread a wrong influence by making such free use of the Lord's
money, and would say in his own heart, and to others, 'There is means enough in J--, more
than can be used before the Lord comes.' Some were very much injured by such a course and
came into the truth with wrong views, not realising that it was the Lord's money they were
using and not feeling the worth of it. Those poor souls who have just embraced the third
angel's message and have had such an example set before them will have much to learn to
deny self and suffer for Christ's sake. They will have to learn to give up ease, cease
studying their convenience and comfort, and bear in mind the worth of souls. Those who
feel the 'woe' upon them will not be for making great preparations to travel in ease and
comfort. Some who have no calling have been encouraged into the field. Others have been
affected by these things and have not felt the need of economy, of denying themselves, and
putting into the treasury of the Lord. They would feel and say, 'There are others who have
means enough; they will give for the paper. I need not do anything. The paper will be
supported without my help.'" <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>It has been no small trial to me to see that some have taken that portion of my views
which related to sacrificing property to sustain the cause and made a wrong use of it;
they use means extravagantly, while neglecting to carry out the principles of other
portions. On page 50, read the following: "I saw that the cause of God had been
hindered and dishonoured by some travelling who had no message from God. Such will have to
give an account to God for every dollar they have used in travelling where it was not
their duty to go, because that money might have helped on the cause of God." Also,
page 50: "I saw that those who have strength to labour with their hands, and help
sustain the cause, were as accountable for their strength as others were for their
property." <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I would here call special attention to the view of this subject given on page 57. Here
is a short extract: "The object of the words of our Saviour [in Luke 12:33] has not
been clearly presented." I saw that "the object of selling is not to give to
those who are able to labour and support themselves, but to spread the truth. It is a sin
to support and indulge in idleness those who are able to labour. Some have been zealous to
attend all the meetings, not to glorify God, but for the 'loaves and fishes.' Such would
much better have been at home labouring with their hands, 'the thing that is good,' to
supply the wants of their families, and to have something to give to sustain the precious
cause." It has been Satan's design in times past to push out some with a hurried
spirit to make a too free use of means, and influence the brethren to rashly dispose of
their property, that through an abundance of means thrown out carelessly and hastily,
souls might be injured and lost, and that now, when the truth is to be spread more
extensively, the lack might be felt. His design has, in some degree, been accomplished. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown the error of many in looking to those only who have property to
support the publication of the paper and tracts. All should act their part. Those who have
strength to labour with their hands, and earn means to help sustain the cause, are as
accountable for it as others are for their property. Every child of God who professes to
believe the present truth, should be zealous to act his part in this cause. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>July, 1853, I saw that it was not as it should be that the paper, owned and approved by
God, should come out so seldom. The cause, in the time in which we are living, demands the
paper weekly, and the publication of many more tracts to expose the increasing errors of
this time; but the work is hindered for want of means. I saw that the truth must go and
that we must not be too fearful, that tracts and papers might better go to three where
they were not needed than to have one deprived of them who prizes them and can be
benefited by them. I saw that the last-day signs should be brought out clearly, for the
manifestations of Satan are on the increase. The publications of Satan and his agents are
increasing, their power is growing, and what we do to get the truth before others must be
done quickly. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I was shown that the truth once published now, will stand, for it is the truth for the
last days; it will live, and less need be said upon it in future. Numberless words need
not be put upon paper to justify what speaks for itself and shines in its clearness. Truth
is straight, plain, clear, and stands out boldly in its own defence; but it is not so with
error. It is so winding and twisting that it needs a multitude of words to explain it in
its crooked form. I saw that all the light they had received in some places had come from
the paper; that souls had received the truth in this way, and then talked it to others;
and that now in places where there are several, they had been raised up by this silent
messenger. It was their only preacher. The cause of truth should not be hindered in its
onward progress for want of means. <br />
</span></p>
<p><!--mstheme--><span>Gospel Order </span><!--mstheme--></p>
<p><span>The Lord has shown that gospel order has been too much feared and neglected. Formality
should be shunned; but, in so doing, order should not be neglected. There is order in
heaven. There was order in the church when Christ was upon the earth, and after His
departure order was strictly observed among His apostles. And now in these last days,
while God is bringing His children into the unity of the faith, there is more real need of
order than ever before; for, as God unites His children, Satan and his evil angels are
very busy to prevent this unity and to destroy it. Therefore men are hurried into the
field who lack wisdom and judgement, perhaps not ruling well their own house, and not
having order or government over the few that God has given them charge of at home; yet
they feel capable of having charge of the flock. They make many wrong moves, and those
unacquainted with our faith judge all the messengers to be like these self-sent men. Thus
the cause of God is reproached, and the truth shunned by many unbelievers who would
otherwise be candid and anxiously inquire, Are these things so? <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Men whose lives are not holy and who are unqualified to teach the present truth enter
the field without being acknowledged by the church or the brethren generally, and
confusion and disunion are the result. Some have a theory of the truth, and can present
the argument, but lack spirituality, judgement, and experience; they fail in many things
which it is very necessary for them to understand before they can teach the truth. Others
have not the argument, but because a few brethren hear them pray well and give an exciting
exhortation now and then, they are pressed into the field, to engage in a work for which
God has not qualified them and for which they have not sufficient experience and judgement.
Spiritual pride comes in, they are lifted up, and act under the deception of thinking that
they are labourers. They do not know themselves. They lack sound judgement and patient
reasoning, talk boastingly of themselves, and assert many things which they cannot prove
from the Word. God knows this; therefore He does not call such to labour in these perilous
times, and brethren should be careful not to push those out into the field whom He has not
called. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Those men who are not called of God are generally the very ones that are the most
confident that they are so called and that their labours are very important. They go into
the field and do not generally exert a good influence; yet in some places they have a
measure of success, and this leads them and others to think that they are surely called of
God. It is not a positive evidence that men are called of God because they have some
success; for angels of God are now moving upon the hearts of His honest children to
enlighten their understanding as to the present truth, that they may lay hold upon it and
live. And even if self-sent men put themselves where God does not put them and profess to
be teachers, and souls receive the truth by hearing them talk it, this is no evidence that
they are called of God. The souls who receive the truth from them receive it to be brought
into trial and bondage, as they afterward find that these men were not standing in the
counsel of God. Even if wicked men talk the truth, some may receive it; but it does not
bring those who talked it into any more favour with God. Wicked men are wicked men still,
and according to the deception they practised upon those who were beloved of God, and
according to the confusion brought into the church, so will be their punishment; their
sins will not remain covered, but will be exposed in the day of God's fierce anger. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>These self-sent messengers are a curse to the cause. Honest souls put confidence in
them, thinking that they are moving in the counsel of God and that they are in union with
the church, and therefore suffer them to administer the ordinances, and, as duty is made
plain that they must do their first works, allow themselves to be baptised by them. But
when light comes, as it surely will, and they are aware that these men are not what they
understood them to be, God's called and chosen messengers, they are thrown into trial and
doubt as to the truth they have received and feel that they must learn it all over again;
they are troubled and perplexed by the enemy about all their experience, whether God has
led them or not, and are not satisfied until they are again baptised and begin an </span></p>
<p><span>messengers to go into places where those have been who have exerted this wrong
influence than to enter new fields. God's servants have to deal plainly, act openly, and
not cover up wrongs; for they are standing between the living and the dead and must render
an account of their faithfulness, their mission, and the influence they exert over the
flock of which the Lord has made them overseers. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Those who receive the truth and are brought into such trials would have had the truth
the same if these men had stayed away and filled the humble place the Lord designed for
them. God's eye was upon His jewels, and He would have directed to them His called and
chosen messengers--men who would have moved understandingly. The light of truth would have
shown and discovered to these souls their true position, and they would have received the
truth understandingly and been satisfied with its beauty and clearness. And as they felt
its powerful effects, they would have been strong and shed a holy influence. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>Again the danger of those travelling whom God has not called, was shown me. If they do
have some success, the qualifications that are lacking will be felt. Injudicious moves
will be made, and by a lack of wisdom some precious souls may be driven where they can
never be reached. I saw that the church should feel their responsibility and should look
carefully and attentively at the lives, qualifications, and general course of those who
profess to be teachers. If unmistakable evidence is not given that God has called them,
and that the "woe" is upon them if they heed not this call, it is the duty of
the church to act and let it be known that these persons are not acknowledged as teachers
by the church. This is the only course the church can take in order to be clear in this
matter, for the burden lies upon them. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that this door at which the enemy comes in to perplex and trouble the flock can
be shut. I inquired of the angel how it could be closed. He said, "The church must
flee to God's Word and become established upon gospel order, which has been overlooked and
neglected." This is indispensably necessary in order to bring the church into the
unity of the faith. I saw that in the apostles' day the church was in danger of being
deceived and imposed upon by false teachers. Therefore the brethren chose men who had
given good evidence that they were capable of ruling well their own house and preserving
order in their own families, and who could enlighten those who were in darkness. Inquiry
was made of God concerning these, and then, according to the mind of the church and the
Holy Ghost, they were set apart by the laying on of hands. Having received their
commission from God and having the approbation of the church, they went forth baptising in
the name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, and administering the ordinances of the
Lord's house, often waiting upon the saints by presenting them the emblems of the broken
body and spilt blood of the crucified Saviour, to keep fresh in the memory of God's
beloved children His sufferings and death. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>I saw that we are no more secure from false teachers now than they were in the
apostles' days; and, if we do no more, we should take as special measures as they did to
secure the peace, harmony, and union of the flock. We have their example, and should
follow it. Brethren of experience and of sound minds should assemble, and following the
Word of God and the sanction of the Holy Spirit, should, with fervent prayer, lay hands
upon those who have given full proof that they have received their commission of God, and
set them apart to devote themselves entirely to His work. This act would show the sanction
of the church to their going forth as messengers to carry the most solemn message ever
given to men. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>God will not entrust the care of His precious flock to men whose mind and judgement
have been weakened by former errors that they have cherished, such as so-called
perfectionism and Spiritualism, and who, by their course while in these errors, have
disgraced themselves and brought reproach upon the cause of truth. Although they may now
feel free from error and competent to go forth and to teach this last message, God will
not accept them. He will not entrust precious souls to their care; for their judgement was
perverted while in error, and is now weakened. The great and holy One is a jealous God,
and He will have holy men to carry His truth. The holy law spoken by God from Sinai as a
part of Himself, and holy men who are its strict observers will alone honour Him by
teaching it to others. <br />
</span></p>
<p><span>The servants of God who tea